Mitsubishi Electric MAM-GM24 Technical information

2008/2009
De wereld van de automatisering
Een wereld vol oplossingen
Wereldwijde service & support /// Innovatieve oplossingen ///
Internationale standaards /// Hoge rendabiliteit ///
Global Player /// Global Player /// Global Player /// Global Player /// Global
Mitsubishi Electric
Uw global player
Uit onze ervaring en beste ideeën
ontwikkelen wij de meest geavanceerde
technologieën die aansluiten op uw
behoeften. Bij Mitsubishi Electric hebben wij begrepen dat technologie de
drijvende kracht is voor veranderingen
in ons leven.
Doordat wij meer gemak brengen in ons
dagelijks leven, de productiviteit verhogen en de maatschappij in beweging
houden, integreren wij technologie en
innovatie om veranderingen te bereiken
die voor u van nut zijn.
Met haar motto "Changes for the better" biedt Mitsubishi Electric goede perspectieven voor
de toekomst.
Mitsubishi Electric is actief op vele terreinen, onder andere:
ment, zoals airconditioningtoestellen en
systemen voor consumentenelektronica.
쐽 Energie- en elektrische systemen
쐽 Informatie- en communicatie-
Commerciële en consumentgerichte
voorzieningen, producten en systemen.
쐽 Elektronische apparaten
쐽 Industriële automatiserings-
Halfgeleidercomponenten op de nieuwste stand van de techniek voor systemen
en producten.
쐽 Apparaten voor huishoudelijk
gebruik
Betrouwbare producten voor de consu-
systemen
Van generatoren tot grootbeeldscherm,
een breed productaanbod met elektrische systemen.
techniek
Maximaliseren van productiviteit en rendabiliteit door uitstekende automatiseringstechnologie.
/// Inhoud /// Inhoud /// Inhoud /// Inhoud /// Inhoud /// Inhoud /// Inhoud
Inhoud
Mitsubishi Electric stelt zich voor
4
Toepassingen in de praktijk
6
De kwaliteit van morgen is het doel van vandaag
12
European Service Group
14
Automatiseringsoplossingen
16
Kleine besturingen/compacte PLC's/modulaire PLC's
18
HMI/GOT/software
20
Frequentieomvormers
22
Servo/Motion
24
Robots
26
Laagspanning
28
Toepassingen
30
Man ufactur
ing
Mitsubishi
Int
egrated
FA Software
Sectie 2: Technische informatie
Global partner. Local friend /// Global partner. Local friend /// Global partn
In heel Europa
voor u aanwezig
Dankzij een open samenwerking tussen leveranciers en klant kunnen resultaten sneller en effectiever worden bereikt.
Van productontwikkeling tot en met de
realisering van complete productie-installaties kunnen wij inmiddels terugkijken op
meer dan 75 jaar ervaring op het gebied
van de industriële automatiseringstechniek. Deze gedurende decennia opgebouwde kennis en het complete productportfolio stellen ons in staat op maat
gemaakte oplossingen voor onze klanten
uit te werken die aan alle denkbare eisen
voldoen. Dankzij ons wereldwijde netwerk van diensten bieden wij niet alleen
after-sales-service, maar ook scholingen
en technische ondersteuning.
Global partner,
local friend
Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation
staat synoniem voor innovatieve hightech-kwaliteitsproducten. Onze programmabesturingen, aandrijftechniek
en industrierobots behoren mede tot de
meest krachtige in hun klasse. Zij dragen
thans al bijna 0 jaar bij aan het succes
van de Europese industriële productie.
Verkoop en
support altijd
bij u in buurt
De Factory-Automation-groep beschikt
over eigen verkooporganisaties in
Duitsland, Engeland, Frankrijk, Ierland,
Italië, Spanje en Rusland. Daarnaast staat
een uitgebreid netwerk van verkooppartners in heel Europa en aangrenzende landen ter beschikking.
Voor de coördinatie, besturing en het
kwaliteitsmanagement van lokale support-activiteiten staat onze Europese
support-groep (ESG) gereed. Deze wordt
daarbij ondersteund door ons Europese
ontwikkelingscentrum (EDC) en het
EMC-competentiecentrum.
ner /// Vertrouwen en loyaliteit /// Vertrouwen en loyaliteit /// Vertrouwen
Vertrouwen en loyaliteit - net zo
belangrijk als productkwaliteit
De samenwerking met betrouwbare
partners uit de automatiseringsindustrie
is één van de sleutels voor het succes van
Mitsubishi. Tegenwoordig verwachten
klanten meer dan ooit oplossingen die
zijn afgestemd op de specifieke behoeften van hun toepassingen. De ervaring
van onze partners in speciale bedrijfstakken, gekoppeld aan de innovatieve automatiseringstechnologie van Mitsubishi
Electric, vormen de twee hoofdbestanddelen voor succesvolle made-to-orderoplossingen en een perfecte klantenservice.
Marktleider
In de productiewereld zijn veranderingen alomtegenwoordig. Om ervoor te
zorgen dat onze producten ook aan de
actuele behoeften van onze klanten voldoen, houden wij bij de productontwikkeling en -productie steeds rekening
met de markteisen. Door de invoering
van een programma voor kwaliteitscontrole lukt het ons om de hoge standaard
m.b.t. productbetrouwbaarheid te behouden en deze verder uit te bouwen.
Als men al deze factoren bekijkt, is het
niet vreemd dat onze klanten de automatiseringsproducten van Mitsubishi als
marktleidend beschouwen.
Service centraal
De klant staat altijd in het middelpunt
van onze servicediensten. Onze ervaren
medewerkers ondersteunen elke klant
met competent advies en helpen bij
planning, projecten, installatie en configuratie, training en alle automatiseringsspecifieke vragen en eisen. Een geoptimaliseerd voorraadbeheer en centrale
logistiekcentra zorgen voor een snelle en
efficiënte levering van reserveonderdelen en accessoires. Voor de snelle levering van technische informatie en ondersteuning behandelen wij vragen van
klanten in heel Europa via onze telefoonhotline.
Maatstaven
zetten
Mitsubishi heeft de reputatie kwalitatief
hoogwaardige producten te vervaardigen. Deze berust deels op het feit dat het
bedrijf de eisen van internationale standaards en richtlijnen begrijpt en hieraan
voldoet. Naast het voldoen aan de
Europese CE-richtlijnen beschikken veel
producten over certificaten, zoals:
쐽 E-Mark, voor gebruik in voertuigen
쐽 scheepstoelatingen, zoals ABS, DNV,
GL, RINA, BV, Lloyd's Register
쐽 internationale keurmerken, zoals UL
(USA), CUL (Canada) en GOST
(Rusland)
Wij laten niets aan het toeval over.
Om deze reden staat de naam Mitsubishi
synoniem voor uitstekende kwaliteit.
Producten van Mitsubishi Electric worden algemeen beschouwd als de meest
innovatieve in de industrie. Wereldwijd is
elke derde PLC tegenwoordig een
Mitsubishi-PLC. Zelfs enkele van onze
concurrenten gebruiken de Mitsubishi
power-vermogen-management-technologie in hun eigen frequentieomvormers.
5
Water /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Water /// Automatiseringsoplossinge
Water
Toepassingsvoorbeeld
Firma: Klinting Vandvaerk
Plaats: Denemarken
Uitvoerende firma: PRO/AUTOMATIC
Toepassing: Waterpompstation
Producten: Mitsubishi System Q PLC en
frequentieomvormer, Wago decentrale I/O
Netwerk: CC-link
Aanwijzing:
Boorgaten zijn tot 1, km verwijderd van
pompstation
Commentaar:
"Het was eenvoudig om het netwerk in te
richten en het biedt enkele zeer krachtige
en unieke features."
(Jean Petersen PRO/AUTOMATIC)
Water is het elixer van het leven en een
kritisch element. Zonder een constante
en zuivere kwaliteit van drinkwater en
industriewater en zonder gewaarborgde
afvalwaterverwerking zou onze maatschappij zeer snel in elkaar zakken. Automatiseringsoplossingen moeten economisch en flexibel zijn om aan de
wisselende eisen van de markt te voldoen. Investeringen moeten de prestatie- en concurrentiekracht versterken en
profijtelijke winsten behalen. Reden
waarom steeds meer nutsbedrijven op
Mitsubishi Electric vertrouwen.
en /// Voedingsmiddelen /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Voedingsmiddelen
Voedingsmiddelen
Van kant-en-klare salades via voorgebakken deegwaren tot en met diepvriesproducten: de consument krijgt een uitgebreid aanbod van verschillende
soorten levensmiddelen. Veel van deze
levensmiddelen worden van ver weg
aangeleverd, moeten snel worden verwerkt en aan de consument worden
geleverd. Omdat levensmiddelen
gevoelige goederen zijn, zijn zij onderworpen aan strenge regels met betrekking tot bewijs van herkomst, prijs, verpakking en kwaliteitscontrole. Op al
deze terreinen biedt Mitsubishi Electric
de vereiste vakkennis.
Toepassingsvoorbeeld
Firma: Virgin Trading (Virgin Cola)
Plaats: Ierland
Uitvoerende firma: Charles Wait
Toepassing: Productie van cola-concentraat
Producten: Mitsubishi MX SCADA en
modulaire PLC
Aanwijzing:
Deze productie-installatie behoort tot de
installaties met het meeste vermogen in de
wereld. Zes medewerkers produceren tot
miljard liter cola per jaar.
Commentaar:
"Wij hebben voor Mitsubishi gekozen …
vanwege hun goede reputatie met betrekking tot betrouwbaarheid en wereldwijde
ondersteuning, vooral in de levensmiddelenindustrie."
(Rod Golightly, Charles Wait)
7
Productie /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Productie/// Automatiseringsop
Productie
Toepassingsvoorbeeld
Firma: Kaba-groep
Plaats: Oostenrijk
Toepassing: Fabricage van sleutels
Producten: Mitsubishi-robots van de
RV-serie
Aanwijzing:
Er worden twee robots gebruikt, één om
het messingstuk in de frees te plaatsen en
een tweede om bewerkte sleutels uit te
nemen en met behulp van een roterende
borstel te polijsten.
Commentaar:
"Door het gebruik van de robots waren wij
in staat om de kosten te verlagen en de
bewerkingstijd drastisch te reduceren."
(Robert Weninghofer productiemanager
bij Kaba)
8
De productie bevindt zich, zoals op ieder
technisch gebied, onder voortdurende
druk om innovatieve producten zo
goedkoop mogelijk te kunnen produceren. Verantwoordelijken in de productie
zoeken principieel naar automatiseringsoplossingen die aan de gecompliceerde hoge eisen voldoen, daarbij echter flexibiliteit, beschikbaarheid en
rendabiliteit niet buiten beschouwing
laten. Dit is één van de redenen, waarom
fabrikanten de afgelopen 5 jaar wereldwijd meer dan 8 miljoen FX-PLC's hebben gekocht.
plossingen /// Autoindustrie /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Autoindustrie
Autoindustrie
Kortere productiecyclussen, aanpasbare
productieprocessen en integratie van
alle terreinen in het fabricageproces
maken de autoindustrie wereldwijd tot
de meest productieve fabricagetak.
Daarom kiezen autofabrikanten wereldwijd voor Mitsubishi en vertrouwen op
haar grote deskundigheid in de automatisering.
Toepassingsvoorbeeld
Firma: Global Engine Manufacturing
Alliance (GEMA)
Plaats: VS
Toepassing: Fabricage van motoren van
motorvoertuigen
Producten: Mitsubishi System Q PLC, HMI's
van de A900-serie, MR-JS servoversterkers,
C CNC-besturingen en software
Aanwijzing:
GEMA is een fusie van de Chrysler-groep,
Mitsubishi Motors en de Hyundai Motor Co.
GEMA beschikt over twee productielocaties
die samen tot ongeveer 80.000 motoren
per jaar zullen produceren.
Commentaar:
De Chrysler-groep schat dat zij door het
nieuwe automatiseringsconcept
ca. 100 miljoen dollar per jaar zal besparen.
9
Chemische industrie /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Chemische industr
Chemische industrie
Toepassingsvoorbeeld
Firma: Follmann & Co.
Plaats: Duitsland
Toepassing: Lijmproductie
Producten: Mitsubishi PLC van de FXNserie, HMI van de E900-serie,
Frequentieomvormer van de FR-S500-serie
Netwerken: ethernet + veldbus
Aanwijzing:
Het systeem stuurt de fabricage van 17 verschillende soorten lijm.
Commentaar:
"Dit economische alternatief voor centrale
besturingen maakt alle functies, het proces
en de productiegegevens transparant - van
het begin van de productie tot en met de
bedrijfsleiding."
(Axel Schuschies, hoofd productie)
10
De hoge concurrentiedruk in de chemische en farmaceutische industrie leidt
tot een voortdurend streven om altijd
gelijke tred te houden met de markt.
Nieuw in het laboratorium ontwikkelde
producten moeten zo snel mogelijk worden opgenomen in de productie. Om dit
veilig, snel en economisch om te zetten,
zijn flexibele automatiseringsoplossingen vereist die aan de gestelde hoge
eisen voldoen. De automatiseringsproducten van Mitsubishi Electric voldoen
aan deze eisen.
rie /// Procestechniek /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Procestechniek ///
Procestechniek
In veel geautomatiseerde toepassingen
vinden doorlopende processen plaats
die in veel opzichten van elkaar verschillen. Of het nu krachtcentrales of afvalverbrandingsinstallaties zijn, hoe gecompliceerd de toepassing ook is, de
rendabiliteit staat altijd voorop.
Bovendien zijn bijvoorbeeld de bewaking en handhaving van industriële
afvalproducten onderhevig aan strenge
regels, zoals de Europese afvalrichtlijn
IPPC. Speciaal voor deze eisen heeft
Mitsubishi haar System Q ontwikkeld.
Toepassingsvoorbeeld
Firma: European Vinyls Corporation (EVC)
Plaats: Groot-Brittannië
Uitvoerende firma: Tritec
Toepassing: warmtekrachtcentrale
Producten: Redundante PLC van het
System Q van Mitsubishi, MX SCADA
Aanwijzing:
Door het gebruik van een redundante PLC
wordt, in vergelijking met een traditionele
oplossing, een besparing op de kosten
gerealiseerd van 5 %. Het geïnstalleerde
systeem verlaagt de kosten met £500.000
(ca. 0,75 miljoen €) per jaar. De besturing
rendeerde reeds na maanden.
Commentaar:
"Het door ons ontwikkelde PLC-systeem
kostte ca. 50.000 £, een conventioneel
systeem zou 1 miljoen £ hebben gekost."
(Tim Hartley, Tritec)
11
Kwaliteit van morgen /// Doelen van vandaag /// Kwaliteit van morgen ///
De kwaliteit van morgen...
Onafhankelijk van de toepassing, de
bedrijfstak of de grootte van de onderneming biedt Mitsubishi haar klanten de
best mogelijke service. Dit betekent ook
precieze kennis en verstand van de
behoeften van de klant alsmede rekening houden met wettelijke en sociale
veranderingen om de producten van
morgen te ontwikkelen.
In de technologie van morgen moeten wij vandaag investeren.
Hart en ziel van
de toekomst
Onderzoek en ontwikkeling is het
levenselixer van Mitsubishi Electric.
Onze onderzoeks- en ontwikkelingscentra in Japan, de Verenigde Staten
en Europa werken vandaag aan de
innovatieve technologieën voor de
baanbrekende producten van morgen.
Mitsubishi Electric investeert ca. % van
haar omzet in de ontwikkeling van nieuwe technologieën.
1
/ Doelen van vandaag /// Kwaliteit van morgen /// Doelen van vandaag ///
...is het doel van vandaag
Door verschillende programma's en systemen proberen wij op diverse manieren
het doel te naderen om onze planeet
duurzaam te behouden. Van de verwerving van grondstoffen tot het ontwerp
van het product, van de fabricage tot
aan de logistiek blijkt hoe milieubewust
denken en handelen in onze bedrijfsfilosofie zijn verankerd.
Ondersteuning
van het milieu
Dit begrip voor het evenwicht tussen
efficiënte automatisering en het bewustzijn voor ons milieu helpt ons om de
behoeften van onze klanten beter te
begrijpen. Een voorbeeld hiervan is de
afvalregistratie en -verwerking in overeenstemming met de Europese richtlijn
voor de geïntegreerde voorkoming en
vermindering van de milieuvervuiling
(IPPC).
Dit is een immense uitdaging die
Mitsubishi Electric dagelijks aangaat,
zonder het doel uit het oog te verliezen.
Het doel is een globale maatschappij,
waarin zich het leven continu in harmonische coëxistentie met het natuurlijk
milieu verder ontwikkelt.
Allemaal een kwestie van evenwicht: Het
evenwicht tussen een effectief gebruik
van resources, een efficiënte benutting
van energie en een veilige omgang met
milieugevaarlijke substanties.
En zo wordt in de productieplaatsen van
Mitsubishi conform richtlijn ISO 1000
gewerkt en worden milieuvriendelijke
producten geproduceerd.
Voor een veilige toekomst.
1
European Service Group /// European Service Group /// European Service G
Product en service
Technische ondersteuning betekent: meteen de juiste antwoorden krijgen.
Bij de zoektocht naar de juiste automatiseringspartner richten onze klanten zich
op de bedrijfscontinuïteit en marktbeheersende producten. In aller belang
spelen echter ook service en support
een belangrijke rol.
De European Service Group helpt ook u.
1
De European
Service Group
De European Service Group (ESG) van
Mitsubishi Electric is de overkoepelende
organisatie van alle service- en supportdiensten voor de automatiseringsindustrie in Europa. Daarbij zorgt een netwerk
over heel Europa van klanten-technologie-centra en partners, geleid door de
European Service Group (ESG), voor
begeleiding meteen ter plaatse.
De ESG staat u bij met veelzijdige service, die bestaat uit een omvangrijke
onderhouds- en reparatieservice, scholingen, technisch advies vóór en na de
aankoop alsmede een -uurs-service.
Group /// European Service Group /// European Service Group /// European
Het menselijke element
Onze klantenservice-hotline wordt door
de ESG geleid en ondersteunt zowel
actuele als ook oudere productseries. De
telefonische hulp van onze ingenieurs
ter plaatse vindt daarbij plaats in de taal
van het betreffende land.
dat een probleemloze productie zo snel
mogelijk weer kan worden voortgezet.
Met behulp van de ESG biedt Mitsubishi
vele mogelijkheden voor een snelle hernieuwde inbedrijfstelling van uw installatie. En helpt u daarmee om stilstandtijden snel en effectief te minimaliseren.
Technische ondersteuning, waarop u kunt
vertrouwen.
Deze lokale service wordt door onze centrale Europese service-group gedragen
en biedt u grondige technische ondersteuning, daar, waar u deze nodig heeft.
Door de combinatie van lokale en centrale support kunt u er zeker van zijn dat
u altijd precies die ondersteuning krijgt
die u nodig heeft.
Naast dit service-aanbod staat
„MyMitsubishi“-gebruikers, op de internetsite www.mitsubishi-automation.com,
de toegang tot handleidingen, CADtekeningen, MMI-drivers, GSD-bestanden enz. gratis ter beschikking.
Uitvaltijden
verlagen
Omvangrijke trainingsprogramma's.
Meer capaciteit
door gekwalificeerde scholing
Het omgaan met complexe automatiseringscomponenten in uiterst gemechaniseerde productielijnen vereist goed
opgeleid personeel. Mitsubishi's ESG
biedt hiervoor gekwalificeerde scholingen in het omgaan met en het onderhouden van automatiseringssystemen.
Hierdoor wordt een optimale bedrijfscapaciteit veiliggesteld.
Stilstandtijden zijn slecht voor elk bedrijf.
Daarom is het zo ontzettend belangrijk
Alle reparaties worden door gekwalificeerd
vakpersoneel uitgevoerd.
15
Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Automatisering
Automatiseringsoplossingen...
Kleine besturingen en compacte PLC's
De meest succesvolle compact-PLC van de
wereld verenigt vermogen en eenvoudige programmeerbaarheid in gelijke mate.
ERP
Enterprise Resource
Management
Operation
Modulaire PLC's
Als stand-alone-oplossing of als redundant
netwerksysteem, het MELSEC System Q is altijd
het optimale automatiseringsplatform.
PLANT
Plant Integration
Level
Manufacturing
Mitsubishi
Integrated
FA Software
MELSOFT
Krachtige programmeergereedschappen en
software-oplossingen helpen u bij het optimale gebruik van uw investeringen voor de automatisering.
HMI, GOT en IPC
Mitsubishi biedt u de waarschijnlijk grootste
variëteit aan HMI- of GOT-apparaten alsmede
van industrie-pc's (IPC) van één enkele fabrikant.
Automation
SHOP
Frequentieomvormers
Mitsubishi heeft een goede reputatie met
betrekking tot betrouwbare frequentieomvormers. De klant hoeft na de installatie nauwelijks nog om te zien naar de omvormer.
1
De automatiseringsoplossingen van
Mitsubishi Electric en de e-F@ctory helpen u bij de steeds groeiende uitdaging
voor vermogensvergroting van bestaande installaties. De gemengde structuur
van de besturingssystemen en de hiërarchische architectuur maakt het doorgeven van installatiegegevens aan het
MES-systeem makkelijker.
gsoplossingen /// Automatiseringsoplossingen /// Automatiseringsoplossingen
...voor alle toepassingen
Motion Control
TOP FLOOR
Mitsubishi Electric heeft een uitgebreid aanbod aan – servo/motion-systemen en biedt
oplossingen voor toepassingen met maximaal
9 assen.
& Planning
MES
Execution System
Manufacturing
Execution System
Robots
MELFA-robots worden als SCARA- en knikarmrobots aangeboden en zijn leidend in hun klasse.
Mitsubishi
EZSocket
Partner Products
EZSocket
Mitsubishi
Communication Software
Laagspanningsschakelapparatuur
De geavanceerde laagspanningstechnologie
bevat contactverbrekers en overstroomrelais.
Solutions
CNC-besturingen
Optimaliseer uw besturing en maximaliseer
uw productie met de hoogste betrouwbaarheid.
FLOOR
Het voordeel van de e-F@ctory van
Mitsubishi Electric is het grote scala producten, van één fabrikant verkrijgbaar is.
e-F@ctory verenigt automatiseringselementen, die op zich al de beste in hun klasse zijn, in een harmonisch systeem. Het vermogen om zich aan de toepassing en het
ter beschikking staande budget modulair
aan te passen, maakt e-F@ctory zo sterk.
EDM-machines
Mitsubishi EDM werd door het marktonderzoeksbedrijf Frost & Sullivan in 005 gekozen
tot wereldmarktleider.
17
Kleine besturingen /// Compacte PLC's /// Modulaire PLC's /// Kleine best
Eenvoudig, flexibel,
betrouwbaar
Beide programma's maken het gebruik
van programmaonderdelen mogelijk die
reeds voor andere toepassingen zijn
aangemaakt en helpen om de kosten te
verlagen.
PLC-programmering
Software
Eenvoudig
Mitsubishi PLC's zijn gebruiksvriendelijk.
Wij hebben veel complexe functies tot
één enkele instructie gereduceerd en
daardoor de programmering van onze
besturingen eenvoudiger gemaakt.
Flexibel
De programmering en systeemconfiguratie zijn ontworpen voor de hoogste
flexibiliteit. De gebruiker kan bijvoorbeeld met het programmeergereedschap, zoals bijvoorbeeld GX Developer,
in hele korte tijd de PLC programmeren
of nieuwe modules configureren. Voor
de gestructureerde programmering
volgens de programmeerstandaard
IEC111- biedt Mitsubishi u de GX IEC
Developer.
18
GX Developer
Alle
FX
Alle
FX
Contactplan
●
●
●
●
Lijst met
aanwijzingen
●
●
●
●
Functiemodules
●
●
Gestructureerde
tekst
●
●
Procestaal
●
●
IEC61131
compatibel
●
●
Alle
MELSEC
PLC
Alleen
MELSEC
PLC
Ondersteunde PLC's
Beproefde betrouwbaarheid bij kleine en bij complexe toepassingen.
GX IEC Developer
AL-PCS/
WIN
●
●
●
Alle
MELSEC
PLC
Alleen
MELSEC
PLC
Alleen
Alphaserie
Bovendien bieden wij innovatieve
gereedschappen, zoals de GX Simulator.
Met deze software kunnen PLC-programma's zonder extra hardware op de
pc worden gesimuleerd. Zo kunnen dure
inbedrijfstellingstijden worden gereduceerd.
Betrouwbaar
Wij construeren en vervaardigen onze
PLC's volgens de hoogste internationale
standaards. Een deel van onze inspanningen om producten van de hoogste
kwaliteit aan u te leveren heeft geresulteerd in de vele scheepscertificeringen
en keurinscertificaten voor speciale
gebieden. Een voorbeeld – van de kwalteit van de Mitsubishi producten – dat
eruit springt is de wereldwijde toepassing hiervan in de autoindustrie, waar de
hoogste storingsbestendigheid wordt
geëist.
turingen /// Compacte PLC's /// Modulaire PLC's /// Kleine besturingen ///
De PLC voor iedere
toepassing
Een groot
aanbod aan
oplossingen
Mitsubishi-besturingen kunnen in drie
groepen worden onderverdeeld.
쐽 Kleine besturingen
De besturingen van de ALPHA-familie
zijn kleine compacte apparaten, die inen uitgangen (I/O), CPU, geheugen,
netwerksystemen, toegepast. Met meer
dan acht miljoen verkochte besturingen
wereldwijd behoren de PLC's van de
Mitsubishi FX-familie tot de meest succesvolle compacte besturingen op de
markt. Compacte PLC's voegen in- en uitgangen, CPU, geheugen en stroomvoorziening samen in één apparaat.
De toepassingsmogelijkheden kunnen
worden uitgebreid met verschillende
opties, zoals extra in- en uitgangen, analoge I/O of temperatuurregelmodules.
Een vaak gekozen optie is een netwerkaansluiting. De besturingen van de FXfamilie kunnen worden aangesloten op
alle gebruikelijke netwerken, zoals ethernet, profibus-DP, CC-link, DeviceNet,
CANopen of AS-interface.
PLC's bestaan uit een moduledrager,
waarop de voeding, de CPU alsmede I/Oen speciale modules worden gemonteerd. Door extra moduledragers kan het
systeem worden uitgebreid. Tot de speciale modules behoren analoge, communicatie- en netwerkmodules. Via een
web-server-module is ook de verbinding
met het internet mogelijk.
Het System Q van Mitsubishi is een automatiseringsplatform met geavanceerde
multiprocessortechnologie. In een enkel
systeem kunnen PLC-CPU's, motion-controllers en proces-CPU's worden samengevoegd. Een systeem kan echter ook
worden opgebouwd met pc-CPU's
(industrie-pc), redundante CPU's of, als
laatste innovatie, met een C-controller.
De compacte ALPHA-besturingen kunnen
heel gemakkelijk worden geprogrammeerd.
stroomvoorziening alsmede een display
en bedieningspaneel in één behuizing
samenvoegen. Deze besturingen worden bijna intuïtief met de software ALPCS/WIN geprogrammeerd die een grafische bedieningsinterface biedt.
Voor elke toepassing bestaat een oplossing.
Modulaire PLC's met groot vermogen en
hoge functionaliteit.
쐽 Compacte PLC's
Compacte besturingen worden op alle
gebieden, van machinebesturingen tot
쐽 Modulaire PLC's
Modulaire besturingen, zoals de AnSHserie of het System Q van Mitsubishi zijn
besturingen met groot vermogen en een
hoge functionaliteit. De bandbreedte, de
capaciteit en de functies van deze besturingen uit de topklasse zijn indrukwekkend, met verwerkingstijden die in nanoseconden worden gemeten. Modulaire
De meest verkochte compacte besturingen
van de wereld.
I/O
Geheugen
Verwerkingstijd/
log.instructie
Kleine besturingen
Compacte PLC's
Modulaire PLC's
ALPHA2
FX-familie
AnSH
System Q
10 – 28
10 – 384
32 – 1024
32 – 8192
200 functieblokken
2 – 64 k
28 – 60 k
28 – 252 k
20 µs
0,065 – 0,55 µs
0,075 – 0,2 µs
0,034 – 0,2 µs
19
Vision 1000 /// HMI /// GOT /// IPC /// SCADA /// Vision 1000 /// HMI /// GOT ///
Zien is geloven
쐽 Open HMI-oplossingen
De E1000-serie van de HMI's is ontworpen en ontwikkeld op basis van de
nieuwste open technologie en biedt de
combinatie van het Microsoft Windows
CE-platform met de Intel Xscale-processor. Deze progressieve technologie
garandeert een groot vermogen en een
hoge bedrijfsveiligheid.
Een ruime keus in open HMI-oplossingen.
쐽 Oplossingen met industrie-pc's
(IPC)
Fabricagelijn of procesbesturing - Mitsubishi verschaft u de toegang tot de benodigde gegevens.
Het visualiseringsconcept Vision 1000
van Mitsubishi biedt een breed scala aan
Human Machine Interfaces (HMI's) en
softwareoplossingen, die aangeven wat
in het productieproces daadwerkelijk
gebeurt.
Vision 1000
Het Mitsubishi-palet met de IPC1000oplossingen biedt u een interessant platform voor de verdere ontwikkeling van
uw eigen oplossingen. De IPC1000-serie
vormt de ideale combinatie van een
flexibele pc met groot vermogen met
een robuust industrieontwerp dat ook
onder de meest ongunstige omstandigheden het gebruik van het apparaat
mogelijk maakt. U kunt een IPC1000
zonder bezwaar op elke locatie van uw
productieomgeving gebruiken.
Een ruime keus Mitsubishi automatiseringssoftware, MELSOFT genoemd,
Deze combinatie van drie visualiseringstechnologieën van één fabrikant maakt
het u mogelijk de voor uw eisen beste
oplossing te kiezen.
쐽 Speciale HMI-oplossingen
De GOT1000-serie maakt gebruik van de
nieuwste touch-screen-technologie.
De serie grafische bedieningsapparatuur
GOT1000 zet onder de HMI-apparaten
nieuwe maatstaven met de actuele
touch-screen-beeldschermtechnologie.
Zij biedt u zowel een helder, duidelijk
display met belangrijke informatie als
ook de flexibiliteit van het invoeren via
het touch-screen.
De GOT-apparaten bieden de complete
integratie in de automatiseringstechnologie van Mitsubishi. Dit betekent voor u
een gemakkelijkere en snellere projectontwikkeling, een groter systeemvermogen en directe toegang tot de kernfuncties van de automatiseringshardware.
0
Industrie-pc's met groot vermogen.
ondersteunt de IPC's. Dit biedt u diverse
software-componenten, die u in uw
eigen oplossingen kunt integreren, tot
en met complete visualiseringspakketten, zoals het MXSCADA.
/ IPC /// SCADA /// Vision 1000 /// HMI /// GOT /// IPC /// SCADA /// Vision 1000
Perfecte visualisering
Hardware met
grote flexibiliteit
Bij de keuze van de juiste visualiseringsapplicatie moet rekening worden
gehouden met enkele belangrijke factoren.
쐽 Beschermingsklasses
쐽 Eenvoudig gebruik
De programmering en het gebruik van
de HMI's van Mitsubishi is eenvoudig.
Alle pakketten zijn uitgerust met een
vooraf geïnstalleerde grafische bibliotheek, die een snelle toegang voor u
mogelijk maakt. Enkele van de softwareprogramma's beschikken over simulatoren die een controle van het systeembedrijf vóór het downloaden naar de HMI
of de IPC mogelijk maken.
De Vision1000-producten van Mitsubishi
bieden een breed spectrum met oplossingen met verschillende beschermingsklasses die bij elke toepassing passen.
Dit geldt ook voor apparaten met de
beschermingsklasse IP5, die garandeert dat deze apparaten ook met een
waterstraal kunnen worden gereinigd.
Dit is vooral belangrijk in de levensmiddelenindustrie, waarin altijd een grote
mate van hygiëne moet heersen.
Voor elk van uw problemen bieden wij een
oplossing.
쐽 Gratis MELSOFT-demo
Van veel pakketten is een gratis demoversie verkrijgbaar.
U kunt uw exemplaar gewoon bestellen
op www.mitsubishi-automation.nl.
쐽 Communicatie
Een belangrijk aspect in de automatiseringstechniek is de communicatie. Deze
kan op verschillende niveaus worden
geïmplementeerd, te beginnen bij de
veldbus via datanetwerken tot en met
remote-telemetrie-oplossingen met
gebruik van industriemodems van
Mitsubishi.
De oplossingen van het Vision1000 kunnen met leidende netwerktechnologieën, zoals ethernet, profibus en CC-link
worden verbonden. Door de toegang tot
honderden drivers kunnen de HMI- en
SCADA-oplossingen van Mitsubishi ook
in combinatie met automatiseringsproducten van andere fabrikanten worden
toegepast.
Oplossingen voor elke visualiserings- en
programmeringstoepassing.
MELSOFT
De automatiserings-software-suite MELSOFT biedt u een breed spectrum met
oplossingen, inclusief PLC- en HMI-programmering, software-componenten
zoals OPC-server en active X-container
voor de directe implementatie van uw
oplossingen, alsmede complete visualiseringspakketten, zoals het MXSCADA.
HMI-programmering/-simulatie
Pakket
E Designer
GT Works
Visualisering op pc-basis
Pakket
MX4 HMI
Kenmerk
Kenmerk
SCADA
Soft HMI
MX4SCADA
MX4HMI
PC Control
MX Sheet
MXComponents MX OPC
Functies:
Programmering
Simulatie
OPC
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Active X
●
●
●
Grafische bibliotheek
●
●
●
VB/VBA
●
●
Webondersteuning
●
ODBC
●
HMI-hardware
Soft-HMI-oplossing
E-serie HMI
GOT900- en
GOT1000- serie / PC
(SoftGOT1000)
PC
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Toepassing :
Informatie
Open installatie
Productie
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1
Frequentieomvormer /// Aandrijvingen /// Frequentieomvormer /// Aandrijv
Aandrijfsystemen
Kostenbesparing
De aankoopprijs van een standaardindustriemotor voor gebruik in een typische ventilator- of pomptoepassing
bedraagt waarschijnlijk slechts een paar
honderd euro. Tijdens de levensduur zullen de kosten voor de werking van
dezelfde motor echter stijgen naar enkele honderdduizenden euro's. Hier kan
Frequentieomvormers helpen om de kosten
en machineslijtage te verlagen.
Intelligente oplossingen voor elke toepassing.
Frequentieomvormers zijn een voorbeeld van een wijdverbreide en veel
gebruikte automatiseringstechnologie.
Zij maken een ongecompliceerde besturing mogelijk van motortoerentallen en
draaimomenten. Bovendien vormen zij
een eenvoudige, maar goede mogelijkheid voor het verlagen van de energiekosten. Momenteel zijn wereldwijd meer
dan zeven miljoen frequentieomvormers
van Mitsubishi in de meest uiteenlopende toepassingen in gebruik.
Hoge standaards
Eén van de doorslaggevende parameters bij de ontwikkeling van de
Mitsubishi-frequentieomvormers is onze
verplichting om aan internationale standaardrichtlijnen te voldoen. Hierbij
horen naast de Europese CE-richtlijn de
Amerikaanse standaards UL en CUL net
als de Russische certificering GOST en
verdere exportspecifieke certificaten.
Deze certificeringen maken voor exporteurs de verkoop van machines en systemen met geïntegreerde frequentieomvormers makkelijker.
De frequentieomvormers van Mitsubishi
worden gekenmerkt door hoge
betrouwbaarheid en groot vermogen.
Dit bevestigt ook een klanttevredenheidsonderzoek van IMS-Research,
waarin Mitsubishi-frequentieomvormers
op betrouwbaarheid en technologie
twee keer achter elkaar de beste cijfers
behaalde.
het gebruik van een frequentieomvormer leiden tot een drastische kostenverlaging.
Intelligente
oplossingen
voor elke
toepassing
Het productenspectrum van de
Mitsubishi-frequentieomvormers kan
worden onderverdeeld in vier groepen:
Eenvoudig, zuinig, flexibel en krachtig.
Elke frequentieomvormer is daarbij zo
geoptimaliseerd dat deze een zeer grote
mate aan besturingsflexibiliteit en vermogen biedt.
Afhankelijk van het gekozen type worden de volgende netwerken ondersteund: RS85, ModbusRTU, ModbusPlus,
Profibus/DP, CC-link, CANopen, DeviceNET,
LONWorks, SSCNET en ethernet. Deze
uitgebreide communicatiemogelijkheden maken de integratie van de besturing van een frequentieomvormer in
omvangrijke automatiseringssystemen
makkelijker.
vingen /// Frequentieomvormer /// Aandrijvingen /// Frequentieomvormer ///
Progressief
FR-D700
FR-F700
쐽 De micro
쐽 De energiespaarder
De nieuwste generatie instapmodellen
van Mitsubishi Electric wordt gekenmerkt door een supercompacte maat en
veel nieuwe functies, zoals bv. de noodstopingang voor een veilige stop. Door
de stroomvectorregeling genereert de
frequentieomvormer ook bij lage toerentallen een hoog draaimoment. De geïntegreerde remtransistor maakt een directe aansluiting van een remweerstand
mogelijk voor verbetering van het remvermogen. De FR-D700 is ideaal voor de
besturing van ventilatoren, mixers en
transportbanden.
Veel frequentieomvormers zijn energiespaarders – de FR-F700 spaart nog meer.
Door de nieuwe OEC-technologie
(Optimum Excitation Control) wordt de
motor continu van de optimale magnetische stroom voorzien. Daaruit ontstaat
een maximale motoreffectiviteit bij
maximaal rendement. Het grote voordeel van de FR-F700 blijkt bij het gebruik
in pomp- en ventilatoraandrijvingen alsmede in de HVAC- en gebouwenbranche.
Uitgebreid productenspectrum van ultracompact tot extreem krachtig.
FR-F700
FR-E700
FR-A700
FR-D700
FR-E700
FR-A700
쐽 De compacte
쐽 De krachtige
Met de FR-E700-serie presenteert
Mitsubishi Electric de nieuwste generatie compacte frequentieomvormers.
Verbeterde functies en apparaateigenschappen, zoals bv. een geïntegreerde
USB-interface met geïntegreerde „digital
dal“ met display, verbeterde vermogenswinst bij lage toerentallen, alsmede de
mogelijkheid om één van de vele optiekaarten van de 700-serie te gebruiken,
maken van de FR-E700 een economisch
universeel genie voor veelzijdige toepassingen, zoals bv. transportbanden, hefwerktuigen, hefbrugtechniek, pompen,
ventilatoren en extruders.
De FR-A700-serie is performance op topniveau. Dankzij RSV (real sensorless vector control) produceert de aandrijving
max. draaimomenten en de beste rondloopeigenschappen. Voor een verdere
vergroting van de flexibiliteit beschikken
de frequentieomvormers bovendien
over overbelastingscapaciteiten, opties
voor het gecontroleerd verlagen alsmede een geïntegreerde PLC-functionaliteit. Door de dynamische eigenschappen is de FR-A700 ideaal voor het
gebruik in kraan- en hefwerktuigen,
hoge opslagruimten, extruders, centrifuges of ook wikkelaars.
Frequentieomvormers
FR-D700
FR-S500 E
FR-E700
FR-E500
FR-F700
FR-A700
D720S EC
D740 EC
S520S E
S540 E
E740 EC
E520 S
E540
F740
F746
A700
Ingangsspanning
1-fasig
200 – 240 V AC
3-fasig
380 – 480 V AC
1-fasig
200 – 240 V AC
3-fasig
380 – 480 V AC
3-fasig
380 – 480 V AC
1-fasig
200 – 240 V AC
3-fasig
380 – 480 V AC
3-fasig
380 – 480 V AC of 500 V
3-fasig
380 – 480 V AC
3-fasig
380 – 480 V AC of 500 V
Nominaal motorvermogen [kW]
0,1 – 2,2
0,4 – 7,5
0,2 – 1,5
0,4 – 3,7
0,4 – 15
0,4 – 2,2
0,4 – 7,5
0,75 – 630
0,75 – 55
Overbelastbaarheid
200 %
200 %
200 %
150 %, 200 %
Beschermingsklasse
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
120 %, 150 %
IP 20 – 00
0,4 – 630
120 %, 150 %,
200 %, 250 %
IP 54
IP 20 – 00
Servo /// Motion /// Servo /// Motion /// Servo /// Motion /// Servo /// Motio
Poëzie van beweging
Plug and Play
Het van de pc bekende plug-and-playconcept biedt ook voor server- en
motionoplossingen van Mitsubishi een
ongecompliceerde systeemopbouw en
een eenvoudige configuratie.
쐽 Eenvoudige aansluiting
Geprefabriceerde kabels zijn in verschillende lengtes beschikbaar. Daardoor is
de aansluiting van een servomotor aan
een versterker of ook elke andere combinatie niet alleen snel, maar ook foutloos
uitvoerbaar.
쐽 Automatische motorherkenning
Zodra een servomotor van Mitsubishi
aan de servoversterker is aangesloten,
vindt een automatische herkenning van
de motor plaats. De bijbehorende
motorgegevens worden meteen geregistreerd en het systeem is bedrijfsklaar.
Dit leidt tot een drastische verkorting
van de inbedrijfstellingstijd en een verlaging van de foutfrequentie.
쐽 Eenvoudige netwerkkoppeling
Snelheid, precisie en controle als zij nodig zijn.
Door de stijgende eisen die aan het productieproces worden gesteld groeit de
behoefte, om van het “gereed product”,
grotere aantallen en tegelijkertijd lage
afvalpercentages te produceren. Het
doel is om op alle automatiseringsgebieden aan deze eisen te voldoen.
Eén van de gebieden, die een enorme
groei laten zien, is het gebied servo en
motion. De ontwikkeling van krachtige
servomotoren in combinatie met intuïtieve motion-control-systemen verdringen hier traditionele vormen van bewegingsbesturing.
Snelheid
en capaciteit
Servomotoren maken voor de gebruiker
automatiseringsoplossingen mogelijk
die sneller, preciezer en compacter zijn.
Met de constructie van uiterst compacte
borstelloze servomotoren is het
Mitsubishi gelukt om nieuwe maatstaven te zetten bij de ontwikkeling van servomotoren.
Alle motoren van de MR-JS-serie
beschikken over encoders met een resolutie van 1107 impulsen per omwenteling en alle motoren van de MR-Jserie over encoders met een resolutie
van 1 impulsen per omwenteling.
Hierdoor worden hogere machinesnelheden bij tegelijkertijd grotere precisie
behaald.
Snelle servo- en motiontoepassingen
vereisen een speciaal uiterst snel netwerk. Het uiterst snelle netwerk SSCNET
(servo system controller network) van
Mitsubishi beschikt over de vereiste
eigenschappen en maakt de aansluiting
en de gelijktijdige besturing van maximaal 9 assen via eenvoudige kabelverbindingen mogelijk.
*) De apparaten van de MR-J-serie
ondersteunen het SSCNET-III-netwerk,
dat door het gebruik van glasvezelnetwerkkabels volledig resistent is tegen
elektrische storingsinvloeden.
on /// Servo /// Motion /// Servo /// Motion /// Servo /// Motion /// Servo ///
Capaciteit en precisie
Krachtige
versterkers
Universele
motoroplossingen
Het uitgebreide productenspectrum van
de Mitsubishi-servoversterkers van de
series MR-J en MR-JS is beschikbaar in
een vermogensbereik van 100 W tot
7 kW voor een bedrijf van 00 V en
00 W tot 55 kW voor een bedrijf van
00 V. Met deze verscheidenheid aan
types vindt elke gebruiker de voor zijn
toepassing passende oplossing.
Het gebruik van de meest moderne wikkeltechnieken en van de nieuwste technologieën maakt de fabricage van borstelloze servomotoren mogelijk die tot de
meest compacte op de markt behoren.
Een groot aanbod van krachtige servoversterkers.
HF-KP motor – IP5 standard protection.
Plug-and-play-technologie.
쐽 Vermogen
Met een snelheidsfrequentieweergave
van tot 900 Hz biedt Mitsubishi servosystemen met een vermogen van wereldklasse.
Mitsubishi biedt de motoren aan in een
vermogensbereik van 50 W tot 55 kW.
Om aan alle eisen voor de verschillende
toepassingen te voldoen, zijn de motoren ook als speciale uitvoeringen (bv.
platte constructie of met holle as) verkrijgbaar. Bovendien maakt de keuze van
motoren met verschillende traagheidsmomenten een nog preciezere aanpassing van de motor aan de toepassing
mogelijk.
쐽 Vibratieonderdrukking
Het vermogen van een machine is vaak
beperkt door mechanische grenzen. De
geïntegreerde vibratieonderdrukking
van de Mitsubishi-servoversterkers stelt
deze grenzen door nauwkeurige besturing buiten werking. Microvibraties op
de resonantiepunten van het mechanische systeem kunnen effectief worden
onderdrukt en zodoende is de opbouw
van een stabiel systeem gegarandeerd.
쐽 Real-time-auto-tuning
Een andere nieuwigheid, waarvan de
machine van de gebruiker profiteert, is
het door een eenvoudige instelling activeerbare real-time-auto-tuning. Bij geactiveerde functie registreert de versterker
elke belastingsverandering en optimaliseert automatisch de versterkingsfactoren. Het real-time-auto-tuning leidt
zowel tot een verhoging van de machinedynamica als ook tot een grotere precisie.
Motion-controller
Mitsubishi Electric beschikt over een uitgebreid aanbod voor positionering en
aan motionsystemen. Dit aanbod gaat
van eenvoudige modules voor impulsuitvoer via speciale positioneermodules
tot en met de motion-CPU's van het
MELSEC-System Q voor gesynchroniseerde systemen met maximaal
9 assen. De gebruiker kan het soort
besturing kiezen, waarmee hij het beste
vertrouwd is en daardoor een systeem
snel en efficiënt kan configureren.
*) Verder beschikt de MR-J-serie over
verbeterde en krachtiger functies voor
de vibratieonderdrukking en voor realtime-auto-tuning.
5
Robots /// Knikarm /// SCARA /// Robots /// Knikarm /// SCARA /// Robots ///
Beweging die overtuigt
Mitsubishirobots maken
het leven
makkelijker
Bovendien kan de gebruiker profiteren
van de uitgebreide programmeer- en
simulatie-software-pakketen COSIROP
en COSIMIR. Beide softwarepakketten
Krachtige software voor optimaal gebruik
van de robot.
Snelle uiterst precieze pick-and-place-toepassing.
Overal, waar een goedkope oplossing
voor snelle, uiterst precieze pick-andplace-toepassingen, maar ook voor eenvoudige montageprocessen wordt
gezocht, zijn robots zeer populair.
1,65 euro/uur
De toepassingsmogelijkheden voor een
robot zijn zeer verschillend. Bekijkt men
de kosten voor een robot met betrekking tot zijn gemiddelde levensduur, die
in een traditionele toepassing ca. -7 jaar
bedraagt, verrast de robot door zijn lage
kosten van slechts 1,5 euro/uur voor
aanschaf en werking.
Eenvoudige programmeertaal
De programmering van een robotarm
van Mitsubishi is veel eenvoudiger dan
de meeste mensen denken. De programmeertaal is gebaseerd op de traditionele
BASIC-programmeertaal en bestaat uit
eenvoudige commando's die de vereiste
activiteit weergeven. Zo zorgt bv. het
commando MOV voor een beweging
van de robot, het commando HCLOSE
voor het sluiten van de hand.
Om de bediening voor de gebruiker nog
makkelijker te maken, vindt de programmering van alle Mitsubishi-robots plaats
in dezelfde programmeertaal.
maken het ontwerp en de simulatie van
een robottoepassing mogelijk nog vóór
de aankoop van de gewenste hardware.
Daardoor worden de systeemplanning
en de systeemopbouw versneld en vereenvoudigd. Tegelijkertijd kunnen al
vooraf zwakke plekken van het systeem
worden herkend en zodoende worden
voorkomen.
Maximale
controle vanaf
het begin
Alle besturingsapparaten van Mitsubishi
zijn bij levering standaard uitgerust met
de volledige besturingssoftware. De
gebruiker hoeft op een later tijdstip
geen verdere softwaremodules voor
speciale toepassingen te kopen.
/ Knikarm /// SCARA /// Robots /// Knikarm /// SCARA /// Robots /// Knikarm
Toepassingsgericht
Doordacht
ontwerp
Knikarmrobots
De krachtige MELFA-knikarmrobots met
groot vermogen zijn het resultaat van
het samenspel van marktleidende technologieën en goed doordacht design.
Voor toepassing bij kleine en middelmatige lasten tot kg biedt Mitsubishi de 5en -assige robots RV-AJ en RV-1A aan.
Voor grotere lasten tot 1 kg staan de
robots van de RV-S- en RV-SL-serie ter
beschikking die ook verkrijgbaar zijn in
een langarmversie.
쐽 Makkelijke aansluiting
Voor elke toepassing tot 1 kg draaglast de
ideale robot.
Om de inbedrijfstelling en het instellen
van het robotsysteem zo makkelijk
mogelijk te maken, beschikken de
robots van Mitsubishi over een gezamenlijk aansluitpunt voor de kabel- en
persluchtaansluitingen. Bovendien zijn
de aansluitpunten van de kabel- en
persluchtaansluitingen aan de handzijde in de buurt van de handflens gepositioneerd om het aansluiten van grijpers
en sensoren makkelijker te maken.
쐽 Standaardgrijperflens
Alle grijperflenzen van de knikarmrobots zijn uitgevoerd conform norm
ISO 909-1. Hierdoor is de keuze simpel
en een eenvoudige aansluiting van de
robothand gegarandeerd.
쐽 Extra assen
Voor vergroting van de werkradius en
het werkgebied kunnen alle MELFArobots worden gemonteerd op een lineaire as.
쐽 Netwerkgeschikt
Netwerkverbindingen, zoals ethernet en
CC-link maken de eenvoudige integratie
van de Mitsubishi-besturingsapparaten
in grotere systemen mogelijk en bieden
de gebruiker toegang tot elke afzonderlijke stap in het proces.
Knikarmrobots beschikken over een gezamenlijk aansluitpunt voor kabel- en persluchtaansluitingen.
SCARA-robots
De SCARA-robots van Mitsubishi zijn verdeeld in twee toepassingsgebieden.
Door de buitengewoon hoge herhaalprecisie van +/- 0,005 mm bij tegelijkertijd
hoge snelheid liggen de sterke punten
van de kleinere RP-AH-robot duidelijk op
het gebied van de micro-handling, zoals
bv. het uitrusten en solderen van printplaten in SMD-techniek.
De robots van de RH-AH-serie daarentegen zijn uitermate geschikt voor palleti-
SCARA-robots zijn uitermate geschikt voor
gebruik in nauwe werkruimten.
Robots
Aanduiding
Type
Hefkracht [kg]
Reikwijdte [mm]
seer- of andere speciale toepassingen.
Deze kunnen overal worden gebruikt,
waar in nauwe werkruimtes hoge lasten
tot 1 kg snel moeten worden verplaatst.
RP
RH
RV
SCARA
SCARA
Knikarm
1–5
6 – 12
1 – 12
236 – 453
350 – 850
410 – 1385
7
Laagspanning /// Laagspanning /// Laagspanning /// Laagspanning /// Laagsp
Intelligente schakelaar
Leidend aan
de top
Bij de Jet Pressure Trip (JPT)-technologie
gaat het om een deelontwikkeling van
het zogenaamde PA-concept. Het uitschakelproces wordt met een veelvoud
sneller uitgevoerd dan met de traditionele magnetische oplossing. Dit betekent dat de schakelaar vooral op het
gebied van stroombegrenzervermogen
en uitschakelveiligheid aanzienlijk is verbeterd. Alle hieraan aangesloten apparaten en machines zijn daardoor duidelijk
beter beveiligd: een groot voordeel voor
de gebruiker.
Richtinggevend in onderzoek en design.
Reeds sinds 19 is Mitsubishi Electric
actief vertegenwoordigd op de markt
van de laagspanningsschakelapparatuur. Sinds Mitsubishi de eerste eigen
compacte contactverbreker zelf heeft
ontwikkeld en geproduceerd, streeft de
gehele onderneming ernaar om wereldwijd de nummer één van fabrikanten
van laagspanningsschakelapparatuur te
worden. Eigen onderzoek en ontwikkeling richten zich enkel en alleen hierop.
Verdere technologieën, zoals bv. ISTAC
(Impulsive Slot-Type Accelerator, een
hogesnelheids-lichtboog-afleidingstechniek) en ontwikkelingen van de
elektronische activeringsrelais en VJC
(Vapour Jet Control) hebben de
laagspanningsschakelapparatuur van
Mitsubishi Electric tot topproducten in
deze sector gemaakt.
Globale
standaards
Onze gehele laagspanningsschakelapparatuur voldoet aan de internationale
standaards en normen, bv. IEC, UL/CSA
en JIS.
Innovatie
Richtinggevend onderzoek en ontwikkeling leidt tot een innovatieve schakelaartechnologie. Zodoende kunnen onze
klanten rekenen op de beste kwaliteit,
uitmuntende veiligheid en betrouwbaarheid.
Onze actuele producten bieden de
gebruiker de oplossingen, waarop hij
kan vertrouwen: het materiaal van de
behuizing, een polymeerkunststof,
wordt ook in de autotechniek gebruikt.
Deze biedt de grootst mogelijke veiligheid en extreme breukvastheid, ook
onder hoogspanningsbelasting.
8
Standaards in het middelpunt van onze
productontwikkeling.
anning /// Laagspanning /// Laagspanning /// Laagspanning /// Laagspanning
Een complete oplossing
Mitsubishi Electric biedt u het complete
programma van open contactverbrekers
via compacte contactverbrekers tot en
met krachtrelais en overstroomrelais.
쐽 Open contactverbreker
De compacte Super AE-serie bevat een
breed vermogensspectrum van 1000 A
tot 00 A. Het basisapparaat is verkrijgbaar in vaste inbouw of in inschuiftechniek. De omvangrijke accessoires maken
het u mogelijk om het basismodel uit te
breiden met belangrijke speciale functies. Verbeterde overbelastingscontrole,
ming binnen het bereik van A tot
100 A. Alle schakelaars zijn beschikbaar
in vaste inbouw of insteektechniek.
Naast het uitgebreide aanbod aan accessoires is ook een elektronisch activeringssysteem verkrijgbaar.
쐽 Krachtrelais, overstroomrelais,
hulprelais
De laagspanningsschakelapparatuur van
de MS-N-serie biedt u een compacte en
modulair uitbreidbare oplossing voor de
lastzijde. De MS-N-serie wordt gevormd
door krachtrelais, overstroomrelais en
hulprelais
Geavanceerde laagspanningstechniek.
De afmetingen van de krachtrelais, het
ruimtegebruik bij de montage en het
opgenomen vermogen zijn ten opzichte
van vergelijkbare types tot 5 % minder.
Dit kon ondanks verhoogde capaciteit
worden bereikt. Zo bereikt het relais
bijvoorbeeld een schakelweerstand zelfs
bij spanningsschommelingen tot 5 %.
Nagenoeg onderhoudsvrij.
netwerkgeschiktheid en registratie van
het energieverbruik zijn slechts een kleine selectie. Deze productbandbreedte
maakt het mogelijk om praktisch elke
wens van de klant te realiseren.
쐽 Compacte contactverbrekers WSS
De compacte contactverbrekers van de
World SuperSerie WSS bieden u bescher-
Een slim afgestemd accessoireprogramma stelt het gebruik voor de meest uiteenlopende toepassingen en eisen veilig. Hierbij horen overstroomrelais,
pneumatische tijdmodules, hulprelais of
een activeringsindicator.
Ontwerpen:
kinderspel
MELSHORT is een basissoftware die
aan het complete eisenprofiel voor het
ontwerp van een energieverdelingsinstallatie voldoet.
Compacte vermogensschakelaars.
Snelle en eenvoudige selectiehulp.
9
Toepassingen /// Toepassingen /// Toepassingen /// Toepassingen /// Toepas
Een groot
werkgebied
쐽 Recreatie-industrie
쐽
쐽
쐽
쐽
쐽
쐽
Besturingsoplossingen in de autoindustrie.
Door onze klanten worden Mitsubishi-producten op alle terreinen toegepast, voor
zowel gevoelige toepassingen in de farmaceutische industrie als in recreatieparken.
Enkele voorbeelden van automatiseringstaken die onze klanten met Mitsubishi
hebben opgelost:
쐽 Landbouw
- Irrigatiesystemen
- Oogstmachines
- Zagerijen
쐽 Gebouwentechniek
- Rookmelders
- Ventilatie en temperatuurregeling
- Besturing van liften
- Besturing van draaideuren
- Telefooncentrales
- Energieverdeling
- Besturing van zwembaden
쐽 Bouwindustrie
- Fabricage van stalen bruggen
- Tunnelboorsystemen
쐽 Voedingsmiddelenindustrie
- Bereiding en bakken van broden
- Verwerking van levensmiddelen
(wassen, sorteren, snijden en
verpakken)
0
쐽
- Projector voor multiplex-bioscopen
- Animaties in musea of themaparken
Geneeskunde
- Test van beademingsapparatuur
- Sterilisatie
Farmaceutische en chemische
industrie
- Dosering
- Systemen voor het meten van de
luchtvervuiling
- Cryogeen invriezen
- Gas-chromatografie
- Verpakking
Kunststofindustrie
- Aan elkaar lassen van kunststof
- Energiemanagement voor
spuitgietmachines
- Aan- en afvoer in machines
- Test van extrusie-blaasmachines
- Test van spuitgietmachines
Drukkerijen
Textielindustrie
Transport en verkeer
- Besturing van sanitaire voorzieningen
op passagiersschepen
- Besturing van sanitaire voorzieningen
in treinwagons
- Pompbesturing voor blusvoertuigen
- Besturing van voertuigen voor
afvalverwijdering
Gemeentelijke inrichtingen
- Afvalwaterverwerking
- Pompen voor drinkwater
Decentrale management-oplossingen inclusief SCADA, netwerk, telemetrie en industriemodems.
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// ALL PRODUCTS /// ALL PRODUCTS /// ALL PRODUCTS ///
Technical Information Section
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:14:55
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
More information?
This Automation Book is designed to give an overview of the extensive product range of Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V., Factory Automation. If you cannot find the information you require in this catalogue, there are a number of ways you can get further details on configuration and technical issues,
pricing and availability.
For technical issues visit the www.mitsubishi-automation.com website.
Our website provides a simple and fast way of accessing further technical data and up to the minute details on our products and
services. Manuals and catalogues are available in several different languages and can be downloaded for free.
For technical, configuration, pricing and availability issues contact our distributors and partners.
Mitsubishi partners and distributors are only too happy to help answer your technical questions or help with configuration building.
For a list of Mitsubishi partners please see the back of this catalogue or alternatively take a look at the “contact us” section of our website.
This section is a guide to the range of products available. For detailed configuration rules, system building, installation and configuration the associated
product manuals must be read. You must satisfy yourself that any system you design with the products in this catalogue is fit for purpose, meets your
requires and conforms to the product configuration rules as defined in the product manuals.
2
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:14:57
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
CONTENTS ///
Index
Mitsubishi Internet Portal
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:14:59
3
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE
Our MELSOFT suite of Automation software is designed to help you integrate
your production process and maximise
your business potential. MELSOFT
embodies a wide range of software to
optimise your plant productivity; from
visualisation and control systems to historic and downtime monitoring capabilities. A core design feature of our software is that it is scalable. It is a well
accepted truism that one solution rarely
fits all, so within each application category there are a range of products offering different levels of functionality and
connectivity designed to meet your individual needs. All products are based on
Microsoft standards (OPC etc), giving
you a broad range of connectivity
options and a familiar interface. The
MELSOFT suite consists of three main
areas:
앬
앬
앬
. This type of software is
aimed at monitoring and controlling your
automation processes. We offer a variety of
programs ranging from a high-end data
analysis and monitoring program such as
MX4 SCADA, to more control and programming orientated programs such as
E View or MX4 HMI.
Programming. Our extensive range of programming software enables users to write
their own PLC code for their application.
We have software solutions for each of the
following products groups; Servos, Inverters,
Logic Blocks, PLCs, HMIs and Networking.
Communication. Our communication software is designed to integrate our products
withcommon third party software packages. This provides you with the reliability
and quality of Mitsubishi hardware, combined with the familiarity of software packages/tools such as Microsoft Excel, ActiveX
and OPC.
Visualisation Software
Our visualisation software covers all your needs,
from specialised automated data-gathering
business systems to manually operated shop
floor control units.
MX4 Software Integration
The MX4 range is a fully integratable and scalable software package. The key feature of the
software is its ability to read shop floor data
straight from a Soft HMI to a high end business
systems.
4
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:02
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SOFTWARE ///
SCADA
MX4 SCADA
앬
앬
A familiar Windows based environment
shortens the learning curve, enabling users
to adapt quickly and reduce disruptions to
business processes.
Pre-programmed basic functions, including
alarms and reports provide you with common, but often important ready-to-use
operations. This quick setup of the SCADA
system cuts downtime to the business, and
reduces the implementation time.
앬
Advanced mathematical and conditional
executors can be programmed using either
Cicode (Similar to C/C++) or VBA. This gives
you greater control enabling you to
customise your system to meet individual
requirements.
Hardware Specification
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
266 MHz
128 MB
200 MB
See page 12
Soft HMI
MX4 HMI
MX4 HMI is a reduced version of MX4 SCADA. It includes many of the functions of MX4 SCADA, but
has been designed for standalone HMI applications. The main features are:
앬
앬
앬
A large number of I/O points ranging from100
to a maximum of 600, with the ability to connect to three different types of drivers.
It is a scalable solution that can be
upgraded from a HMI to a SCADA solution
and then have additional upward connectivity to business systems.
Basic functions like alarms, trend analysis
and reports have been set-up and are
앬
ready-to-use, saving you time and the
expertise needed to program them.
The use of super genies enables you to save
repetitive machinery processes, and replicate the process by a click of a button. This
saves time and the cost of skilled labour,
allowing a complex task to be performed
much more simply.
Hardware Specification
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
266 MHz
128 MB
200 MB
See page 12
GTWorks2 (GT SoftGOT1000)
GTWorks2 is a wide-ranging visualisation control tool from Mitsubishi. A major benefit of GT Works2
is that visualisation screens can be created independently of their final target platform, i. e. a hardware platform such as GOT900, GOT1000 or a PC based platform such as GT SoftGOT1000.
GT SoftGOT 1000 is a PC based HMI module within GTWorks2. A further benefit of GT SoftGOT1000 is
that it inherits the advanced simulation features of GTWorks2. It can be simulated in a stand-alone
configuration or in conjunction with GX simulator, linking both PLC and HMI simulation code for a
true integrated approach.
앬
앬
Advanced simulation of HMI operations
and optional HMI/PLC simulation code.
앬
Platform independent, screens created can be
used for SoftHMI or hardware based HMIs.
Remote monitoring by intranet LAN.
Hardware Specification
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:04
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
200 MHz
64 MB
250 MB
See page 12
5
SOFTWARE
MX4 SCADA is a complete Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition system. It is able to support
your business as it grows, whatever the size, since there is virtually no limit on the number of I/O
points and drivers. The main features of MX4 SCADA are:
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SOFTWARE
HMI Programming
E Designer
SOFTWARE
E Designer is a complete PC-based programming software program for the E Series HMIs. Projects
are built from menu hierarchies or as sequences, providing the user with an easy to follow logical
progression of operations. The main features of E Designer are:
앬
앬
앬
A pre-defined library of graphics and symbols provides a straightforward and efficient basis to set-up your project, reducing
the cost and time of the implementation.
The use of ‘Vector Graphics’ gives you the
flexibility to alter the design of your objects
and symbols, and ‘personalise’ them, to
meet your individual requirements e.g.
a flashing red and yellow graphic can be
used to symbolise an alarm sounding,
alerting the user of an occurring danger.
E Designer supports a multi-language
set-up. This enables you to program and
run your project in a wide variety of languages, including; English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian and Japanese.
Hardware Specification
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
200 MHz
64 MB
55 MB
See page 12
GTWorks2 (GT Designer2)
As part of GTWorks2, GT Designer2 is a drawing program designed to create HMI screens for
GOT900 and GOT1000 series. A user-friendly Windows environment provides the user with a
simple and recognisable interface, reducing the time of their learning curve and the training
costs associated with it. The package consists of:
앬
앬
An extensive picture and graphics library
editor that enables you to modify the
graphics to meet your exact specifications.
A tree format of the project gives you an
overview of the structure of the project.
This gives you the opportunity to navigate
through your project and add, delete or
move any programs or functions, creating a
more logical flow to your menu structure.
앬
앬
The combination of GT Simulator and
GX Simulator allows you to test both the
HMI and PLC coding offline, on your PC
without the need to connect to physical
hardware (also see GT Works2-SoftGOT).
German and English version available.
Hardware Specification
6
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:06
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
200 MHz
64 MB
350 MB
See page 12
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SOFTWARE ///
PC Data Management
MX Sheet
MX Sheet enables users to gather data from their PLC and analyse it using the familiar tools and
functions of Excel. MX Sheet can analyse and display real-time data in tables, graphs and charts
as it happens.
SOFTWARE
It also features a useful automatic report function, whereby data displayed on Excel automatically saves and prints at a specific time or condition triggered by the PLC.
Hardware Specification
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
266 MHz
64 MB
100 MB
See Page 12
The device data in the PLC can be monitored
inreal-time with Excel, and recipe data in
Excelcan be transfered to the PLC.
MX OPC Server
The MX OPC Server is a Mitsubishi I/O driver OPC Data Access (DA) and Alarm/Events (AE) server
that provides the interface and communications protocol between a wide range of Mitsubishi
hardware and your process control software. Mitsubishi drivers incorporate OLE Automation
technology and OPC compliance to provide flexibility and ease-of-use.
Mitsubishi's drivers incorporate OLE Automation technology and can therefore expose their
features to scripting tools and other applications. Because the drivers are OLE Automation
applications you can create and manipulate objects exposed in the I/O Server from another
application. You can also create tools that access and manipulate driver objects.
MX Component
MX Component provides users with powerful ActiveX controls that simplify the communication
between a PC and PLC. Users to not have to design complex communication protocols and is
ideal for implementing specific software applications requiring PLC connectivity.
MX Component supports a wide variety of powerful and standardised programming languages
such as Visual C++ .NET, VBA and VB Script.
For developing your ideal
applications with a dedicated program
Just by accessing the Web Pages created with
VBScript (ASP function) using Internet Explorer
or mobile devices, the factory’s PLC can be
remotely monitored and operated.
User applications
Visual
Basic
Visual
C++ .NET
MX Component
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:10
For monitoring the site and collecting
data without a dedicated program
Excel/
Access
VBA
WORD,
PPT and
Access
Excel
MX Sheet
7
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SOFTWARE
PLC Programming
GX IEC Developer
SOFTWARE
GX IEC Developer is a powerful programming and documentation package. It supports the
implementation of our entire PLC range, from the initial project planning to everyday operation.
It offers a user-friendly MS Windows environment and a choice of five programming languages
to best suit your project.
앬
앬
앬
앬
ST (Structured Text)
SFC (Sequential Function Chart)
LD (Ladder Diagram)
앬
FBD (Function Block Diagram)
IL (Instruction List)
The main features of GX IEC Developer are:
앬
앬
앬
It is compliant with the "IEC 1131.3" standard of PLC programming. This enables you
to make standard reusable PLC code and
function blocks, saving you significant
development time and costs.
Complex functions and programming code
created by specialist software developers
can be imported and used in your program.
The use of GX IEC Developer encourages
good data management and structure.
Programs are often developed by a number
of parties, all contributing together. This
structure ensures all parties communicate
changes and are kept up-to-date.
앬
앬
Quick and easy to configure, controller
components can be quickly programmed
with the aid of tables, interactive dialogs
and graphical support.
It is also compatible with older Mitsubishi
programming software like MELSEC MEDOC
Plus, your existing programs and data can be
imported into GX IEC Developer. The benefits are minimal disruption to existing programs and reduced re-engineering time,
while having access to the wealth of new
functions provided by GX IEC Developer.
Hardware Specification
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
350 MHz
32MB
100 MB
See page 12
GX IEC Developer FX
This version of GX IEC Developer is specifically designed for micro FX PLCs. The features and
functions are optimized for the instruction set, parameter settings and general configuration
of FX PLCs. As a result this product is offered at a price level that is cost effective compared to
FX hardware pricing.
8
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:12
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SOFTWARE ///
GX Developer
앬
앬
앬
Instruction List (IL)
Ladder Diagram (LD)
앬
SOFTWARE
GX Developer is a simple programming software that supports our entire PLC range. It features a
straight forward, easy to use, Windows based environment. The software supports four programming languages:
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
Structured Text (ST)
The main features of GX Developer are:
앬
앬
The ability to switch between IL and LD
while working on a project, means people
are able to collaborate as a team. Individuals
scan choose the programming method
which best suits them, therefore reducing
the time needed to learn a new language
and the overall project timescale.
GX Developer is compatible with our older
DOS programs (MELSEC MEDOC). Existing
customers with this older software can sim-
앬
ply import their data into GX Developer,
minimising the disruption to their business.
Key functions can be tested first on the
with GX Simulator, replicating realistic
responses of applications and devices.
Users can therefore verify these processes
before they are implemented.
Hardware Specification
GX Developer FX
Processor Speed
RAM
Hard-disk
O.S.
450 MHz
64MB
130 MB
See page 12
This is a cost-effective cut-down version of GX Developer, specifically designed for micro FX
PLCs. Like the full version of GX Developer, it includes many of the features and functions along
with achoice of three programming methods; MELSEC Instruction List, Ladder Diagram and
Stepladder.
Simulator
GX Simulator
GX Simulator allows you to create a
virtual PLC on a PC. PLC code can be
tested and errors debugged, all without
connecting a PLC. This allows for great
flexibility as code created can be tested
by a number of different parties.
GX Simulator can also be used with
MX4 HMI/SCADA to provide comprehensive, cross platform test and debugging of applications.
GT Simulator
Similar to GX Simulator, any changes
or modifications to the design of the
GOT screen made in GT Designer2 can
be checked and debugged using
GT Simulator.
Note: This program can be used with GX Simulator to provide
combined simulation of PLC and HMI projects.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:15
9
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SOFTWARE
Specials
MT Developer
MT Developer is an integral start-up software used to structure and configure a system for
Q Series motion controller applications.
SOFTWARE
앬
앬
The system settings and servo data can be
set intuitively with graphical screens
Various operating system software corresponding to the machine and control
details is available with this motion controller. Providing a programming environment
matching the application.
앬
앬
Start-up and debugging time can be shortened by using system tests and program
debugging.
The system and program operation state
can be checked with the monitor function
and digital oscilloscope function allowing
any problems to be resolved quickly.
Alpha - ALVLS (AL-PCS/WIN)
The original visual based function block programming software for logic controllers. Easy to use
Windows based software that requires no prior experience or training by the user. Program elements are placed on screen, with inputs on the left and outputs on the right and the function
blocks in the middle.
앬
앬
앬
Easy to use and easy to learn
Point, click, drag and drop programming
Program simulation - no controller needed
앬
앬
Real time program monitor
Process visualisation
MR Configurator
This software supports all operations from servo set-up to maintenance. Various operations,
including monitor display, diagnostics, parameter writing and reading, and test operation, can
be carried out easily with this software.
앬
앬
10
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:17
Graph display function allows the servo
motor state to be easily monitored.
Machine analyser function, gain search
function and machine simulation function
for high performance adjustments.
앬
앬
Optimum Control, allows the response setting value to be set making use of the servo’s
“high level real-time automatic tuning”.
The servo motor can be tested easily using
a PC.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SOFTWARE ///
FR Configurator is a powerful frequency inverter configuration and management tool. It runs in
Windows making it possible to manage your inverters with a standard PC. It allows the inverters
to be monitored and the parameters to be configured, providing a user friendly environment to
control single or multiple inverters.
앬
앬
앬
Machine analyser system, allows the resonant frequency of the machine to be tested
as the motor is accelerated.
Trace Function, emulates an oscilloscope.
Parameter setting and editing
앬
앬
앬
Monitoring functions make maintenance
easy
Test Operation function and automatic
tuning
Diagnostics and help functions
GX Configurator DP
GX Configurator DP is a setup and configuration software for Profibus DP networks. It can be
used to configure Mitsubishi Modular PLC Profibus DP master and all slave modules including
Inverters and HMI’s as well as other manufacturers products.
앬
앬
Easy to use drag & drop configuration
system
Automatic generation of program modules
that can be integrated directly in to the GX
IEC Developer package
앬
Configurations can be transferred via the
PLC’s programming port or over networks
FX Configurator FP
FX Configurator FP is a special configurator tool for FX3U PLC SSCNet III positioning module.
This software reduces programming and setup time for any level of positioning application.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:20
11
SOFTWARE
FR Configurator (MX 500)
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SOFTWARE
Compatibility Table
Here is a list of our software products, the table shows which operating systems are compatible with which products.
SOFTWARE
WINDOWS
NT
2000
XP
Vista
MX4 SCADA
A fully scalable Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(SCADA) software program.Fully compatible with all MX4 software
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
MX4 HMI
A PC based HMI,fully compatible with all MX4 software
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
MX Sheet
Excel communication support tool
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
MX OPC Server
Provides OPC connectivity
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
MX Components
ActiveX library for communication
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
GTWorks2 (SoftGOT1000)
A PC based HMI for the GOT900 Series
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
GTWorks2 (GT Designer2)
Programming software for the GOT900 and GOT100 Series
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
E Designer
Programming software for the E Series HMIs
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
GX IEC Developer
Programming and documentation software based on IEC 1131.3
standard for our entire PLC range
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
GX IEC Developer FX
Programming and documentation software based on IEC 1131.3
standard specifically for micro FX PLCs
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
GX Developer
MELSEC PLC programming software
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
GX Developer FX
FX PLC Programming software
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
GX/GT Simulator
MELSEC PLC and GOT900/GOT1000 HMI simulation software
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
MT Developer
Integral start-up support software for Q motion CPU
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
MR Configurator
Servo system set-up software
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
Servo system set-up software
Inverter programming and configuration software
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
ALVLS
Programming software for alpha logic controllers
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
GX Configurator DP
Setup and configuration software for Profibus DP networks
쏹
쏹
쏹
�
�
Note: Windows Vista will be supported shortly
12
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:22
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
NETWORKS
Ethernet
The standard network for business operations
is Ethernet. There are various options available,
10 Mb rate is the most common, but many new
installations are operating at 100 Mb transfer
rate. Ethernet could be termed an OPEN network owing to its absolute acceptance within
the IT environment and the sheer number of
providers of Ethernet based IT products.
Ethernet can be used with various different
protocols. The most popular protocol used is
TCP/IP which most people use every single
time they log on to the Internet.
CC-Link (Process Solution/Fieldbus)
CANopen
From PLCs and Motion Controllers to HMIs
and Robots, CC-Link encompasses all areas of
Mitsubishi automation products. Although
CC-Link is an open network it is still controlled
by Mitsubishi and the CC-Link Partner
Associztion (CLPA), which allows them to
implement a strict control/testing regime of
any product which connect onto CC-Link.
This helps to guarantee and preserve the
CC-Link network integrity.
Cost effective network communications with
fault-resistant network structure where components from different manufacturers can be integrated quickly and easily.
AS-Interface (Actuator - Sensor - interface)
This network is well supported by sensor manufacturers. AS-Interface can be used both with
standard sensors and with special AS-Interface
sensors. The dedicated AS-Interface sensors are
typically more expensive than standard ones
but do offer additional diagnostic functions
and automatic configuration.
Profibus (Process Solution/Fieldbus)
Profibus offers users the option to mix devices on
the network, ranging from simple remote I/O stations and inverter stations through to more complex HMIs, data logging devices and PLCs.
MELSECNET/H
This is Mitsubishi's own dedicated, high performance network. MELSECNET/H can have either
coaxial bus or a dual loop cable configuration. This
offers high network availability, as cable breaks are
automatically detected and the active communication channel is automatically re-routed around
the suspected break. Another major feature of the
MELSECNet/H network is the ability to operate a
floating master system. This allows other PLC’s on
the network to take up the position of network
master should a fault develop with the currently
selected master.
DeviceNet (Process Solution/Fieldbus)
DeviceNet is an emerging Open vendor network.
The DeviceNet network is based on the Controller
Area Network (CAN) serial bus system. DeviceNet
is a producer/consumer operation where
peer-to-peer or master/slave configurations are
possible.
Modbus/TCP
This protocol is widely accepted as a
manufacter neutral, defacto standard for automation. Modbus/TCP is widely supported by
PLC manufactures, I/O vendors and by many
other automation technology.
Typical Distributed Control Structure
MAC E900
7
ABCD
4
MNOP
1
YZ!?
-
+/*=
8
EFGH
5
QRST
9
ACK
LIST
IJKL
6
UVWX
MAIN
PREV
2
C1-C4
0
°%#
3
<>()
_'
TCP/IP ETHERNET
System Q
System Q
AnSH/QnAS
System Q
MELSECNET/10/H
System Q
1
FX1N/FX2N/FX3U
1
1
MODBUS
AnSH/QnAS
1
System Q
AnSH/QnAS
CC-LINK
AnSH/QnAS
C LP A
1
Q
/10 H
MELSECNET/10/
1
AnSH/QnAS
AnSH/QnAS
FX3U
CC-LINK
CANopen
PROFIBUS/DP
FX1N/FX2N/FX3U
DeviceNet
FX1N/FX2N/FX3U
7
ABCD
4
MNOP
1
YZ!?
-
+/*=
8
EFGH
5
QRST
9
LIST
IJKL
FX1N/FX2N/FX3U
ACK
6
UVWX
MAIN
PREV
2
C1-C4
0
°%#
3
<>()
_'
AS-Interface
ALPHA 2
P R O F
I
M
PROCESS FIELD BUS
ALPHA 2
B U S
Series
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
CC Link
Profibus
DeviceNet
AS-Interface
MELSECNET/H
SSCNET
Modular PLC
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Micro PLC
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
HMI
앬
Inverter
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Modbus/RTU
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Alpha
Servo
앬
Breaker
Robot
CANopen
앬
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:47
앬
13
NETWORKS
From simple stand alone systems and basic
AS-Interface networks to Ethernet based networks and even Global networks based on
Remote Telemetry Technology, Mitsubishi has
the answers.
Here is an overview of some of the networks
Mitsubishi provides:
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// NETWORKS
Ethernet
NETWORKS
If you are looking for the widest possible set of
connectable technologies, Ethernet is unrivalled.
While being well established in the office and IT
environments, its adoption into automation
environments is both rapid and broad ranging.
Ethernet is a platform for a very wide range
of data communications protocols. The
combination of Ethernet and the extremely
widespread TCP/IP protocol enables high-speed
data communications between process
supervision and the MELSEC PLC series. The
MELSEC PLC compatible Ethernet modules also
provide FTP server functionality, in addition to
the normal TCP/IP communications services.
This means that a personal computer running
standard communications software can read
from and write to the PLC CPU sequence
program via the Internet.
There is also a growing demand for Ethernet
tobe used as a peer-to-peer network. We recognise this important customer requirement and
provide peer-to-peer communication with our
Ethernet solutions.
Model type
Series
Q series
Interface
AnS
FX series
E series
GOT series
앬
앬
앬
앬
Up to 100 Mbps communication
Monitor / program online *
Q series module mounts on the backplane,
FX module adds onto the system
앬
앬
Allows connection to PC, PLC and other third
party device
Preferred connection method for SCADA
Modbus/TCP protocol
* Not supported by all Ethernet products
Module
Description
QJ71E71-100
Ethernet interface module,100Mbit/s,100BASETX/10BASE-T
138327
QJ71E71-B2
Ethernet interface module,10BASE2
129614
QJ71E71-B5
Ethernet interface module,10BASE5
147287
QJ71MT91
Modbus/TCP Master and Client 10BASE-T/100BASETX
155606
A1SJ71E71N3-T
Ethernet interface module,10 Base-T
163755
FX2NC-ENET-ADP
Ethernet interface module,10 Base-T
157447
FX3U-ENET
Ethernet interface module,100BASETX/10BASE-T
166086
IFC-ETTP
10-Base-T Twisted Pair Ethernet interface for E300/600/610/615/700/710/900/910 HMI's
140727
IFC-ETCX
Coaxial 10-Base-T Ethernet interface for E300/600/610/615/700/710/900/910 HMI's
14726
A9GT-J71E71-T
10-Base-T Ethernet interface module for GOT HMIs
139395
Art. no.
Web Server
This unit allows direct access from Internet/
Intranet to System Q. With ample built-in
memory, flexible communications and compact design, it is the perfect tool to give you
visualisation of Q series PLC control processes.
Q Web Server supports open standards such as
HTML, JAVA, HTTP, FTP, etc. to give the easiest
and most cost effective method of monitoring
a single or networked system.
The Q Web Server is easy to set-up because
everything you need to get started is built into
the unit. Configuration is carried out via
embedded web pages that guide the user
through the set-up process. Settings like IP
Address, Tag and Component Registration,
Account Management and Data Logging
Options are all easily set with a Web Browser.
Furthermore, there is storage space for user
generated web pages.
Finally, as you would expect from Mitsubishi,
this unit is designed for harsh environments
and has the same robust design as the rest of
the System Q.
Internet Explorer
Q Web Server
Internet
CC-Link/Ethernet/Net/H
앬
앬
앬
5 Mbyte of built in memory, option to
expandup to 512 Mbyte (CompactFlash)
100 BaseTX Ethernet port
Serial RS-232 port
앬
앬
Pre-loaded HTML/JAVA samples to get you
started
Connects via Q Bus and down CC-Link,
Ethernet, MELSECNET/H or Serial communication unit.
Model Type
Series
Module
Art. no.
Description
Web Server
Q series
QJ71WS96
147115
Q Web Server module
14
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:49
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
CC-Link and CC-Link IE
If you need unparalleled ease of connection
between Mitsubishi products or you are looking
for a single supplier for your control network
needs, then CC-Link is the natural choice.
This open fieldbus and control network provides
fast data communications with different devices.
As with all manufacturer specific networks,
CC-Link is quickly implemented and is guaranteed
to work. CC-Link is also an open network and
therefore allows many third-party products now
appearing on the market with CC-Link connectivity. Companies such as SMC, Festo, Siemens,
Sunx, Yokogawa, Kawasaki Heavy Industries,
Izumi-DATALogic Co., Wago and Keyence have
developed products for CC-Link. The CC-Link network has the capability to have a standby master
which can also be used as a remote station.
CC-Link
The new CC-Link IE open standard offers maximum performance at maximum availability. It
serves firstly as a network for the control level
and furthermore implements the manufacturing level, the motion level and the safety level.
In future, the network structure will be uniform
at all levels.
Other interesting information on the CC-Link IE
is provided in a separate brochure which is also
available for download.
NETWORKS
Controller
CC-Link/LT
앬
앬
앬
앬
Up to 13.2 km network distance
Monitor / program online with Q series
Maximum transmission speed of 10 Mbps
Easy connection for Mitsubishi devices
앬
앬
No programming needed for set-up with
Q series
Has built-in redundancy functions and
excellent error tolerance
Standard CC-Link Modules
PLC
Master Modules
Description
Q series
QJ61BT11N
CC-Link master/local module
154748
FX series
FX2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link master
133596
PCI
Q80BD-J61BT11N
Master /local module for PCI/F PC master
200758
Art. no.
Slave Modules
FX2N-32CCL
MELSEC System Q QJ61BT11N
Master-Modul / lokales Modul für CC-Link
154748
FX-Familie
FX2N-32CCL
Lokales Modul für CC-Link
102961
FR-A5NC
CC-Link-Schnittstelle für Frequenzumrichter der FR-A500/FR-F500-Serie
68042
FR-E5NC
CC-Link-Schnittstelle für Frequenzumrichter der FR-E500-Serie
104558
156778
LRUN • LERR • RD • SD
Umrichter
QJ61BT11N
RUN
MST
SD
ERR.
L.RUN
S.MST
RD
L ERR.
STATION NO.
X10
Local module
FX2N-32CCL
FR-A7NC
CC-Link-Schnittstelle für Frequenzumrichter der FR-A700/FR-F700-Serie
MMI
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link-Schnittstelle für Bediengeräte der GOT 1000-Serie
166310
Schalter
BIF-CC-W
CC-Link-Schnittstelle für offene Leistungsschalter der SUPER AE-Serie
168571
Roboter
2A-HR 575H E
CC-Link-Schnittstelle für Roboter für die Steuergeräte CR-2,CR-2A und CR-1
129808
Art. no.
X1
MODE
CC-Link IE Modules
NC
NC
1
DA
SLD
DB
2
3
4
(FG)
PLC
DG
6
7
Master / local
module QJ61BT11N
Master /Slave Modules
Description
QJ71GP21-SX
1 Gbps, master/slave module for FO GI
208815
QJ71GP21S-SX
1 Gbps, master/slave module for FO GI with external voltage supply
208816
Q80BD-J71GP21-SX
1 Gbps, PCI PC card, master/slave for FO GI
208817
Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX
1 Gbps, PCI PC card, master/slave for FO GI with external voltage supply
208818
5
QJ61BR11N
Q series
CC-Link Cable
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
This cable is designed for connecting together
CC-Link network devices to create peer-to-peer
systems (e.g.Mitsubishi Q series), master/slave
systems (e.g. Mitsubishi Q series and Mitsubishi
CC-Link Remote I/O) and provide connection with
any CC-Link compatible product. It has been tested
and certified by CLPA (CC-Link Partner Association)
as a CC-Link compliant partner product.
Max. Operating Voltage
300 V RMS
Nom. Capacitance Between Conductors @1 kHz
60 pF/m
Nom. Impedance @ 1MHz
110 ⏲
Nom. Conductor DC Resistance @ 20°C
36 ⏲/1000m
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:15:56
Nom. Attenuation @ 1 MHz
1.6 dB/100m
Nom. Attenuation @ 5 MHz
3.51 dB/100m
Insulation Resistance
10 G ⏲/km Min
15
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// NETWORKS
CC-Link Remote Modules
These remote modules are intended to
be installed near the control target. The
advantages are reduced cabling and the
capability of aquiring data and operation results of individual machine modules autonomously.
B RATE
PW L RUN SD
01
2
3
4
AJ65BTB1-16D
MELSEC
MITSUBISHI
STATION NO.
RD L ERR.
X10
9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
1
DG
4
DA
2
+24V
6
SLD
24G
8
10
20
18
16
14
12
26
24
22
For wet environments six types of low
profile waterproof remote I/O modules
with IP67 protection are available featuring Input, Output and Combination
modules.
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
B116D
(FG)
NETWORKS
DB
7
5
X1
01 901
2
2 8
3
3 7
6 54 6 54
앬
B RATE
STATION NO.
2 1
40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PW L RUN L ERR Y0
앬
ON
MITSUBISHI
AJ65SBT1-8TE
DA
DB
Product Range
Module
DG
+24V
SLD
24G
(FG)
Y1
Y6
Y4
Y2
Y0
Y3
Y5
Type
Description
75447
16
—
DC input with 8 potential terminals (sink/source type)
75450
AJ65BTC1-32D
32
—
DC input (sink/source type)
75455
AJ65SBTB1-8D
8
—
DC input (sink/source type)
104422
16
—
DC input (sink/source type)
136026
16
—
DC input (sink/source type), fast input
140144
140145
Remote module
AJ65SBTB1-16D
AJ65SBTB1-16D1
Compact remote module
Art. no.
AJ65SBTB1-32D1
32
—
DC input (sink/source type), fast input
AJ65SBTB1-32D
32
—
DC input (sink/source type)
136025
AJ65FBTA4-16D
16
—
Protection IP 67, DC input (sink type)
137587
Waterproof remote module
16
—
Protection IP 67, DC input (source type)
137588
—
16
Transistor output, (sink type)
75449
—
32
Transistor output, (sink type)
75456
AJ65BTB2-16R
—
16
Relay output
75453
AJ65SBTB1-8TE
—
8
Transistor output (source type), low current consumption
129574
Remote module
AJ65SBTB2-8T1
—
8
Transistor output (sink type)
144062
AJ65SBTB1-16TE
—
16
Transistor output (source type)
129575
AJ65SBTB1-32T
Compact remote module
—
32
Transistor output (sink type)
138957
AJ65SBTB2N-8R
—
8
Relay output
140148
AJ65SBTB2N-16R
—
16
Relay output
140149
AJ65FBTA2-16T
—
16
Protection IP 67, DC output (sink type)
150380
—
16
Protection IP 67, DC output (source type)
150381
8
8
DC input (sink type), transistor output (sink type)
75448
8
8
DC input with 16 potential terminals (sink type), transistor output (sink type)
75452
AJ65BTB2-16DR
8
8
DC input (source type), relay output
75451
AJ65FBTA42-16DT
8
8
Protection IP 67, DC output (sink type)
137589
Protection IP 67, DC output (source type)
137590
AJ65FBTA2-16TE
Waterproof remote module
AJ65BTB1-16DT
AJ65BTB2-16DT
AJ65FBTA42-16DTE
Remote module
Waterproof remote module
8
8
AJ65BT-64AD
4
—
4 channel input, -2000 to 2000,0-4000, -10 V to 10 V, -20 mA to +20 mA
75444
AJ65BT-64RD3
4
—
4 channel input, for 3-wire-type Pt100 temperature sensors
88026
4
—
4 channel input, for 4-wire-type Pt100 temperature sensors
88027
8
—
8 channel thermocouple input
88025
4
—
4 channel input, -4096 to +4096, 0-4000, -10 V to 10 V, -20 mA to +20 mA
140146
AJ65BT-64RD4
Remote module
AJ65BT-68TD
AJ65SBT-64AD
AJ65BT-64DAV
Repeater
Up to 64 I/O modules with a maximum of 32 inputs or 32 outputs each
can be connected.
All modules have a very compact
design which is tough and highly
shock-resistant.
DC input (sink/source type)
AJ65BTC1-32T
Analog out
앬
—
AJ65BTB1-16T
Analog in
앬
No. of outputs
AJ65FBTA4-16DE
Combine
앬
Status indicator LEDs for the inputs
Standard electrical isolation between
process and control via optocouplers
Mounting with DIN rail adapters or
screws
Modules can be mounted in horizontal arrangement or in one of 4 orientations on a flat surface.
Ready for use with all CC-Link master
modules.
16
AJ65BTB2-16D
Digital out
Y7
CTL-
앬
No. of inputs
AJ65BTB1-16D
Digital in
COM+
앬
AJ65BT-64DAI
Compact remote module
Remote module
—
4
4-channel voltage output, -2000 to 2000, -10 V to 10 V
75446
—
4
4-channel current output, 0-4000, 4 mA-20 mA
75445
AJ65SBT-62DA
Compact remote module
—
4
4-channel voltage output, -4096 to +4096, -10 V to 10 V
140147
AJ65SBT-RPT
Compact repeater
—
—
Repeater allowing 'T' branching and network extension
130353
16
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:03
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
STATION NO.
X1
X10
01 901
01
2
28
2
3
3 7
3
4 6 54 6 54
B RATE
DG
4
DA
2
DB
7
5
3
1
PW
RUN
L RUN
SD
RD
L ERR.
CH. 2
øA
øB
DEC
PRE
F ST.
EQU1
EQU2
CH. 1
øA
øB
DEC
PRE
F ST.
EQU1
EQU2
SLD
18
RESET
PLS
CH. 1 2
ON LOW
HIGH
20
22
27
25
23
21
19
17
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
24G
8
+24V
6
RING
CH. 1 2
24
26
Open Control Loop Positioning
The high-speed counter modules
acquire signals at frequencies beyond
the range of normal digital input modules. Positioning tasks or frequency
measurements for example can be performed.
Locating the positioning unit near the
servo/mechanical system not only
reduces cable costs but also eliminates
problems arising from noise and cable
losses.
Data exchange with peripherals
BT64DAI
D62D
These modules allow communication
with peripheral devices through a standard RS232C interface. The peripherals
are connected point to point (1:1).
(FG)
NETWORKS
64DAI
J65BT-D62D
MITSUBISHI MELSEC A
High-Speed Counter
STATION NO.
X1
X10
01 901
01
2
28
2
3
3 7
3
4
4 6 54 6 5
B RATE
MELSEC
MITSUBISHI
AJ65BT-D75P2-S3
AX1
AX2
DG
4
DA
2
DB
Product Range
Module
+24V
6
SLD
MODE RESET
7
5
3
1
PW
RUN
L RUN
SD
RD
L ERR.
24G
(FG)
Type
Description
AJ65BT-D62
Counter
Interface
Positioning
Art. no.
2 high-speed counter inputs , 5 – 24 V DC inputs, up to 200 kHz
88028
2 high-speed counter inputs , EIA standard RS-422 connection, up to 400 kHz (low current consumption)
88029
AJ65BT-D62D-S1
2 high-speed counter inputs , EIA standard RS-422 connection, up to 400 kHz
88030
AJ65BT-R2
Serial interface, RS232C (D-Sub, 9 pole), 1 channel
88003
PC interface, RS422, 1 channel
134950
2 axes positioning module, pulse output, linear and circular interpolation
88002
AJ65BT-D62D
AJ65BT-G4-S3
AJ65BT-D75P2-S3
Remote module
Remote module
Remote module
The CC-Link Partner Association set-up a
European headquarters at the beginning of
January 2001 at Mitsubishi’s UK office.
The role of the organisation is to provide
information, education, and the promotion
of CC-Link technology and CLPA partner
products throughout Europe. One of the
primary responsibilities of the organisation
is to provide technical support to CLPA
partners who plan to incorporate CC-Link
compatibility in their products.
"Our target is to significantly increase the use
of CC-Link, and to promote the CC-Link compatible products manufactured by CLPA partners. Promotional activities include educational seminars, exhibiting at trade shows,
trade press coverage, mailings and
web-based listings. For more information
please contact us."
Steve Jones, CLPA Europe
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:11
앬
앬
앬
Over 150 partner manufacturers of
CC-Link products
Over 700 CC-Link compatible products,
including PLCs, servo drives, temperature
controllers etc.
Over 700 members, with a new partner
manufacturer joining each month.
Postbox 10 12 17
D-40832 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0) 2102 / 486 1750
Fax: +49 (0) 2102 / 486 1751
e-mail: partners@clpa-europe.com
www.clpa-europe.com
Regional offices in UK,
Poland and Ukrain
for more information see
the website.
17
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// NETWORKS
PROFIBUS/DP
NETWORKS
Profibus is one of the most widely used
automation networks in Europe. It provides a
wide possible range of compatible devices
while delivering fast and robust communication.
Profibus offers users the option to mix
devices from different companies. It is an
open network ranging from simple I/O stations through to complex PLCs. The network
allows extremely fast data exchange with a
wide variety of slave devices. The GX
Configurator DP software and the profibus
master modules combine to give a userfriendly plug and play technology. The configuration software is self-explanatory, using
a graphical method to set up the network.
You simply select the slave unit, assign the
station number and specify where in the PLC
the information is stored. As this is an open
network, Mitsubishi Profibus units can also be
connected to master and slave devices from
other manufacturers.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Master
Intelligent/Local
Remote I/O
Widely supported by many manufacturers
Up to 12 Mbps transmission speed
Easy set-up with GX Configurator DP
Full range of Mitsubishi Profibus products
Master and slave available with Q and FX
Series
MASTER
Series
Module
Description
Art. no.
Q series
QJ71PB92V
Profibus DP interface master module (DP V1/V2)
165374
QnAS/AnS
A1SJ71PB92D
Profibus DP master module 12MB, for AnS and QnAS PLC's
63393
FX
INTELLIGENT SLAVE
Series
FX3U-64DP-M
Profibus DP master module for FX3U PLCs
166085
Module
Description
Art. no.
Q series
QJ71PB93D
Profibus slave
143545
FX0N-32NT-DP
Profibus DP slave module for FX1N/FX2N and FX3U PLC's
62125
FX3U-32DP
Profibus DP slave module for FX3U PLC's
194214
14063
FX
AnS
Inverter
Servo
A1SJ71PB93D
Profibus slave
FR-A5NP
Profibus interface for A500 and F500 inverters
68045
FR-E5NP
Profibus interface for E500 inverters
104556
FR-A7NP
Profibus interface for A700 and F700 inverters
158524
MR-MG30
Profibus communication option unit for MR-J2S-B servo amplifiers
157643
HMI
IFC-PBDP
Profibus DP slave interface for E300/600/610/615/700/710/900/910 HMI's
76676
Breaker
SLAVE I/O
Series
BIF-PR-W
Profibus interface for SUPER AE air circuit breakers
168572
Module
Description
ST series
Modular input/output system for connection to PROFIBUS/DP
Module
Description
FX2N-32DP-IF
Profibus remote I/O using FX2N I/O & Special Function modules; 240 V AC power supply
76676
FX2N-32DP-IF-D
Profibus remote I/O using FX2N I/O & Special Function modules; 24 V DC power supply
142763
All PLC types
I/O BRIDGE MODULE
Series
FX
18
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:15
Art. no.
refer to the following pages
Art. no.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
The MELSEC ST Series for PROFIBUS/DP
Product range
The new ST series is designed as a modular
input/output system for connection to
PROFIBUS/DP. It comprises of:
앬 basic module (head station and bus node for
PROFIBUS/DP)
앬 power supply modules
앬 digital and analog I/O modules
They can be combined freely to provide an efficient system configuration depending on your
demands.
The name "ST" means "Slice-type Terminal" and
comes from the physical appearance of the
very slim modules (12.6mm). As well as slice
type modules, cost saving block modules with
16 inputs or outputs are also available.
The extension modules are designed as a
2-component system, that means they consist
of electronic modules for the function and base
modules as modular backplane bus (available
with two types of terminals: spring clamp or
screw clamp terminals).
The electronic modules can be clipped easily in
the base modules without any tool. The combined unit can then be mounted on a DIN rail.
Exchange of the electronic modules can be
made on-line, so the system keeps running.
Re-wiring is not needed.
RUN
ERR.
REL.
DIA
BF
M1
M0
ST1X2
-DE1
S 80
T 40
SYN. A
FRE. T 20
I 10
O 8
N
4
ST1PSD
ST1H-PB
N 2
O. 1
-
RUN
PW
ERR.
ST1X16
-DE1
RUN
ERR.
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
101
111
121
131
141
151
RUN
ERR.
11
21
162
62 72
122 132
42 52
102 112
22 32
82 92
142 152
STATION
22 12
12
143 153
163
63 73
123 133
43 53
103 113
23 33
83 93
23 13
13
ERR.
21
11
12
22
12
13
13 23
1414
14
24 14
24 34
44 54
64 74
84 94
104 114
124 134
144 154
22
23
2424
164
Every electronic module provides LEDs for
quick and easy diagnostics and also additional
information. Error and status messages are also
shown on the basic module.
Special features:
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
ON
ST1H-PB
S 80
DIA
SYN.
BF
FRE.
RUN
T
40
A
T 20
I 10
O
N 8
4
ERR.
PW
ST1X2
-DE1
RUN
11
ERR.
21
ST1X16
-DE1
RUN
ERR.
11
21
ST = Slice terminals, only 12.6 mm wide
Modular structure with no restriction on
installation position
Easy and complete handling via 3 push buttons
Connection diagram on every module
Applicable wire size for all base modules
0.5–2.5mm², flexible wire with ferrule or solid
core wire without ferrule
Expandable in two-point increments
Replaceable electronic modules
Hot swap function without re-wiring
Quick diagnostics via LED´s
Distributed 24V DC for actuators/sensors
Gold contacts for all bus and signal connections
Electronic modules are coded to prevent an
incorrect unit being inserted
Easy parameter setting with GX Configurator DP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:29
2ch Analog output module
ST1X2
-DE1
ST1Y16
-TE2
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
101
111
121
131
141
151
161
RUN
ERR.
11
21
RUN
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
101
111
121
131
141
151
161
11
ERR.
21
ST1X4
-DE1
RUN
ERR.
11
21
14
24
ST1Y2
-TE2
RUN
11
ST1PDD
ERR.
RUN
21
PW
ERR.
ST1AD2
-V
RUN
ST1DA2
-V
ERR.
RUN
ST1PSD
ERR.
RUN
ERR.
ST1AD2
-I
RUN
ERR.
ST1DA1
-I
RUN
ERR.
PW
2
N
O 1
RS-232C
-
+
RELEASE
RESET
PROFIBUS I/F
MITSUBISHI
STATION
11
21 31
41
11
21
11
21 31
41 51
61 71
81 91
101 111
121 131
141 151
161
11
21 31
41 51
61 71
81 91
101 111
121 131
141 151
161 11
21 11
21
11
21
11
21
11
21
11
21
11
21 31
41
11
21
11
21
12
22 32
42
12
22
12
22 32
42 52
62 72
82 92
102 112
122 132
142 152
162
12
22 32
42 52
62 72
82 92
102 112
122 132
142 152
162 12
22 12
22
12
22
12
22
12
22
12
22
12
22 32
42
12
22
12
22
13
23 33
43
13
23
13
23 33
43 53
63 73
83 93
103 113
123 133
143 153
163
13
23 33
43 53
63 73
83 93
103 113
123 133
143 153
163 13
23 13
23
13
23
13
23
13
23
13
23
13
23 33
43
13
23
13
23
14
24 34
44
14
24
14
24 34
44 54
64 74
84 94
104 114
124 134
144 154
164
14
24 14
24
14
24
14
24
14
24
14
24 34
44
14
24
14
24
15
25
16
26
Head station
2pt Digital input module
Power supply module
4pt Digital input module
2pt Digital input module
Power supply module
2ch Analog input modules
2pt Digital output module
Power feeding module
Product range and selection guide
The following table shows the possible combinations between electronic modules and the applicable base modules. However, two types of base modules featuring spring clamp terminals or screw
clamp terminals are available. Choose the best solution for your special application.
ST1X2
-DE1
RUN
11
11
11
MITSUBISHI
앬
M1
M2
REL.
Electronic modules
11
앬
ST1PSD
RUN
ERR.
1ch Analog output module
16pt Digital
output module
161
RS-232C
RELEASE
+
RESET
PROFIBUS I/F
앬
16pt Digital
input module
Head station
ST1H-PB
Power supply modules
ST1PSD (first one)
ST1PSD (second and more)
ST1PDD
Digital input modules
ST1X2-DE1
ST1X4-DE1
ST1X16-DE1 /
ST1X1616-DE1-S1
Digital output modules
ST1Y2-TE2
ST1Y16-TE2
ST1Y16-TE8
ST1Y2-TPE3
ST1Y16-TPE3
ST1Y2-R2
Analog input modules
ST1AD2-V
ST1AD2-I
Analog output modules
ST1DA2-V
ST1DA1-I
Temperature modules
ST1TD2
ST1RD2
Encoder modules
ST1SS1
쏡
Base modules
Spring clamp terminals
Screw clamp terminals
no need
no need
ST1B-S4P2-H-SET
ST1B-S4P2-R-SET
ST1B-S4P2-D
ST1B-E4P2-H-SET
ST1B-E4P2-R-SET
ST1B-E4P2-D
ST1B-S4X2
ST1B-S6X4
ST1B-S4X16
ST1B-S6X32
ST1B-E4X2
ST1B-E6X4
ST1B-E4X16
ST1B-E6X32
ST1B-S3Y2
ST1B-S3Y16
ST1B-S3Y16
ST1B-S3Y2
ST1B-S3Y16
ST1B-S4IR2
쏡
ST1B-E3Y2
ST1B-E3Y16
ST1B-E3Y16
ST1B-E3Y2
ST1B-E3Y16
ST1B-E4IR2
ST1B-S4IR2
ST1B-S4IR2
ST1B-E4IR2
ST1B-E4IR2
ST1B-S4IR2
ST1B-S4IR2
ST1B-E4IR2
ST1B-E4IR2
ST1B-S4TD2
ST1B-S4IR2
ST1B-E4TD2
ST1B-E4IR2
ST1B-S4IR2
ST1B-E4IR2
19
NETWORKS
System description
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// NETWORKS
The MELSEC ST Series for PROFIBUS/DP
M1
M0
RUN
ERR.
REL.
DIA
BF
Basic module (head station) of the
MELSEC ST series
S 80
The basic module ST1H-PB connects the
remote I/O modules of the ST series to
PROFIBUS/DP.
T 40
SYN. A
FRE. T 20
I 10
O 8
N
ST1H-PB
4
N 2
O. 1
RS-232C
RELEASE
+
-
RESET
PROFIBUS I/F
Specifications
Occupied I/O points
NETWORKS
MITSUBISHI
ST1H-PB
4/4
IEC 61158/EN50170
Shielded 2-wire
type RS485
Sync mode, freeze mode
m 4800 (3 repeaters)
RS232 Mini-DIN socket for diagnostics and programming
304 total / 32 / 64 / 128 / 256, selectable mode
max. 63
bit 256
word 32
mA 530
Via ST1PSD
mm 114.5 x 50.5 x 74.5
protocol
medium
Communications
Interface
Supported operation modes
Max. transmission distance
Programming interface
Data exchange with master
Number of addressable slices
digital
Addressable I/O points
analog
Internal power consumption (5 V DC)
External power supply
Dimensions (W x H x D)
STATION
Order information
Art. no.
152951
Bus power for head station
ST1PSD
RUN
ERR.
PW
ST1PDD
RUN
ERR.
PW
11
12
22 32
42
13
23 33
43
14
24 34
44
11
Specifications
Module type
Occupied I/O points
Occupied slice number
Nominal voltage
Permissible range
System supply
Ripple
Internal power consumption (5 V DC)
Max. output current (5 V DC)
Max. output current (24 V DC)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
V DC
V DC
mA
A
A
mm
Art. no.
Applicable base module for spring clamp type
basic module supply
screw clamp type
Applicable base module for spring clamp type
bus refreshing within the
screw clamp type
station
12
22
13
23
14
24
The Bus power supply and refresh module ST1PSD can serve in two ways: distribute 24 V DC power supply for the
basic module and I/O devices plus
5 V DC for the internal backplane bus
(H mode) or distribute 24 V DC power
supply for I/O devices and refresh the
internal backplane bus with 5 V DC
(R mode). Each mode (H or R) is indicated by the use of a different base module, marked with "H" or "R".
You need 1 ST1PSD with H-type base
module beside the basic module to
operate the ST station, a second or more
(using the R-type base module) are only
needed depending on the power consumption of the connected items (see
bottom of this page).
ST1PSD
Power supply for head station, internal 5V DC backplane bus and 24V DC for I/Os (double
function)
2/2
2
24.0
24.0 (19.2 – 28.8 (±20%))
24.0 for basic module and I/O´s, field supply / 5.0 for internal backplane bus
<5%
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:38
LEDs on the module show the status for
RUN and ERROR. Diagnosis can be made
via the head module.
Power feeding module
The power feeding module ST1PDD distributes 24V DC only for the I/Os of the
actuators and sensors.
The number of ST1PDD modules needed
can be calculated individually by addition of the current consumption of all
connected devices.
The electronic module is fitted in a base
module, which can be installed on a
standard DIN rail.
ST1PDD
Power feeding module
2/2
1
24.0
24.0 (19.2 – 28.8 (±20%))
2.0
8 ( 10 with fuse)
25.2 x 55.4 x 74.1
<5%
60
—
8 (10 with fuse)
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
152952
152953
ST1B-S4P2-H-SET, art. no. 152908
ST1B-E4P2-H-SET, art. no. 152918
ST1B-S4P2-R-SET, art. no. 152909
ST1B-S4P2-D, art. no. 152910
ST1B-E4P2-D, art. no. 152920
—
ST1B-E4P2-R-SET, art. no. 152919
—
Note: Calculation of the power consumption
The power consumption and the need of a power refresh module will be calculated exactly in the GX Configurator DP
during your configuration of the System.
For a rough calculation of the internal 5V DC power consumtion and a rough calculation for the number of needed PSD
refresh modules, please refer to the attached table.
20
The ST1H-PB provides a Mini-DIN socket
for diagnostics and parameter setting.
The station number can be set via DIP
switches on the basic module. LEDs
show the status of the connected systems.
Module type
ST1PSD
ST1H-PB
Slicemodule
Blockmodule
Power supply/consumtion
2.0A
0.53A
0.1A
0.15A
Description
Power supply infeed
Power consumption
Power consumption
Power consumption
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
Digital input modules
ERR.
11
21
RUN
ERR.
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
101
111
121
141
131
151
161
Special features:
Digital output modules
11
11
12
12
22
13
23
13
Specifications
Module type
Occupied I/O points
Occupied slice number
Isolation method
Rated input voltage
Rated input current
Inputs simultaneous ON
Input resistance
OFF 씮 ON
Response time
ON 씮 OFF
Internal current consumption (5V DC)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Applicable base spring clamp type
module
screw clamp type
Connection cable type
Order information
22 32
23 33
42 52
43 53
62 72
63 73
82 92
83 93
102 112
103 113
122 132
123 133
142 152
143 153
162
163
ST1X2-DE1
DC input module, 2 inputs
2/2
1
Photo coupler
V DC 24 (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
mA 4
100%
kW 5.6
ms 0.5 / 1.5 or less (default: 1.5)
ms 0.5 / 1.5 or less (default: 1.5)
mA 85
mm 12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S4X2, art. no. 152911
ST1B-E4X2, art. no. 152921
3-wire 24 V DC (with shield)
Art. no.
152964
The electronic modules are fitted in a
base module, which can be installed on
a standard DIN rail. Each module can be
replaced without having to turn OFF the
power ("Hot Swap"), without rewiring
and without using any tool.
The digital output modules of the ST
series connect directly to field devices
(e.g. contactors, valves, lights) and
PROFIBUS/DP master module.
The TPE3 models provide advanced protection functions e.g. for thermal and
short circuit failures.
앬
앬
앬
앬
DIN rail mounting
LEDs for RUN and ERROR on the modules and also on the basic module
Connection to the basic module
(head station) via integrated
backplane bus in the base modules
Two selectable types of connecting
terminals base modules:
쐍 spring clamp type terminals
쐍 screw clamp type terminals
ST1X4-DE1
DC input module, 4 inputs
4/4
1
Photo coupler
24 (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
4
100%
5.6
ST1X16-DE1
DC input module, 16 inputs
16 / 16
8
Photo coupler
24 (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
4
100%
5.6
ST1X1616-DE1-S1
DC input module, 32 inputs
16 / 16
8
Photo coupler
24 (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
5
100%
4.7
95
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S6X4, art. no. 152912
ST1B-E6X4, art. no. 152922
3-wire 24 V DC
120
100.8 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S4X16, art. no. 152913
ST1B-E4X16, art. no. 152923
3-wire 24 V DC (with shield)
200
100.8 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S6X32, art. no. 169313
ST1B-E6X32, art. no. 169314
3-wire 24 V DC (with shield)
152965
152966
169309
Specifications
Module type
Occupied I/O points
Occupied slice number
Isolation method
ST1Y2-TE2
2 transistor outputs
2/2
1
Photo coupler
ST1Y16-TE2
16 transistor outputs
16 / 16
8
Photo coupler
ST1Y16-TE8
2 transistor outputs
2/2
1
Photo coupler
ST1Y2-TPE3
2 transistor outputs
2/2
1
Photo coupler
ST1Y16-TPE3
16 transistor outputs
16 / 16
8
Photo coupler
Rated load voltage
24 V DC (+20/-15%)
24 V DC (+20/-15%)
24 V DC (+20/-15%)
24 V DC (+20/-15%)
24 V DC (+20/-15%)
0.5/point; 4.0/common
2.0/point; 4.0/common
1.0/point; 2.0/common
1.0/point; 4.0/common
—
4.0 (10 ms or less)
0.1 or less
0.2 V DC (TYP) 0.5 A,
0.3 V DC (max.) 0.5 A
max. 1.0
max. 1.0
(rated load, resistive load)
—
4.0 (10 ms or less)
0.1 or less
0.2 V DC (TYP) 2.0 A,
0.3 V DC (max.) 2.0 A
max. 1.0
max. 1.0
(rated load, resistive load)
Max. load current
A
Nax. swithing load
Max. inrush current
Leakage current OFF
Max. voltage drop at ON
OFF 씮 ON
Response time
ON 씮 OFF
Protection functions
Internal current consumption (5V DC)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Applicable base spring clamp type
module
screw clamp type
Connection cable type
Order information
0.5/point; 1.0/common
—
A 4.0 (10 ms or less)
mA 0.1 or less
0.2 V DC (TYP) 0.5 A,
0.3 V DC (max.) 0.5 A
ms max. 1.0
max. 1.0
ms
(rated load, resistive load)
90
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S3Y2, art. no. 152914
ST1B-E3Y2, art. no. 152924
2-wire 24 V DC with shield
—
—
2.0 (10 ms or less)
4.0 (10 ms or less)
0.3 or less
0.3 or less
0.15 V DC (TYP) 1.0 A,
0.15 V DC (TYP) 1.0 A,
0.2 V DC (max.) 1.0 A
0.2 V DC (max.) 1.0 A
max. 0.5
max. 0.5
max. 1.5
max. 1.5
(rated load, resistive load) (rated load, resistive load)
Thermal protection, short circuit protection (thermal and
short circuit protection areactivated in increments of 1 points.
When the output section protection function is working,
—
—
LED indicates it and signal is output to head module
(automatic reset).
150
95
95
160
100.8 x 55.4 x 74.1
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S3Y16, art. no. 152915 ST1B-S3Y16, art. no. 152915 ST1B-S3Y2, art. no. 152914 ST1B-S3Y16, art. no. 152915
ST1B-E3Y16, art. no. 152925 ST1B-E3Y16, art. no. 152925 ST1B-E3Y2, art. no. 152924 ST1B-E3Y16, art. no. 152925
2-wire 24 V DC with shield 2-wire 24 V DC with shield 2-wire 24 V DC with shield 2-wire 24 V DC with shield
152967
152968
—
mA
mm
Art. no.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:46
169408
152969
152970
ST1Y2-R2
Relay output
2/2
1
Relay
24 V DC (+20/-15%); 240 V
AC
2.0 (cos f=1)/point;
4.0/common
264 V AC/125 V DC
—
—
—
max. 10
max. 12
—
90
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S4IR2, art. no. 152916
ST1B-E4IR2, art. no. 152927
2 wires (internal connected)
152971
21
NETWORKS
ST1Y16
-TE2
ST1Y2
-TE2
RUN
The digital input modules of the ST
series directly connect field devices
(contacts, limit switches, sensors, etc.)
on to a PROFIBUS/DP ST series slave
node.
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// NETWORKS
The MELSEC ST Series for PROFIBUS/DP
Analog input modules
ST1DA1
-I
ST1AD2
-V
RUN
RUN
ERR.
ERR.
The analog input modules of the ST
series convert analog process data like
pressure, temperature, etc. into digital
values that are sent to the PROFIBUS/DP
master.
Analog output modules
11
11
22
12
22
13
23
13
23
14
24
14
24
NETWORKS
12
All modules are fitted in a base module,
which can be installed on a standard DIN
rail.
Special features:
앬
앬
The analog output modules of the ST
series convert the digital values sent
from the PROFIBUS/DP master into an
analog voltage signal. This signal can be
used to control valves, inverters, servomotors, etc.
앬
Analog temperature input module
앬
앬
The analog temperature input modules
of the ST series convert analog temperature data into digital values that are sent
to the PROFIBUS/DP master.
Specifications
Module type
Occupied I/O points
Occupied Slice number
Number of input channels
ST1AD2-V
Analog input module
4/4
1
2
ST1AD2-I
Analog input module
4/4
1
2
Signal input
-10 – +10 V, 0 – +10 V, 0 – 5 V, 1 – 5 V
0–20 mA, 4–20 mA
Resolution
12 bit + sign
12 bit + sign
Conversion speed
0.1 ms per channel
0.1 ms per channel
Maximum input voltage
Micro voltage input range
Maximum input current
temperature conversion
Output
micro conversion
Total error
Input resistance at single-end
Isolation
Internal current consumption (5V DC)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Applicable base spring clamp type
module
screw clamp type
±15 V
—
—
—
—
±30 mA
—
—
—
—
±0.8 % (0–55 °C)
±0.8 % (0–55 °C)
1.0 MW
250 W
Photo coupler isolation between the channels and backplane bus
110
110
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S4IR2, art. no. 152916
ST1B-S4IR2, art. no. 152916
ST1B-E4IR2, art. no. 152927
ST1B-E4IR2, art. no. 152927
Order information
mA
mm
Art. no.
152972
152973
Specifications
ST1DA2-V
ST1DA1-I
Module type
Analog output module
Analog output module
Occupied I/O points
Occupied slice number
Number of output channels
Signal output range
Resolution
Conversion time
Maximum input voltage
Maximum input current
Total error
Data length
External load resistance value
Isolation
Internal current consumption (5V DC)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Applicable base spring clamp type
module
screw clamp type
Order information
22
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:53
4/4
1
2
-10 – +10 V, 0 – +10 V, 0 – 5 V, 1 – 5 V
12 bit + sign
0.1 ms per channel
±15 V
—
±0.8 % (0–55 °C)
16 bit
1.0 kW–1.0 MW
Photo coupler isolation between the channels and
backplane bus
mA 95
mm 12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S4IR2, art. no. 152916
ST1B-E4IR2, art. no. 152927
Art. no.
152975
DIN rail mounting
LEDs for RUN and ERROR on the modules and also on the basic module
Connection to the basic module
(head station) via integrated
backplane bus in the base modules
Modules can be replaced without
having to turn OFF the power ("Hot
Swap")
Two selectable types of connecting
terminals base modules:
쐍 spring clamp type terminals
쐍 screw clamp type terminals
ST1TD2
Analog temperature input module
4/4
2
2
Thermocouple input: K,T: 0.3 °C; E: 0.2 °C;
J: 0.1 °C; B: 0.7 °C; R, S: 0.8 °C; N: 0.4 °C
Microvoltage: 4 mV
Cold junction temperature compensation
setting:
not set: 30 ms/channel; set: 60 ms/channel
±4 V
-80 – +80 mV (input resistance < 1 MW)
—
1-bit signed binary (-2,700–18,200)
16-bit signed binary (-20,000–20,000)
±0.32 mV (0–55 °C)
1 MW
ST1RD2
Analog temperature input module
4/4
2
2
—
—
16-bit signed binary (-2,000–8,500)
—
±1.2 °C (0–55 °C)
1 MW
95
12.6 x 55.4 x 77.6
ST1B-S4TD2, art. no. 161736
ST1B-E4TD2, art. no. 161737
80
12.6 x 55.4 x 77.6
ST1B-S4TD2, art. no. 161736
ST1B-E4TD2, art. no. 161737
152972
169406
PT100, PT1000
0.1 °C
80 ms per channel
4/4
1
1
0–20 mA, 4–20 mA
12 bit + sign
0.1 ms per channel
—
±30 mA
±0.8 % (0–55 °C)
16 bit
0–500 W
Photo coupler isolation between the channels and
backplane bus
95
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S4IR2, art. no. 152916
ST1B-E4IR2, art. no. 152927
ST1SS1
Absolute encoder interface with SSI
(synchronal serial interface)
4/4
2
1
31 bit binary (0 – 2147483647)
2 to 31 bits
125 kHz, 250 kHz, 500 kHz, 1 MHz, 2 MHz
24 V DC (+20 / -15 %)
12 mA
±0.8 % (0–55 °C)
—
—
Photo coupler isolation between the channels and
backplane bus
80
12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
ST1B-S4IR2, art. no. 152916
ST1B-E4IR2, art. no. 152927
152976
193660
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
DeviceNet
DeviceNet is another widely accepted open
network type with a large variety of third party
products. This network type is particularly
popular in North America.
DeviceNet is based on a producer/consumer
operation where peer-to-peer or master/slave
configuration are possible. DeviceNet is based
on CAN (Controller Area Network) serial bus
system. DeviceNet is a cost-effective solution
for network integration of low level terminal
equipment.
앬
앬
앬
앬
Widely supported by many manufacturers
Up to 500 kbps transmission speed
Easy set-up with GX Configurator DN for
Q Series
Wide range of Mitsubishi DeviceNet
products
Master and slave available with Q and AnS
Series
Model type
Master
Series
Module
Description
Q series
QJ71DN91
DeviceNet interface master/slave module
136390
AnS/QnAS
A1SJ71DN91
DeviceNet master/slave module,for Ans and QnAS PLC's
124373
131708
FX
Intelligent Slave
Slave
Inverter
Art. no.
FX2N-64DNET
DeviceNet interface (slave)
FR-A5ND
DeviceNet interface for A500 and F500 inverters
68043
FR-E5ND
DeviceNet interface for E500 inverters
104557
FR-A7ND
DeviceNet interface for A700 and F700 inverters
158525
AS-Interface
The Actuator Sensor Interface (AS-Interface) is
the international standard for the lowest field
bus level. The network suits versatile demands,
as it’s very flexible and easy to install. It is usually used to control sensors, actuators, I/O units
and gateways. The AS-Interface network has its
own distinctive yellow cable which acts as both
a communication line and a power supply for
connecting devices. By using special coupling
bridges, any slave station on the network can
be moved and placed at a new location without
having to completely rewire or rebuild the network.
앬
앬
앬
앬
Master
FX series supports up to 31 stations/nodes
per network
Q and AnS series supports 2 networks/
62 stations with a single module
Easy to configure and swap modules
Self healing cable needs no tools for
installation or system changes
Model type
Master
Intelligent Slave
Slave
Series
Module
Description
Art. no.
Q series
QJ71AS92
AS-i interface module,version 2.11,dual network master
143531
AnS
A1SJ71AS92
AS-i master module for AnS (Double network master)
129936
FX
FX2N-32ASI-M
AS-i master
103314
Alpha
AL2-ASI-BD
AS-i interface board for use with AL2-14M or AL2-24Ms
142525
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:16:59
23
NETWORKS
앬
Master
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// NETWORKS
MELSECNET/H
NETWORKS
For the systems that demand uncompromising
reliability and high speed performance, only a
dedicated network can deliver. MELSECNET/H
and it’s predecessor MELSECNET/10 use high
speed, redundant functionality to give deterministic delivery of large data volumes.
Bus Master
This is Mitsubishi’s own dedicated network.
MELSECNET has a dual cable configuration. This
offers high network availability, as cable breaks
are automatically detected and the active communication channel is automatically re-routed
around the suspected break. The MELSECNET
network also allows a floating master. This
allows other PLCs on the network to take up
the position of network master should a fault
develop with the currently selected master.
The MELSECNET allows very large network
coverage of up to 30 km.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Normal/Standby
Up to 64 stations per network
Up to 255 networks (AnS series) or 239 network (System Q) can be joined together
Floating master give excellent redundancy if
master station fails
Fibre optic (GI or SI cable) and 50 ⏲ coaxial
connection
Used for peer-to-peer or remote I/O control
Easy set-up, no programming needed
Strong diagnostics built into the network
interface, PLC CPU and programming software
Up to 16 k words of data per network
Maximum transmission speed 50 Mbps
(SI fibre only, full duplex communication)
Maximum transmission distance for single
network, 30 km fibre loop or 500 m coaxial
Master
Normal/Standby
Remote Modular I/O
Model type
Series
Q series
Master/local
AnS
Q series
Slave I/O
QnAS
24
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:01
Module
Description
QJ71BR11
MELSECNET/H master/local, coaxial cable
127592
QJ71LP21GE
MELSECNET/H master/local, GI 62.5/125 fibre optic cable
138959
QJ71LP21-25
MELSECNET/H master/local, SI fibre optic cable
136391
A1SJ71LP21GE
MELSECNET/10 master/local, GI 62.5/125 fibre optic cable
53457
A1SJ71LP21
MELSECNET/10 master/local, SI fibre optic cable
47868
A1SJ71BR11
MELSECNET/10 master/local, coaxial cable
47869
A1SJ71QBR11
Q2AS MELSECNET/10 master/local, coaxial cable
66540
A1SJ71QLP21GE
Q2AS MELSECNET/10 master/local, GI 62.5/125 fibre-optic cable
87152
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H remote I/O controller, SI fibre optic cable
136392
QJ72BR15
MELSECNET/H remote I/O controller, coaxial cable
136393
A1SJ72QBR15
QnAS MELSECNET/10 remote I/O controller, coaxial cable
68450
A1SJ72QLP25
QnAS MELSECNET/10 remote I/O controller, SI fibre-optic cable
68449
Art. no.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
CANopen
CANopen is an "open" implementation of
the Controller Area Network (CAN), which is
defined in the EN50325-4 standard. It was
developed by members of the CAN in Automation international users and manufacturers
group. The CANopen application layer defines a
range of communications services and protocols (e.g. process and service data) and a network management system.
Frequency inverter
FX family PLC
A CANopen bus system has a linear structure to
which up to 127 bus stations can be connected.
Multiple master stations can be connected to a
single bus. The ends of the linear bus are terminated with resistors. Total network length can
be up to 40 m at a data transfer rate of 1 Mbit/s.
Lowering the data rate makes it possible to
increase the length of the bus. For example,
a transfer rate of 125 kBit/s allows a bus length
of 500 m. This can be increased to a maximum
of 5,000 m with the help of repeaters
(at 10kBit/s).
NETWORKS
CANopen networks are used for connecting
sensors, actuators and controllers in industrial
control systems, medical equipment, maritime
electronics, railways, trams and commercial
vehicles.
CANopen
Frequency inverter
Model type
Series
Module
Description
Local
FX
FX2N-32CAN
Communications module for CANopen
141179
OI-FR-A5NCO
Communications board for FR-A500 series inverter
139377
OI-FR-E5NCO
Communications board for FR-E500 series inverter
139378
FR-A7NCA
Communications board for FR-A700 series inverter
191424
Slave
Inverter
Art. no.
MODBUS
The Modbus protocol is a messaging structure
which is used to establish master-slave/clientserver communication between intelligent
devices. It is a de facto standard, truly open and
a widely used network protocol in the industrial
manufacturing environment.
Master station
HMI
Third party PLC
Modbus allows communication between many
devices connected to the same network, for
example a system that measures temperature
and humidity and communicates the results to
a PC. Modbus is often used to connect a supervisory computer with a remote terminal unit
(RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition systems (SCADA). Versions of the Modbus
protocol exist for serial port and Ethernet.
Modbus RTU is a compact, binary representation of the data.
Third party PLC
Remote I/O
Model type
Series
Q series
Master/Slave
FX
Slave
AnS
Breaker
MELSEC System Q
Module
Description
Art. no.
QJ71MB91
Serial MODBUS interface master/slave module
167757
QJ71MT91
MODBUS / TCP interface master/slave module for Ethernet
155603
FX3U-232ADP-MB
Serial MODBUS RS232C interface master/slave module
165276
FX3U-485ADP-MB
Serial MODBUS RS485 interface master/slave module
165277
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
MODBUS slave interface module
54355
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
MODBUS slave interface module with RTU protocol
54354
BIF-MD-W
MODBUS interface for SUPER AE air circuit breakers
168573
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:03
Frequency inverter
25
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// NETWORKS
MODEMS for data communication
Pumps
Sensors
il
Ma
s
es
E-
pr
541034
Mitsubishi Alarm Modem GSM
mit2x Rs232 + 6 I/Os
10 - 30 V DC, max. 0.7 A
The ability to connect the modems directly
to any size controller provides a simple and
cost-effective remote maintenance solution
for small businesses, building management
or industrial application.
Heating/Air Condition
027954
NETWORKS
Mitsubishi modems are telecommunication
devices capable of performing remote maintenance and Internet communication tasks fully
automatically for any plant and equipment.
Contrasting with conventional modems,
a high-performance processor with large
storage capacity ensures that the complicated
communication protocols are transparent
to the user.
Antenna
Service
Machinery
The easy-to-use MX Alarm Editor software is
available to configure the intelligent alarm
modems. Configuration can be done locally
or remotely.
Data out
Line
Process
Power
+
COM1 (RS232)
COM2 (RS232)
Drives
Q61P-A2
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
POWER
6
7
8
9
A
C
E
COM
L
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
COM
24VDC
4mA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
L
L
RUN
ERROR
E
SMS
1
2 abc
4 ghi
5 jki
7 qprs
8 tuv
+ 0
def
3
mno 6
wxyz 9
#
RUN
T.PASS
SD
ERR.
MNG
D.LINK
RD
L ERR.
STATION NO.
X10
I+
SLD
3
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
C
VH
1
1
L
L
Ex
V+
L
L
2
3
4
5
F
NC
24VDC
4mA
L
1
2
3
D
USB
QJ71BR11
Q64AD
QY80
01234567
89ABCDEF
FUSE
01234567
89ABCDEF
01234567
89ABCDEF
1
B
PULL
RS-232
QX80
QX80
Q06HCPU
MELSEC
BASE UNIT
MODEL Q38B
SERIAL 0205020E0100017-A
il /
a
-M
Fa
x
Push
SIM-Card
-
Modem Mode
Remote
Maintenance
Remote Control
Alarm/
Notification
F
COM
12VDC
24VDC
0.5A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
X1
V+
C
VH
2
I+
SLD
V+
C
VH
3
I+
SLD
V+
C VH
4
I+
SLD
A.G.
(FG)
A/D
0~±10V
0~20mA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
MODE
QJ71BR11
MITSUBISHI
PLCs
Alarm modems MAM
027954
541034
Antenna
Service
Power
Process
Line
SIM-Card
-
+
COM2 (RS232)
Data out
Push
COM1 (RS232)
Modem Mode
Mitsubishi Alarm Modems are automatic
modems with large data storage, numerous
functions and integrated Internet technology.
As intelligent communication computers, they
have a 32 bit power CPU and 2 MB non-volatile
data storage (flash memory) which can be
extended up to 64 MB and therefore also provides sufficient space for larger data volumes in
the longer term.
Mitsubishi Alarm Modems independently
perform the following functions:
앬 Transmit alarm and status messages via SMS,
e-mail or fax
앬 Receive switch commands via SMS or e-mail
and pass these on to a PLC
앬 Transmit data to a connected controller/
system
앬 Exchange data between controllers
앬 Remote access to controllers or systems
via the PLC programming software
Specificatons
COM1
Interface
COM2
Type of network connection
Data transfer
Fax transmission
Power supply
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
Specificatons
COM1
Interface
COM2
Type of network connection
Data transfer
Fax transmission
Power supply
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
26
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:18
mm
Art. no.
The alarm modem communicates directly with
Mitsubishi controllers via their PLC protocol.
Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII are also supported. Convenient software programs based
on XML files enable simple configuration of the
required functions.
Based on the comprehensive functionality of
the Mitsubishi modems, diverse areas of application are possible, such as monitoring of temperatures, pressures, filling levels or the activation of motors, fans, pumps, slides and flaps.
Mitsubishi Alarm Modems can be integrated
into existing systems with minimum effort.
As a rule, no changes are required in the PLC
program.
Apart from suitable communication adapters
and cables, appropriate GSM antennae are also
available.
MAM-GM6
MAM-GM20
RS232
RS232
—
RS232
GSM/GPRSClass 10, Dual Band 900/1800 MHz
300 bps – 14.4 kbps async., transparent/not transparent
Fax Group 3 / Class 1 and 2; 2400 bps – 14.4 kbps
10 – 30 V DC, 0.7 A maximum
88 x 58 x 91
MAM-GM24
RS232
RS485/422
163275
163277
163276
MAM-AM6
MAM-AM20
RS232
RS232
—
RS232
Analogue telephone connection (a/b interface), RJ11
300 bps–56 kbps,
Fax Group 3 / Class 1; 2400 bps – 14.4 kbps
10 – 30 V DC, 0.7 A maximum
88 x 58 x 91
MAM-AM24
RS232
RS485/422
163283
163274
163284
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
NETWORKS ///
Industrial modems MIM
Normal modems GSM (MIM-G01)
The MIM-G01 is a GSM/GPRS mobile radio
modem to transmit data, SMS messages,
e-mails and fax messages in the 900 MHz and
1800 MHz GSM mobile radio network and supports the GPRS standard Class 10 high speeds.
It is designed for installation in switchgear cabinets with DIN rails.
The GSM Mitsubishi normal modem requires a
SIM card and logs onto the mobile radio network like a mobile phone. The compact control
Mitsubishi Alpha2 is able to send the display
content as an SMS via this modem and a special
Specificatons
Telephone network
Type of network connection
Data transfer
Fax transmission
Power supply
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
NETWORKS
Status GSM
function module, or to send e-mails. The normal modem has no storage for user data and no
automatic functions. It can also be used for
remote access to PLC systems.
MIM-G01
GSM
GSM/GPRS, Dual Band, 900/1800 MHz
300 – 14,4 kbps async., transparent/not transparent
Fax Group 3 / Class 1 and 2; 2400 bps – 14.4 kbps
10 – 40 V DC, 0.7 A maximum
88 x 58 x 91
163286
Super modem 56k (MIM-A01)
The MIM-A01 is a 56k modem for transmitting
data, SMS messages, e-mails and fax messages
via analogue fixed telephone network. It is
designed for installation in switchgear cabinets
with DIN rails.
SUPER MODEM
Power
Line
The super modem 56k is an 11-bit industrial
modem with some storage for user data, with
the traditional modem functions and capable of
sending messages via fixed network, controlled
via simple AT commands. The modem is
equipped with the following functions:
앬 SMS via fixed and mobile networks
앬 Express e-mail without Internet, i.e. e-mail
directly via telephone line; in this way, controllers can, for instance, also interchange
data
앬 Sending and retrieving e-mail via Internet
(SMTP/POP3)
앬 Transmitting fax text messages to fax
machines
Specificatons
Telephone network
Type of network connection
Data transfer
Fax transmission
Power supply
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:24
mm
Art. no.
As other modems, the Mitsubishi normal
modem GSM requires PC software for message
communication, such as RDT or a fax program.
Mitsubishi super modems, on the other hand,
can also transmit the above message types via
simple AT commands; special PC software is not
required.
MIM-A01
Analogue fixed network/56
Analogue telephone connection (a/b interface), RJ11
300 bps – 56 kbps
Fax Group 3 / Class 1; 2400 bps – 14.4 kbps
10 – 30 V DC, 0.7 A maximum
88 x 58 x 91
163285
27
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
MODULAR PLCs
System Q has been designed to be at the heart
of your manufacturing process, as it is at the
heart of Mitsubishi's component automation
concept. It offers you total integration of your
control and communication needs from a
single platform - connecting your automation
with your business needs.
앬
앬
앬
앬
Communication- is a communication hub
connecting to fieldbus or data networks
including 100 Mbps ethernet
Scalability- offers Multi CPU solutions on a
single backplane
Flexibility- solutions can combine 4 CPU
types as a seamless solution; PLC, Motion,
PC and Process CPUs
앬
앬
Visualisation- integrates your business data to
whatever level and function you need, from
HMI, Soft HMI through to SCADA and OPC
World Wide Web- via webserver gives
Internet service without the need for a PC
Redundancy options ranging from full
redundant PLC hardware to redundant
network options improve uptime and
productivity
Equipment Features
MODULAR PLCs
The modular design of MELSEC System Q allows
flexible usage in a broad range of applications.
The following modules are available for
assembling the system:
Use of digital and special function modules
To maximize the operational safety, all modules
are isolated electrically by means of
optocouplers.
The use of digital and analog modules and most
special function modules is dependent only on
the maximum available number of addresses
and thus on the CPU used in each case.
Digital input/output modules
Pulse catch and interrupt modules
For various signal levels with transistor,
relay or triac switches
Digital input modules for pulse storage
and for processing subroutines
DIGITAL
I/Os
PULSE
CATCH
AND
INTERRUPT
MODULES
Communications modules
Interface modules with RS232/RS422/
RS485 interface for connection of
peripherals or for PLC-PLC communication.
PC/C
CPU
Process
Analog input/output modules
ANALOG
INPUTS/
OUTPUTS
Motion
CPU
For processing current/voltage
signals and for temperature value
acquisition as well as temperature
control with direct connection of
Pt100 resistance thermometers or
thermocouples
Redundancy
PLC
CPU
COMMUNICATIONS
MODULES
POSITIONING
MODULES
Network modules
For interfacing with Ethernet, CC-Link,
Profibus, DeviceNet, AS-Interface and
MELSEC networks.
Positioning modules
High-speed counter modules with possibility for connection of incremental shaft
encoder or multiaxial positioning modules
for servo and step drives with up to 8 axes
per module.
Migration from AnS to System Q
The Q Series is able to apply automation solutions at a higher level and offers a higher level
of integration with other automation components. It will also change the way maintenance
is carried out by the system initiating the communication by means of text message or email.
This means that regular updates or any alarms
that are triggered can be sent directly to the
members of staff who deal with the maintenance of the PLC. AnS and other systems will
not be made redundant as connection with
existing systems is part of the System Q concept. There are also less CPUs to choose from
compared to previous series, which means
picking the correct CPU for the job is made a lot
simpler.
When upgrading from a AnS system to
System Q the part naming system is simple.
It is a matter of exchanging the AnS prefix and
replacing it with a Q for example.
A1SX80 Þ QX80
The table below shows which Q CPU's correspond to the AnS CPU's
AnS CPU type
A1SJH
A1SH
A2SH
A2SH-S1
Q2AS
Q2AS-S1
Q CPU type
Q00J
Q00
Q01
Q02
Q02H
Q06H
Performance
Q25H
QnH
mQ
ste
Sy
Qn
A2SH
-S1
Q00J
A2SH
A1SJH
A1SH
es
eri
SS
An
Functionality
28
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:31
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MODULAR PLCS ///
What a System looks like
Digital I/O module Special function module
CPU
Q06HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
Power supply
module
QD75P4
QX80
RUN
01234567
89ABCDEF
ERR.
Protective
cover for
removable
terminal block
AX3
AX4
1
Network module
QJ71E71-100
RUN
INT.
OPEN
SD
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
ERR.
COM ERR.
100M
RD
AX1
AX2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
PULL
C
D
USB
E
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10BASE-T/100BASE-T
X
F
MELSEC
POWER
NC
Q61P-A2
COM
24VDC
4mA
RS-232
MODULAR PLCs
QJ71E71-100
PULL
MITSUBISHI
EJECT
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
CPU
POWER
I / 00
I / 01
BOOT.
I / 02
I / 04
I / 03
I / 05
I / 06
I / 07
Q38B(N)
E.S.D
ON SW
1
C
A
R
D
2
3
4
5
STOP
BASE UNIT
MODEL Q38B
-A
SERIAL 0205020E0100017
RESET
RUN
L.CLR
Interface for
extension unit
(under the transparent cover)
Base unit
RS232 interface
2M
MITSUBISHI
FLASH
CARD
INSERT
USB interface
Backup battery
(slot on the lower side)
Memory card
System structure
The CPU and modules are connected to a base
unit which has an internal bus connection for
communication between the individual modules and the CPUs. The power supply module
which supplies the voltage for the entire system
is also installed on this base unit.
Each base unit can be supplemented by means
of an extension unit providing additional slots.
If you wish to keep open the option of subsequent extension of your PLC or if you have free
slots on your base unit, you can insert dummy
modules in vacant module positions.
They serve to protect the free slots from soiling
or from mechanical effects and can also be used
for reserving I/O points.
For cabling larger systems and machines - e.g. in
a modular design - the use of remote I/O modules offers additional communications facilities.
The base units are available in 4 different versions with 3 to 12 module slots.
What you need
Base units
The base unit is for mounting and connecting all
modules and provides power and communication buses between modules. There is a minimum of one base unit per system but extension
base units can be added, with or without power
supply modules up to a maximum of 7 extension
bases (depending on CPU model).
Power supply
This provides 5 V DC power for all modules on
the back plane. There are several types of power
supplies available, the selection is dependant on
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:40
each individual modules power consumption
and available supply voltage. You can only use
one power supply per backplane.
from 50 (in previous series) to 8, which allows
easier selection of the correct CPU type.
CPU
There is a wide selection of digital input and output modules depending on the signal level, sink
or source designation, density of points required
and support for AC or DC voltage. Modules are
available in 16 point input or output with screw
terminals mounted on the module, higher densities of 32 and 64 point require a connector,
cable and terminal block
There are two main types of CPU, basic models
(Q00JCPU up to Q01CPU) and advanced models
(Q02CPU up to Q25HCPU). Upto 4 CPUs can be
used in a single system, which allows a wide
range of combinations for optimal system performance. To make selecting a CPU type easier,
the number of CPU types has been reduced
I/O
29
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
Base Units
Main base units
POWER
CPU
I / 04
I / 03
I / 02
I / 01
I / 00
I / 05
I / 06
The main base unit is used for mounting
and connecting CPUs, power supply unit,
input modules, output modules and special function modules.
I / 07
Q38B(N)
E.S.D
BASE UNIT
MODEL Q38B
SERIAL 0205020E0100017-A
앬
앬
The modules are automatically
addressed
The units are mounted by means of
screws or on a profiled rail with an
integrated adapter
Extension base units
I / 00
CPU
POWER
I / 01
I / 02
I / 03
I / 04
I / 05
I / 06
The extension base units are connected to
the main base unit by means of
pre-assembled bus cables.
앬 Q6*B extension units provide a slot for
their own power supply module
Q38B(N)
E.S.D
POWER
MODULAR PLCs
BASE UNIT
MOD EL Q38B
SERIAL 0205020E 0100017-A
Specifications
Slots for I/O modules
Slots for power supply modules
Installation
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
Accessories
앬
A total of max.7 extension units can be
connected to a main base unit with up
to 64 I/O modules for a single system
앬 The maximum distance from the first
to the last base unit is 13.2 m
An extension base unit with a power supply module must be used in the following cases:
앬 If the power consumption of the
inserted modules exceeds the
capacity of the power supply module
on the base unit
앬 If the voltage drops below 4.75 V
between the base unit and the
extension unit
Main Base Unit
Q33B-E
Q35B-E
Q38B-E
Q38RB-E
Q312B-E
3
5
8
8
12
1
1
1
2
1
All base units provide an installation hole Ø 5 mm and M4 screws.
189 x 98 x 44.1 245 x 98 x 44.1 328 x 98 x 44.1 439 x 98 x 44.1 439 x 98 x 44.1
Extension Base Unit
Q52B
Q55B
Q63B
Q65B
Q68B
2
5
3
5
8
—
—
1
1
1
All base units provide an installation hole Ø 5 mm and M4 screws.
106 x 98 x 44.1 189 x 98 x 44.1 189 x 98 x 44.1 245 x 98 x 44.1 328 x 98 x 44.1
136369
140376
127586
127624
157573
129566
140377
136370
129572
129578
Q68RB
8
2
Q612B
12
1
439 x 98 x 44.1 439 x 98 x 44.1
157066
129579
Connection cables, adapter for DIN rail mounting
Power Supply Modules
These units power all the modules on the
backplane. The choice is dependent on
the power consumption of the individual
modules (this is especially important
when using multiple CPUs).
MELSEC
Q61P-A2
POWER
앬
앬
앬
LED indicator shows operating status
Use Q63P for applications powered by
24 V DC
The power supply module Q62P can
be used world-wide with it's wide
input range from 100 to 240 V AC at
50/60 Hz
MITSUBISHI
Specifications
Q61P-A1
V AC 100 – 120
Input voltage
V DC —
Input frequency
Hz 50 / 60 (±5 %)
Inrush current
20 A within 8 ms
Max.input apparent power
105 VA
5 V DC
A 6
Rated output current
24 V DC ±10 %
A —
5 V DC
A ³ 6.6
Overcurrent protection
24 V DC
A —
Overvoltage protection
5 V DC
V 5.5 – 6.5
Efficiency
³ 70 %
between primary and 5 V DC
2830 V AC, 1 min.
Insulation withstand voltage
between primary and 24 V DC —
Max.compensation time at power failure
ms 20
Dimensions (WxHxD)
mm 55.2 x 98 x 90
Q61P-A2
200 – 240
—
50 / 60 (±5 %)
20 A within 8 ms
105 VA
6
—
³ 6.6
—
5.5 – 6.5
³ 70 %
2830 V AC, 1 min.
—
20
55.2 x 98 x 90
Q62P
100 – 240
—
50 / 60 (±5 %)
20 A within 8 ms
105 VA
3
0.6
³ 3.3
³ 0.66
5.5 – 6.5
³ 65 %
2830 V AC, 1 min.
2830 V AC, 1 min.
20
55.2 x 98 x 90
Q63P
—
24
—
81 A within 1 ms
45 W
6
—
³ 5.5
—
5.5 – 6.5
³ 70 %
500 V AC, 1 min.
—
10
55.2 x 98 x 90
Q63RP
—
24
—
150 A within 1 ms
65 W
8.5
—
³ 5.5
—
5.5 – 6.5
³ 65 %
500 V AC, 1 min.
—
10
83 x 98 x 115
Q64P
100 – 240
—
50 / 60 (±5 %)
20 A within1 ms
160 VA
8.5
—
³ 14.4
—
5.5 – 6.5
³ 70 %
2830 V AC, 1 min.
—
20
55.2x98x115
Q64RP
100 – 240
—
50 / 60 (±5 %)
20 A within1 ms
160 VA
8.5
—
³ 14.4
—
5.5 – 6.5
³ 65 %
2830 V AC, 1 min.
—
20
83 x 98 x 115
Order information
127593
140379
136371
166091
140718
157065
(+10 %, -15 %)
(+30 %, -35 %)
30
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:51
Art.no. 129564
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MODULAR PLCS ///
PLC CPU Modules
The CPU modules of the MELSEC System Q are available as single and multi processor CPUs through
which they achieve a wide application range. The performance of the controller can match the
application by simply replacing the CPU (except Q00J).
Q00CPU
Basic PLC CPUs
MODE
RUN
While Q00CPU and Q01CPU are separate CPUs,
the Q00JCPU forms an inseparable unit consisting of CPU, power supply and base unit and
thus enables a low-priced entry into the modular PLC technology.
These CPUs were developed especially for applications where compact system configuration is
important.
PULL
앬
앬
앬
Every CPU is equipped with an RS232C
interface for easy programming and monitoring from a personal computer or operating
panel.
Integrated Flash ROMs for memory operation
without additional memory cards
Processing the inputs and outputs with
refresh mode for optimal response
Specifications
Type
I/O device points
CPU self-diagnostic functions
Battery buffer
Memory type
overall
Memory
capacity
max. for PLC program
Program cycle period
No.of instructions
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
MODULAR PLCs
RS-232
Q00JCPU-E
Q00CPU
Q01CPU
Combination of CPU module (single processor),
CPU module (single processor)
CPU module (single processor)
5 slot base unit and power supply
256/2048
1024/2048
1024/2048
CPU error detection, Watch Dog, battery error detection, memory error detection, program check, power supply error detection, fuse error detection
All CPU modules are fitted with a lithium-battery with a life expectancy of 5 years.
ROM
RAM, ROM
RAM, ROM
58 kByte
94 kByte
94 kByte
8 k steps (32 kByte)
8 k steps (32 kByte)
14 k steps (56 kByte)
0.20 ms/log. instruction
0.16 ms/log. instruction
0.10 ms/log. instruction
318
327
327
245 x 98 x 98
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
Art.no. 140378
138323
138324
High-performance PLC CPUs
With the high-performance CPUs fast processing speed and expandability are the key features. Flexible system configuration that suits a
wide range of applications is possible due to a
varied set of functions and a well designed programming, configuration and debugging environment.
Q06HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
In total five different high-performance CPUs
with graded performance are available for the
MELSEC System Q. All versions are upwardly
compatible. Thus, the MELSEC System Q can
grow with the application by changing the CPU.
PULL
USB
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Q02HCPU and upwatds are equipped with a
USB interface for easy programming and
monitoring from a personal computer
Processing the inputs and outputs with
refresh mode for optimal response
Floating point arithmetic according to
IEEE 754
Special statements for processing PID control
loops
Mathematical functions, such as angle/exponential functions and logarithm
RS-232
Specifications
Q02CPU
Type
Multi processor CPU module
I/O points
4096/8192
CPU self-diagnostic functions
CPU error detection, Watch Dog, battery error detection, memory error detection, program check, power supply error detection, fuse error detection
Battery buffer
All CPU modules are fitted with a lithium-battery with a life expectancy of 5 years.
Memory type
Memory
capacity
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
4096/8192
4096/8192
4096/8192
4096/8192
RAM, ROM, FLASH
RAM, ROM, FLASH
RAM, ROM, FLASH
RAM, ROM, FLASH
RAM, ROM, FLASH
overall
£ 32 MByte
£ 32 MByte
£ 32 MByte
£ 32 MByte
£ 32 MByte
max. for
PLC program
28 k steps
(112 kByte)
28 k steps
(112 kByte)
60 k steps
(240 kByte)
124 k steps
(496 kByte)
252 k steps
(1008 kByte)
79 ns/
log. instruction
34 ns/
log. instruction
34 ns/
log. instruction
34 ns/
log. instruction
34 ns/
log. instruction
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
127585
130216
130217
130218
Program cycle period
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art.no. 132561
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:17:57
31
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
The System Q process CPU allows flexible system design based on off-the-shelf components,
which reduces both initial and implementation
costs. Using either PX Developer / GX Developer
or GX IEC Developer, process applications can be
designed, debugged, monitored and maintained. The MELSEC Process Control system is
best suited for food manufacturing and chemical plant applications, where liquid or solid
materials are stored in a tank and a level must be
maintained within a specific range. The Process
CPU combines DCS functions with PLC
operability into one compact module.
Q12PHCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
PULL
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
USB
앬
Simplified control and engineering
Extensive Loop control
High-speed Loop control
Improved reliability and serviceability
Hot-swap module replacement in run mode
Works with MELSECNET/H for
multiplex remote I/O system
Loop Control and sequence control with
one CPU
Utilisation and expandability
Use with isolated analog modules, ideal for
process control
Smoothed analog input value
MODULAR PLCs
RS-232
Specifications
Type
I/O points
CPU self-diagnostic functions
Battery buffer
Memory type
overall
Memory
capacity
max. for PLC program
Program cycle period
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Process CPU module
4096/8192
4096/8192
CPU error detection, Watch Dog, battery error detection, memory error detection, program check, power supply error detection, fuse error detection
All CPU modules are fitted with a lithium-battery with a life expectancy of 5 years.
RAM, ROM, FLASH
RAM, ROM, FLASH
£ 32 MByte
£ 32 MByte
124 k steps (496 kByte)
252 k steps (1008 kByte)
34 ns/log. instruction
34 ns/log. instruction
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
27.4 x 98 x 89.3
143529
143530
Redundant PLC CPU Modules
Two PLC systems with the same configuration
can provide a hot standby system through automatic synchronisation of data. This is the key to
a redundant system and high availability. Down
time and costs for re-starting are also dramatically reduced. The higher hardware costs for a
redundant system are negligible when compared to the reduced costs in case of an error.
Q25PRHCPU
MODE
RUN
BACKUP
CONTROL
ERR.
SYSTEM A
USER
SYSTEM B
BAT.
BOOT.
TRACKING
If the control system fails, the standby system
takes over without interruption of the process.
The modular concept allows different stages of
redundancy: Redundant power supply, redundant control systems, redundant network modules.
PULL
USB
RS-232
Specifications
Type
I/O points
CPU self-diagnostic functions
Battery buffer
Memory type
overall
Memory
capacity
max. for PLC program
Program cycle period
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
32
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:03
mm
Art. no.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
A redundant system with QnPRH consists
mainly of standard components. Existing
hardware can be used.
Embedding is possible in existing and non
redundant applications
Short system switching time can be set by
parameters (min. 22 ms, 48 k words)
Can be programmed like a standard system,
no special software required
Automatic detection of the control system
with MX-Components/MX-OPC Server.
The I/O-level can be connected via
MELSECNET/H network (redundant ring),
CC-Link or Profibus. The availability of these
networks can be increased by using redundant master modules .
Q12PRHCPU
Q25PRHCPU
Process CPU module, redundant
4096/8192
4096/8192
CPU error detection, Watch Dog, battery error detection, memory error detection, program check, power supply error detection, data tracking
All CPU modules are fitted with a lithium-battery with a life expectancy of 5 years.
RAM, ROM, FLASH
RAM, ROM, FLASH
£ 32 MByte
£ 32 MByte
124 k steps (496 kByte)
252 k steps (1008 kByte)
34 ns/log. instruction
34 ns/log. instruction
52.2 x 98 x 89.3
52.2 x 98 x 89.3
157070
157071
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MODULAR PLCS ///
The high-speed dynamic motion CPU
Q173CPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
M.RUN
BAT.
BOOT
FRONT
SSCNET
The motion controller CPU controls and synchronises the connected servo amplifiers and
servo motors. A motion system requires a
motion controller CPU, and a PLC CPU.
앬
In this configuration the Motion CPU controls
large-scale servo movements the PLC CPU is
responsible for the machine control and the
communication.
앬
앬
앬
앬
CN2
앬
CN1
PULL
앬
USB
Using multiple CPU’s to distribute the load
improves the overall performance of the
whole system
Use of up to 3 motion CPU’s within one system
Large scale control system for up to
96 axes per system
Interpolation of 4 axes simultaneously
Software cam control
Virtual and real master axes
Integration in the high-speed SSCNET network for communication with high-performance servo amplifiers at up to 5.6 Mbit/s
Specifications
Type
I/O points
Interpolation functions
Programming language
Interfaces
Real I/O points (PX/PY)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm
Order information
Art. no.
Q172CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q172HCPU-T
Q173CPUN
Motion CPU
8192; 8
8192; 8
8192; 8
8192; 32
Linear interpolation for up to 4 axes, circular interpolation for 2 axes, helical interpolation for 3 axes
Motion SFC, dedicated instructions, software for conveyor assembly (SV13), virtual mechanical support language (SV22)
USB, RS232C, SSCNET,
USB, RS232C, SSCNET
USB, RS232C, SSCNET
USB, RS232C, SSCNET
Teaching Unit
256 (these I/Os can be allocated directly to the motion CPU)
27,4 x 98 x 114,3
27,4 x 98 x 114,3
27,4 x 98 x 114,3
27,4 x 98 x 114,3
142695
162417
162419
142696
Q173HCPU
Q173HCPU-T
8192; 32
8192; 32
USB, RS232C, SSCNET
USB, RS232C, SSCNET,
Teaching Unit
27,4 x 98 x 114,3
27,4 x 98 x 114,3
162696
162416
MODULAR PLCs
RS-232
Q-PC Modules
The personal computer for the base unit
PPC-CPU852
KB/MOUSE
RDY
B.
RUN
ERR.
USER
PC-CARD
1
2
EXIT
BAT.
B.
RUN
B.RST
SERIAL 1
RESET
USB
EX.I/F
100
RGB
The PC CPU module is a compact personal computer which can be installed on the main base
unit for PC typical applications as well as PLC
applications. Therefore, it is suitable as an integrated PC within control systems - e.g. for visualization, data bases, log-trace functions, Microsoft
applications or for programming the System Q
in a high-level language. In addition, the system
can be controlled as soft PLC according to
IEC 1131.3 via the optional SX-Controller
software. I/O and special function modules
from the MELSEC System Q can be used in
the same way as MELSEC System Q CPUs.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Low power consumption
Intel CPU (600 MHz) allows processing of
large data volumes
Windows 2000 operating system supported
(XP versions available on request)
Silicon disk units available for applications
that are subject to vibration and shock
Outstanding noise immunity
Fan-less operation and suitable for
clean-room applications
Control of a complete system in a high- level
language such as C++ or Visual Basic
LINK
/TX
UPT
IDE
FD
Specifications
Type
CPU
Processing frequency
Memory
Video
serial (RS232C)
parallel
USB
Interfaces
keyboard/mouse
LAN
monitor
Connections for drives
PC card slots
No. of occupied I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Accessories
MHz
mm
PPC-CPU 852(MS)-128
Personal Computer CPU
Ultra low voltage IntelÒ CelereonÒ M processor (FSB 400 MHz)
600
512 MB (main), 2 x 32 kB L1, 1 x 512 kB L2
Integrated graphics board for a maximum resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels and 16 Mio. colours
2 (1 integrated 9-pin D-SUB connector and 1 optional interface at the extension box which is connnected to "EX I/F")
1
4 (3 x USB 2.0 compliant at front and bottom, 1 x optional USB1.1 interface at the extension box which is connnected to "EX I/F" )
1 x PS/2 connector (keyboard and mouse can be used at the same time with the conversion cable PPC-YCAB-01.)
1 x ETHERNET interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
1 x 15-pin HD-SUB
1 x disk drive, 2 x hard disk (silicon hard disks are supported)
2 x PCMCIA, CardBus
4096/8192
55.2 x 98 x 115
PPC-SET-Nil
Art. no.: 207875 Set with 1 x PC CPU modul; 512 MB RAM, no hard disk, driver PPC-DRV-02, without OS
PPC-SET-Win
Art. no.: 207876 Set with 1 x PC CPU modul; 512 MB RAM, 20 GB hard disk, driver PPC-DRV-02, OS Windows 2000 Pro
PPC-SET-WinXPpro Art. no.: 207877 Set with 1 x PC CPU module; 512 MB RAM, 20 GB hard disk, driver PPC-DRV-02, operating system Win XPpro pre-installed
PPC-SET-WinXPemb Art. no.: 207878 Set with 1 x PC CPU module; 512 MB RAM, 20 GB hard disk, driver PPC-DRV-02, operating system Win XP embedded pre-installed on CF card
Additional hard disks (refer to next page; Soft PLC for theQ PC CPU: SX-Controller for Windows NT/2000 without realtimeenvironment (SX-Controller V0100-1LOC-E, art. no.: 144006)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:11
33
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
Disk Drives for Q-PC
Memory units
Two different disk drives are available for the
Q-PC that can be mounted additionally on the
base unit directly beside the CPU module. The
connection to the CPU is established via a short
cable link underneath the modules. Besides a
PPC-HHD
CONTEC
conventional hard disk with a storage capacity
of 20 GB, a 1 GB CF card is also available for use
in applications subject to strong vibrations or
shocks.
ACCESS
EX.IDE
S.
M.
MODULAR PLCs
IDE
Specifications
Type
Memory capacity
Order information
Art. no.
Accessories
PPC-HDD
Hard disk
20 GB
PPC-CF-1GB-R
CF card
1 GB
207879
207880
Hard disk vibration protection PPC-HBR-01; art. no.:140126
Q-C Controller CPU
High-level language programming in
combination with real time operating system
Q06CCPU-V-HQ1
The C-Controller allows the integration and
programming of the System Q automation
platform with C++. Using the worldwide established real time operating system VxWorks, the
realisation of complex tasks, communication
and protocols becomes very easy.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Specifications
Memory
Operating system
Programming language
Development tool
Communication interfaces
CF card I/F
Number of I/O points
5 V DC internal current consumption
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
34
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:17
A
mm
Art. no.
Integration in a multi CPU - System Q or use
as a stand alone system.
Dedicated development environment for
C language using "Tornado" by Wind River
Systems
1 GB Compact Flash card makes handling for
large quantities of data easy
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
High performance addition to the existing
range of automation products
Ethernet and RS-232 interface on board
Real time OS VxWorks and Telnet
pre-installed
Standard C/C++ Code can be embedded
Remote access via networks and support of
FTP
VxWorks communication library and QBF
libraries for easy setup
CoDeSys compatibility
Q06CCPU-V-H01
Standard ROM: 16 MB (user area: 6 MB); Work RAM: 32 MB (user area: 14 MB); Battery-backed-up RAM: 128 kB
VxWorks Version 5.4
C or C++, CoDeSys
Tornado 2.1 (OS license must be obtained separately from Wind River Systems Alameda, CA, USA), CoDeSys
RS232 (1 ch.), 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (1 ch.)
1 slot for a TYPE I card (Max. 1 GB CF card is supported)
4096 (X/Y0 to X/YFFF)
0.71
27.4 x 98 x 89.3 (Standard CPU size)
165353
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MODULAR PLCS ///
Digital Input/Output Modules
QX10
01234567
89ABCDEF
Input module - Detection of process
signals
Output module - Adapted output
technology
Various input modules are available for
converting digital process signals with different voltage levels into the
levels required by the PLC.
The MELSEC System Q output modules have different
switching elements for adaptation to many control
tasks.
앬
0
앬
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM
NC
100VDC
8mA60Hz
7mA50Hz
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
앬
Output modules with relay, transistor or triac
switches
Potential isolation between process and control by
means of an optocoupler is a standard feature
Modules with potential isolation between the
channels
앬
앬
Special features (both):
앬
앬
앬
Modules with 16 connection points have removable terminal blocks with screws
Modules with 32/64 connection points are connected with a D-sub or 40-pin plug
Assembled cables are available for modules with D-sub plugs
MODULAR PLCs
3
Potential isolation between process and
control by means of an optocoupler is a
standard feature
Indication of input status via LED
Input Modules
Specifications
Input points
Rated input voltage
Operating voltage range
Rated input current
mA
voltage
current
voltage
current
ON
OFF
V
Load resistance
V
mA
V
mA
kW
Common terminal arrangement
Connection terminal
No. of occupied I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
QX10
16
100 – 120 V AC
(50/60 Hz)
85 – 132
QX28
8
100 – 240 V AC
(50/60 Hz)
85 – 264
7 (100VAC,50Hz),
7 (100VAC,50Hz), 8 (100VAC,60Hz),
8 (100VAC,60Hz) 14 (200VAC,50Hz),
17 (200VAC,60Hz)
³ AC 80
³ AC 80
³ AC 5
³ AC 5
£ AC 30
£ AC 30
£ AC 1
£ AC 1
ca. 18 (50 Hz)
ca. 15 (50 Hz)
ca. 15 (60 Hz)
ca. 12 (60 Hz)
16
8
18-point
18-point
removable
removable
terminal block
terminal block
16
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
ca. 5.6
ca. 5.6
ca. 5.6
ca. 11.2
ca. 5.6
ca. 5.6
ca. 5.6
16
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
32
32
32 x 2
40-pin
connector x 2
32
27.4 x 98 x 90
64
27.4 x 98 x 90
16
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
32
40-pin connector
16
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
32
27.4 x 98 x 90
64
27.4 x 98 x 90
129581
132572
132573
132574
204678
127587
129594
150837
136396
QX40
16
QX41
32
QX42
64
QX50
16
QX80
16
QX81
32
QX82-S1)
64
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
48 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
20.4 – 28.8
20.4 – 28.8
20.4 – 28.8
40.8 – 52.8
20.4 – 28.8
20.4 – 28.8
20.4 – 28.8
ca. 4
ca. 4
ca. 4
ca. 4
ca. 4
ca. 4
ca. 4
³ DC 19
³ DC 3
£ DC 11
£ DC 1.7
³ DC 19
³ DC 3
£ DC 11
£ DC 1.7
³ DC 19
³ DC 3
£ DC 11
£ DC 1.7
³ DC 28
³ DC 2.5
£ DC 10
£ DC 1.7
³ DC 19
³ DC 3
£ DC 11
£ DC 1.7
³ DC 19
³ DC 3
£ DC 11
£ DC 1.7
³ DC 19
³ DC 3
£ DC 9.5
£ DC 1.5
Compact connector 40-pin
37-pin D-Sub
connector x 2
Output Modules
Specifications
QY10
QY18A
QY22
QY40P
QY41P
QY42P
QY50
QY68A
QY80
QY81P
Outputs
16
8
16
16
32
64
16
8
16
32
Output type
Relay
Relay
Triac
Transistor
(sink type)
Transistor
(sink type)
Transistor
(sink type)
Transistor
(sink type)
Transistor
(sink/source
type)
Transistor
(source type)
Transistor
(source type)
16
18
16
16
32
32
16
All independent 16
Rated output voltage
24VDC/
240VAC
24 V DC /
240 V AC
100 – 240 V AC
12 / 24 V DC
(sink type)
12 / 24 V DC
(sink type)
12 / 24 V DC
(sink type)
12 / 24 V DC
(sink type)
Operating voltage range
—
—
—
10.2 – 28.8 V DC 10.2 – 28.8 V DC 10.2 – 28.8 V DC 10.2 – 28.8 V DC 4.5 – 28.8 V DC 10.2 – 28.8 V DC 10.2 – 28.8 V DC
Connection terminal
18-point removable terminal block
Common terminal arrangement
points
No. of occupied I/O points
Ext. power
supply req.
voltage
current
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Accessories
40-pin
connector x 2
18-point
removable
terminal block
18-point
removable
terminal block
18-point
removable
terminal block
32
12 / 24 V DC
(source type)
Compact
connector
37-pin D-Sub
16
16
16
16
32
64
16
16
16
32
—
—
—
12 – 24 V DC
12 – 24 V DC
12 – 24 V DC
12 – 24 V DC
—
12 – 24 V DC
12 – 24 V DC
mA
—
—
—
10 (24 V DC)
20 (24 V DC)
20 (24 V DC)
20 (24 V DC)
—
20 mA (24 V DC) 40 mA (24 V DC)
mm
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
129605
136401
136402
132575
132576
132577
132578
136403
127588
129607
Art. no.
40-pin connector and ready to use connection cables and system terminals ;
Spring clamp terminal block for exchange against the standard screw terminal block ;
IDC terminal block adapter for all 32 point I/O modules with 40-pin connector
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:22
40-pin
connector
5 – 24 V DC
12 / 24 V DC
(source type)
35
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
Analog Input Modules
Q64AD
Detection of analog process signals
Channel isolated and high resolution
The analog input modules convert analog
process signals, for example pressure, flow or
fill level, linearly into digital values, which are
further processed by the Q CPU.
The analog input modules Q62AD-DGH,
Q64AD-GH, Q66AD-DG and Q68AD-G convert analog process signals into digital values
with high accuracy . All channels are isolated
between each other and against the external
power supply with high dielectric withstand
voltage for both. This eliminates the need for
external isolation amplifiers.
RUN
ERROR
앬
V+
C
VH
1
I+
SLD
V+
C
VH
2
I+
SLD
V+
C
VH
3
I+
SLD
V+
C VH
4
I+
SLD
A.G.
(FG)
Q68AD-G
RUN
ALM
앬
ERR.
앬
Up to 8 channels per module (Q68AD첸)
and up to 512 channels per system (Q CPU)
Calculation of average value over the
time or measurement cycles can be configured
Potential isolation between process and
control by means of an optocoupler is a
standard feature
The Q66AD-DG additionally features the
embedded signal conditioning function, so
that signal converters for 2-wire transmitters are not needed.
앬
앬
MODULAR PLCs
A/D
0~±10V
0~20mA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Reduced cost for analog I/O that require
channel isolstion
Less space and wiring in the control
panel required
Input Modules
Specifications
Input points
Analog input
voltage
current
V
mA
voltage
current
voltage
current
MW
W
V
mA
Resolution
Load
resistance
Max. input
I/O characteristics
Max.
resolution
Q62AD-DGH
2
—
4 – 20
16 / 32 bits binary
(incl. sign)
—
250
—
±30
Q64AD-GH
4
-10 V – +10
0 – 20
16 bits binary
(incl. sign)
1
250
±15
±30
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
Q64AD
4
-10 V – +10
0 – 20
16 bits binary
(incl. sign)
1
250
±15
±30
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
1/4000, 1/12000,
1/16000;
1/4000, 1/8000,
1/12000
0.83mV
3.33mA
±0.4 % (0 – 55 °C),
±0.1 % (20 – 30 °C)
80 µs/channel
(+160 µs with temperature drift compensation)
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
145036
129615
143542
analog input
0 – 20 mA
digital output
1/ 32000, 1/64000
voltage input
current input
—
0.25mA
Overall accuracy
±0.05 %
Max. conversion time
10 ms/2 channels
Connection terminal
I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
36
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:30
mm
Art. no.
Q66AD-DG
6
—
0 – 20 / 4 – 20
16 bits binary
(incl. sign)
—
250
—
±30
0 – 20 mA
Q68AD-G
8
-10 – +10
0 – 20
16 bits binary
(incl. sign)
1
250
±15
±30
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
Q68ADV
8
-10 – +10
—
16 bits binary
(incl. sign)
1
250
±15
±30
Q68ADI
8
—
0 – 20
16 bits binary
(incl. sign)
—
250
—
±30
-10 – +10 V
0 – 20 mA
±1/ 32000, ±1/64000;
1/ 32000, 1/64000
1/4000, 1/12000
±1/ 4000;
±1/12000, ±1/ 16000
1/4000, 1/12000,
1/16000
1/4000, 1/8000,
1/12000
62.5 mV
0.25mA
—
1.33 mA
0.333 mV
1.33 mA
±0.05 %
±0.1 %
±0.1 %
10 ms/4 channels
10 ms/channel
10 ms/channel
40-pin
connector
40-pin
connector
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
1 mV
—
±0.4 % (0 – 55 °C),
±0.1 % (20 – 30 °C)
80 µs/channel
(+160 µs with temperature drift compensation)
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
—
0 – 20 mA/4 – 20 mA
±0.4 % (0 – 55 °C),
±0.1 % (20 – 30 °C)
80 µs/channel
(+160 µs with temperature drift compensation)
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
204676
204675
129616
129617
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MODULAR PLCS ///
Analog Output Modules
Q62DA
RUN
ERROR
Output of analog control signals
Channel isolated and high resolution
The analog output modules convert digital
values predetermined by the CPU into analog current or voltage signal. For example,
frequency inverters, valves or slide valves
are controlled by means of these signals.
The analog output module Q66DA-G converts a digital value into an analog voltage or
current signal with high accuracy . All channels are isolated between each other and
against the external power supply with high
dielectric withstand voltage for both. This
eliminates the need for external isolation
amplifiers.
V+
V+
C
COM
H
2
I+
IN 24VDC
COM
(FG)
D/A
0~±10V
0~20mA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Q66DA-G
RUN
앬
ALM
ERR.
앬
앬
앬
Up to 8 channels per module (Q68DAV)
and up to 512 channels per system
Resolution of 0.333 mV and 0.83 μA
Conversion time of 80 μs / channel
Potential isolation between process and
control by means of an optocoupler is a
standard feature
앬
앬
Reduced cost for analog I/O that require
channel isolstion
Less space and wiring in the control
panel required
DA modules with isolated external
power supply
The new analog output modules Q62DAN,
Q64DAN, Q68DAVN and Q68DAIN isolate
the analog output channel from the external power supply to ensure, that any power
fluctuations caused by external noise do
not disrupt the analog output.
앬
앬
Improved noise resistance
Improved safety on the strength of short
circuit protection caused by incorret wiring
Output Modules
Specifications
Output points
Digital input
Analog output
voltage output
current output
voltage
current
Load
resistance
Max.
output
analog output
I/O characteristics
digital input
Maximum
resolution
voltage output
current output
Overall accuracy
Max. concversion time
Connection terminal
I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Q62DAN
2
-16384 – +16383
-10 V DC – +10 V DC
(0 mA – +20 mA DC)
1 kW – 1 MW
0 – 600 W
V ±12
mA 21
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
±1/ 4000;
±1/12000, ±1/ 16000
0.333 mV
0.83 mA
±0.1 %
80 µs / channel
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
mm 27.4 x 98 x 90
Art. no.
200689
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:36
Q62DA-FG
2
-16384 – +16383
-10 V DC – +10 V DC
(0 mA – +20 mA DC)
1 kW – 1 MW
0 – 600 W
±13
23
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
±1/ 4000;
±1/12000, ±1/ 16000
0.183 mV
0.671 mA
±0.1 %
10 ms / 2 channels
18-point
removable
terminal block
Q66DA-G
6
-16384 – +16383
-12 V DC – +12 V DC
(0 mA – +22 mA DC)
1 kW – 1 MW
0 – 600 W
±13
23
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
±1/ 4000;
±1/12000, ±1/ 16000
0.210 mV
0.95 mA
±0.1 %
6 ms/channel
27.4 x 98 x 90
Q64DAN
4
-16384 – +16383
-10 V DC – +10 V DC
(0 mA – +20 mA DC)
1 kW – 1 MW
0 – 600 W
±12
21
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
±1/ 4000;
±1/12000, ±1/ 16000
0.333 mV
0.83 mA
±0.1 %
80 µs / channel
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
Q68DAVN
8
-16384 – +16383
Q68DAIN
8
-16384 – +16383
-10 V DC – +10 V DC
0 mA – +20 mA DC
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
1 kW – 1 MW
—
±12
—
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
±1/ 4000;
±1/12000, ±1/ 16000
0.333 mV
0.83 mA
±0.1 %
80 µs / channel
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
—
0 – 600 W
—
21
-10 – +10 V;
0 – 20 mA
±1/ 4000;
±1/12000, ±1/ 16000
0.333 mV
0.83 mA
±0.1 %
80 µs / channel
18-point
removable
terminal block
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
145037
200690
204677
200691
200692
40-pin
connector
37
MODULAR PLCs
C
COM
H
1
I+
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
Analog Modules for Temperature Measurement
Temperature measurement by
thermocouple
These modules are designed to convert external
platinum temperature-measuring resistor input
values into16 or 32-bit signed binary temperature measurement values and scaling values.
Q64RD
RUN
ERR.
a1
CH1
A1
b1
a2
CH2
A2
B2
b2
a3
CH3
A3
B3
b3
a3
CH4
A3
B3
b3
SLD
(FG)
Q64RD
MODULAR PLCs
The reference temperature is determined by
means of a thermocouple for the Q64TD and
Q64TDV-GH.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B1
앬
앬
Temperature of 4 channels can be measured
by one module
Two kinds of platinum temperature measuring resistors (Pt100, JPt100) compliant with
JIS and IEC standards are supported
Q64RD
4
type
Temperature measuring range
Temperature scaling value
Max. resolution
Cold junction temp. compensation accuracy
Max. conversion time
Analog inputs
Channel isolation
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Specifications
Input channels
Connectable thermocouple
앬
Q64RD-G
4
Pt100 (conf. JIS C 1604-1997 and DIN IEC
Pt100 (conf. JIS C 1604-1989 and DINIEC 751),
751-1983), JPt100 (conf. to JIS C 1604-1981),
JPt100 (conforms to JIS C 1604-1981)
Ni100W (conf. to DIN 43760-1987)
Pt100: -200 – 850 °C,
Pt100: -200 –850 °C, JPt 100: -180 –600 °C,
JPt 100: -180 – 600 °C
Ni100W: -60 –180 °C
16-bit, signed binary: -2.000 – +8.500
16-bit, signed binary: -2.000 – +8.500
32-bit, signed binary: -200.000 – +850.000 32-bit, signed binary: -200.000 – +850.000
Q64TD
4
K, E, J, T, B, R, S, N
(conf. to JIS C1602-1995, IEC 584-1
and 584-2)
Q64TDV-GH
4
K, E, J, T, B, R, S, N
(conf. to JIS C1602-1995, IEC 584-1
and 584-2)
Depends on the thermocouple used
Depends on the thermocouple used
16-bit, signed binary: -2.700 – +18.200
32-bit, signed binary: —
0.025 °C
0.025 °C
B, R, S, N: 0.3 °C; K, E, J, T: 0.1 °C
—
40 ms per channel
4 channels/module
—
27.4 x 98 x 112
±1.0 °C
20 ms / channel
4 channels/module + Pt100 connection
—
27.4 x 98 x 90
16-bit, signed binary: -25.000 – +25.000
32-bit, signed binary:
—
B: 0.7 °C; R, S: 0.8 °C, K, T: 0.3 °C; ET: 0.2 °C;
J: 0.1 °C; N: 0.4 °C; Voltage: 4 mV
±1.0 °C
20 ms / channel
4 channels/module + Pt100 connection
provided
27.4 x 98 x 90
154749
137591
143544
—
40 ms / channel
4 channels/module
—
mm 27.4 x 98 x 90
Art. no.
The disconnection of a platinum temperature-measuring resistor or cable can be
detected on each channel
Selection of sampling processing/time averaging processing/count averaging processing
Error compensation by offset/gain value setting
Alarm output when limit value is exceeded
Potential isolation between process and control by means of an optocoupler is a standard
feature. Additional potential isolation
between the channels for the Q64TDV-GH
The module is provided with a removable
terminal block fastened with screws
137592
Temperature Control Modules
Q64TCRT
RUN
ALM
Temperature control modules with
PID algorithm
앬
These modules enable PID algorithm temperature control without placing any load on the PLC
CPU for the temperature control tasks.
앬
Transistor output with pulse train to drive the
actuator in the control circuit
The module is provided with a removable terminal block fastened with screws.
ERR
앬
L1
L2
L3
L4
+
NC
A1
A2
B1
B2
b1
b2
A3
A4
B3
B4
b3
b4
Specifications
Control output
앬
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
앬
type
Inputs
Supported thermocouples
Sampling cycle
Control output cycle
Input filter
Temperature control method
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
38
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:44
s
mm
Art. no.
Four temperature input channels
Auto-tuning function for the 4 PID control
circuits
Temperature control can continue even when
the PLC program is stopped
Q64TCRT
Transistor
Q64TCRTBW
Transistor
4 channels per module /
4 channels per module
broken wire detection
Pt100 (-200 – +600 °C), JPt100 (-200 – +500 °C)
0.5 s / 4 channels
0.5 s / 4 channels
1 – 100
1 – 100
1 – 100 s (0 s: input filter OFF)
1 – 100 s (0 s: input filter OFF)
PID ON/OFF impulse or 2-position control
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
R, K, J, T, S, B, E, N, U, L, P L II, W5Re/W26Re
0.5 s / 4 channels
1 – 100
1 – 100 s (0 s: input filter OFF)
PID ON/OFF impulse or 2-position control
27.4 x 98 x 90
136386
136388
136387
Q64TCTT
Transistor
Q64TCTTBW
Transistor
4 channels per module /
broken wire detection
4 channels per module
0.5 s / 4 channels
1 – 100
1 – 100 s (0 s: input filter OFF)
27.4 x 98 x 90
136389
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MODULAR PLCS ///
Loop Control Module
For fast response control
ALM
RUN
ERR.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
앬
앬
앬
25 ms sampling and control update time
makes the Q62HLC to one of the fastest
in the industry
Specifications
Input points
Analog input
thermocouple
microvoltage
voltage
current
Digital output
Supported thermocouples
Conversion speed
No. of occupied I/O points
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Order information
°C
mV
V
mA
mm
Art. no.
앬
앬
Supports sensor types, such as thermocouple,
microvoltage, voltage and current input
ranges
Continous proportional PID control by 4 to
20 mA current output results in highly stable
and accurate control
Program control function can be specified
where set values and PID constants are automatically changed at specific times
Cascade control function can be performed
with channel 1 as the master and channel 2 as
the slave
Q62HLC
2 (2 channels)
-200 – +2300 (resolution 0.1 °C)
-100 – +100 (resolution 0.5 – 10 mV)
-10 – +10 (resolution 0.05 – 1 mV)
0 – 20 (resolution 0.8 – 1 mA)
-2000 – +23000, -10000 – +10000, -10000 – +10000, 0 – 20000
K, J, T, S, R, N, E, B, PL II, W5re/W26Re
25 ms / 2 channels
16
27.4 x 98 x 112
MODULAR PLCs
Q62HLC
The Q62HLC loop control module uses a continuous proportional PID control format, which features a sampling period of 25ms for high-accuracy, high-resolution thermocouple inputs,
microvoltage inputs, voltage inputs, current
inputs, and current outputs. These features
make the Q62HLC ideal for applications such as
rapid temperature increase control, pressure
control, and flow rate control.
200693
High-Speed Counter Modules
High-speed counter with automatic
detection of rotational direction
These counter modules detect high frequency
signals which cannot be handled by normal
input modules. For example, simple positioning
tasks or frequency measurements can be realised.
QD62E
ØA
ØB
DEC.
FUNC.
FUSE
CH1 CH2
앬
앬
Specifications
Counter inputs
Signal levels
Max. counting frequency
1-phase-input
Max. counting
speed
2-phase-input
kHz
kHz
kHz
Counting range
External digital input points
I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
QD62
2
5 / 12 / 24 V DC (2 – 5 mA)
200
200 or 100
200 or 100
32 bits + sign (binary),
-2147483648 – +2147483647
Preset, function start
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
Art. no. 132579
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:51
Input for incremental shaft encoder with
automatic forward and reverse detection
Preset count via external signals or the PLC
program with the aid of the PRESET function
앬
앬
앬
Ring counter function for counting up to a
predefined value with automatic resetting to
the starting value
Functions such as speed measurement, definition of switching points or periodic counting are available
40-pin connector interface
QD62E
2
5 / 12 / 24 V DC ( 2 – 5 mA)
200
200 or 100
200 or 100
32 bits + sign (binary),
-2147483648 – +2147483647
Preset, function start
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
QD62D
2
5 / 12 / 24 V DC ( 2 – 5 mA) (RS422A)
500 (differential)
500 or 200
500 or 200
32 bits + sign (binary),
-2147483648 – +2147483647
Preset, function start
16
27.4 x 98 x 90
QD60P8-G
8
5 / 12 / 24 V DC
30
30
—
16 bits binary: 0 –32767, 32 bit binary:
0 –99999999, 32 bit binary: 0 –2147483647
Preset, function start
32
27.4 x 98 x 90
128949
132580
145038
39
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
MELSEC System Q Web Server Module
QJ71WS96
The web server module QJ71WS96 enables the
remote control monitoring of System Q.
QJ71WS96
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Access to the PLC via the internet
Very easy setting functions integrated
User needs only a Web browser for setting
and monitoring.
RS232 interface for modem connection
Various connections for data exchange are
possible: ADSL, modem, LAN, etc.
앬
앬
앬
앬
Sending and receiving data via mail or FTP
Integration of a self-designed web site and
Java applets is possible
Standard connection via ETHERNET to
exchange data between other PLCs or PCs
Events and CPU data protocol, storage functions
SY.ENC2
MODULAR PLCs
Q172EX
Specifications
Module type
Communications method
Interface
interface
transfer type
synchronisations method
RS-232 commutransfer speed
nications data
transmission distance
data format
transfer control
Memory capacity
I/O points
Internal power consumption (5 V DC)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
QJ71WS96
Web server, FTP server/client
ETHERNET: CSMA/CD
type 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
RS232, 9-poles D-SUB
Duplex
Start/stop synchronisation
MBit/s 9.6 / 19.2 / 38.4 / 57.6 / 115.2
m Max. 15
1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
floating control is possible (RS/CS)
MB 5 (Standard-ROM); expandable with Compact Flash™ Card up to 512
32
mA 500
mm 27.5 x 98 x 90
Order information
Art. no.
147115
MELSEC System Q MES Interface Module
QJ71MES96
QJ71MES96
The new Qseries MES module allows users to
interface their production control systems
directly to an MES database.
앬 It removes the need for an interfacing PC
layer - reducing hardware costs and installation time.
앬 It removes the need for specialist interfacing
software run on the PC layer; saving on
expensive software and services while reducing installation costs.
Specifications
Module type
Communications method
Interface
general
tag function
trigger monitor function
DB interface
trigger buffering function
function
SQL text transmission
arithmetic processing
program execution function
Memory capacity
I/O points
Internal power consumption (5 V DC)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
40
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:18:58
앬
앬
앬
It simplifies the MES architecture reducing the
total commissioning time.
It can improve reliability and accessibility as
the module is based on industrial PLC design
standards.
The simplified system provides greater direct
data visibility increasing the opportunity to
achieve higher productivity.
QJ71MES96
MES interface module
ETHERNET
type 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Interacts with databases via user-defined jobs
Collects device data of the PLCs CPU on the network in units of tags.
Monitors the status of conditions (time, tag values, etc.)
The MES module buffers the data and trigger time to internal memory.
Automatically generates the correct SQL message according to requirements.
Formulas can be applied to data before sending from the MES interface module.
Executes programs in the application server computer
1 Compact Flash™ Card can be installed
32
mA 650
mm 27.5 x 98 x 90
Art. no.
200698
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MODULAR PLCS ///
Interrupt Module
Branching to subroutines
The interrupt module QI60 is suitable for applications demanding quick responses.
01234567
89ABCDEF
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
- +
COM
NC
24VDC
6mA
앬
Every input in this module is assigned to a
pointer which serves as a breakpoint for a
subroutine
If an interrupt/alarm signal is applied at an
input, the PLC program is interrupted after it
has worked through the current statement
and a subroutine assigned to the input is first
processed
Specifications
Input points
Rated input voltage
Operating voltage range
resistance
Input
current
voltage
ON
current
voltage
OFF
current
No. of occupied I/O points
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Order information
앬
Galvanic isolation between process and controller by means of a photocoupler is a standard feature
Only one QI60 can be installed per
PLC system
QI60
16
V DC 24 (sink type)
V DC 24
kW ca. 3.9
mA ca. DC 4 / 8
V ³DC 19
mA ³DC 4
V £DC 11
mA £DC 1.7
16
mm 27.4 x 98 x 90
Art. no.
MODULAR PLCs
앬
QI60
앬
136395
Interface Module
Data exchange with peripheral
devices
QJ71C24-R2
CH1
RUN
NEU.
SD
RD
This module enables communication with
peripheral devices via a standard RS232 interface.
ERR.
NEU.
SD
RD
The peripherals are connected point-to-point
on a 1:1 basis.
CH2
앬
앬
앬
앬
CH1
앬
CH2
The QJ71C24 provides one RS232 and one
RS422/485 interface and the QJ71C24-R2 provides two RS232 interfaces
Enables PCs connected to the system to
access the full data set of the MELSEC Q CPU
using graphic process supervision or monitoring software
앬
Support for plain ASCII data exchange with
connected devices such as barcode readers,
scales and identification systems
Options for connection of a printer
Integrated flash ROM memory for logging
quality, productivity or alarm data that can be
printed out when required
Module and communications status shown
by LED
EXT POWER
QJ71C24-R2
Specifications
Interface type
Communications mode
Synchronisation
rate
Data
transfer
distance
Max. no of stations in a multidrop network
Data format
Error correction
DTR/DSR control
X ON / X OFF (DC1 / DC3)
I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
RS232 (9-pin Sub-D)
RS232 (9-pin Sub-D)
Full duplex / half duplex
Full duplex / half duplex
Asynchronous communications
Asynchronous communications
bit/s 50 – 230400 (channel 1 only) 115200 (channel 1+2 simultaneously)
m 15
15
no restrictions / 64
—
1 start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, 1 or 0 parity bits, 1 or 2 stop bits
Parity check, checksum
Parity check, checksum
YES / NO selectable
YES / NO selectable
YES / NO selectable
YES / NO selectable
32
32
mm 27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
Art. no.
149500
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:05
149501
QJ71C24N-R4
RS422 / RS485 (screw terminals)
Full duplex / half duplex
Asynchronous communications
Parity check, checksum
—
YES / NO selectable
32
27.4 x 98 x 90
QJ71MB91
RS232 (9-pin Sub-D)
Full duplex / half duplex
Master/Slave
300 – 115200
15
Master (32 slaves) Slave (242)
Modbus
—
—
—
32
27,4 x 98 x 90
149502
167757
—
no restrictions / 64
41
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MODULAR PLCS
Connection Cables
Connection cable for extension units
These connection cables are used for connecting base units to the extension units.
Specifications
QC06B
QC12B
QC30B
QC50B
QC100B
For extension base units
Q63B, Q65B,
Q68B, Q612B
Q63B, Q65B,
Q68B, Q612B
Q63B, Q65B,
Q68B, Q612B
Q63B, Q65B,
Q68B, Q612B
Q63B, Q65B,
Q68B, Q612B
0.6
1.2
3.0
5.0
10.0
129591
129642
129643
129644
129645
Length
Order information
MODULAR PLCs
When multiple extension cables are used, the
overall distance of the cables should be within
13.2 m.
m
Art. no.
Programming Cable
Programming cable for RS232 interface
The programming cables QC30R2 are used for
programming a MELSEC system Q CPU via the
RS232 CPU port.
The programming cable provides a 9-pin D-sub
connector for the PC side and a 6-pin Mini-DIN
connector for the PLC interface.
Specifications
QC30R2
QC30-USB
Connection cable for
Connection between a PCs and a
MELSEC system Q PLC via RS232 interface
Connection between a PCs and a
MELSEC system Q PLC via USB interface
3.0
3.0
128424
136577
Length
Order information
m
Art. no.
Accessories
Connector disconnection prevention holder Q6HLD-R2
Tracking Cable
Connection cable for redundant PLCs
The tracking cable is used for connecting the
two PLCs of a redundant system. For connection
in a redundant system only the cables QC10TR
and QC30TR can be used.
When both systems are started at the same time
System A becomes the control system and System B the standby system.
The connectors of the tracking cable are marked
with "A" and "B" for "System A" and "System B".
Specifications
QC10TR
Connection cable for
Connection between the two PLCs of a redundant system
Length
Order information
m
Art. no.
QC30TR
1.0 m
3.0 m
157068
157069
Battery Q6BAT
Backup battery
The lithium battery Q6BAT is the replacement
for the battery integrated for data backup in any
MELSEC System Q CPU.
Specifications
V DC
3,0
Capacity
mAh
1800
Dimensions (Ø x H)
mm
Ø16 x 30
Order information
42
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:15
A6BAT
Voltage
Art. no
130376
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Alpha
Alpha fills the gap between traditional relays
and timers and a PLC. Offering functionality,
reliability and flexibility but without the worry
of cost of overheads. Alpha is the perfect main-
tenance product, and yet can adequately control a new process from the start.
function (timers, counters, analog signal processing, calendar, clock etc.) can be used as
many times as you need in all your programs.
The Alpha 2 can process up to 200 function
blocks in a single program, and every single
FX Family
Micro PLCs have opened up the world of opportunities in Industrial Automation due to their small
size and low cost. Now many applications that
were never previously considered can benefit –
from barriers to security systems and a host of
others. The FX family is the world’s best selling
cost-effective ‘brick’type PLCs, consisting of five
independent but compatible product ranges.
Depending on your application and control
needs, you can choose from the small, attractively priced, "stand-alone" FX1S series, the
expandable FX1N series or the more powerful
FX2N, FX3U and FX3UC series.
changing needs of your installations and applications.
With the exception of the FX1S, all FX series
PLCs can be expanded to adapt them to the
Special versions with E-Mark Label (ECE-R10
regulations) are available upon request for
vehicle applications.
Network integration is also supported, making
it possible for your FX controllers to communicate with other PLCs, controllers and HMIs.
Communications modules
Interface modules with
RS232/RS422/RS485 interfaces for
the connection of peripherals and
PLC–PLC links. Network modules
for Profibus/DP, CC-Link, AS-Interface, CANopen, Ethernet, Modbus
RTU/ASCII and for the configuration of proprietary Mitsubishi
networks.
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Equipment Features
Digital input/output modules
For a variety of signal levels with
relay or transistor switches.
DIGITAL
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
DIGITALE
EIN-/AUSGÄNGE
COMMUNICATIONSMODULES
CPU
KOMMUNIKATIONSMODULE
ANALOG
INPUTS/
OUTPUTS
ANALOGE
EIN-/AUSGÄNGE
POSITIONING
MODULES
Positioning modules
POSITIONIERMODULE
Analog input/output modules
High-speed counter modules with
support for the connection of
incremental rotary transducers and
positioning modules for servo and
stepping motor drives.
For processing current/voltage signals
and temperature registration with a direct
connection option for Pt100 resistance
thermometers and thermocouplers.
384
16.000*
0,08
0,065
256
8.000*
The Alpha can also be expanded to provide a small increase in I/O, analogue
output, temperature input or networking
capability.
0,55 – 0,7
The capacity of the CPUs of the FX family
can be expanded with memory cassettes. Non-volatile memory cassettes
with a capacity of up to 64 k program
steps are available for reliable, longterm storage of your PLC projects.
132
There are five series in the FX family,
each of which is designed for a different
application profile. The diagram highlights the capabilities of each FX PLC
type.
2.000
It is the ideal choice, no matter whether
you need to install a simple control
application requiring up to 34 I/Os
(FX1S) or a demanding, complex system
with up to 384 I/O points (FX3U/FX3UC).
0,55 – 0,7
In addition to the other advantages this
enables you to switch programs at very
short notice, simply by replacing a cassette.
34
The MELSEC FX family is highly flexible,
enabling fast and efficient configuration
and programming for the application at
hand.
64.000
Expandability and Power
FX1S
No. of inputs/outputs
Program steps
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:21
FX1N
FX2N
FX3U/FX3UC
Cycle time (µs)
* Available with optional cassette
43
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
What Components Are Required for an FX PLC System?
A basic FX PLC system can consist of a stand
alone base unit, with the functionality and I/O
range increased by adding extension I/O and
special function modules. The following section provides an overview of options available.
Base units
The entire FX PLC range can be AC or DC powered with a mix of input and output styles. The
PLCs can be programmed with the user friendly
GX or GX IEC Developer programming software,
allowing programs to be transferred between
different FX PLCs. All PLC base units include an
integrated real time clock.
Extension adapter boards can be installed
directly into the base unit and therefore do not
require any additional installation space. For a
small number of I/O (2 to 4) an extension
adapter boards can be installed directly into
the (left-hand side) FX1S or FX1N controller.
Interface adapter boards can also provide the
FX PLC with additional RS232 or RS485 interfaces.To connect special function modules
(e.g. Ethernet module) a communication
adapter has to be installed.
Extension I/O modules
Unpowered and powered extension I/O modules can be added to the FX1N, FX2N, FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs. For expansion modules powered
by the base unit, the power consumption has to
be calculated as the 5 V DC bus can only support a limited number of expansion I/O (for
further details please refer to next page –
calculation of the power consumption).
Special function modules
A wide variety of special function modules are
available for the FX1N, FX2N, FX3U and FX3UC
PLCs. They cover networking functionality, analog control, pulse train outputs and temperature inputs.
Peripherals
Each FX PLC has options for memory cassettes,
hand held programming units as well as connection to HMI and GOT interfaces.
2424+
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Base units are available with different I/O configurations from 10 to 128 points but can be
expanded to 384 points depending upon the
FX range selected.
Extension boards
0
LINE STATION
N L
ON
6
5
4
3
1 2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
7
F
FX 0N -3A
POWER
ERR
IN
ERROR STATION
OFF
ON
Expansion possibilities
Extensions for inside PLC
installation
Extension modules
(installation outside
the PLC)
Network modules
0
1 2 3
FX2N-16LNK-M
DG RUNB
A RUNA
MOD
ALPHA 2
FX1S
FX1N
FX2N
FX3U
FX3UC
Analog
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
—
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
AS-Interface
쎲
쎲
Ethernet
—
쎲
CC-Link
—
—
CAN open
—
—
Profibus/DP
—
—
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
DeviceNet
—
—
—
Modbus RTU/ASCII
—
—
—
—
SSCNET
—
—
—
—
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
Digital
Digital
—
Analog
—
—
Temperature
—
—
RS232
쎲
RS422
—
RS485
—
쎲
쎲
쎲
USB
—
—
—
—
RS232
—
쎲
RS485
—
쎲
쎲
쎲
High speed counter
—
—
—
Positioning
—
—
—
Memory cassettes
쎲
External Display
—
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
Communications
boards
Communications
modules
Dedicated function modules
44
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:31
—
—
—
—
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
쎲
—
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
Calculation of the Power Consumption
The power consumption figures on the 5 V DC
bus for the special function modules are shown
in the specifications tables on the following
pages.
Max. residual current values (in mA) for FX2N-16M첸-E첸첸 through FX2N-32M첸-E첸첸,
FX2N-32E첸-E첸첸 for the permissible configuration
The maximum permissible currents on the
5 V DC and 24 V DC bus are shown in the table
below.
Number of
additional
outputs
24
25
16
100
50
0
8
175
125
75
25
0
250
200
150
100
0
Max. current
32
5 V bus
24 V bus
FX2N-16/32M첸-ES(ESS)
290 mA
250 mA
FX2N-48–128M첸-ES(ESS)
290 mA
460 mA
FX2N-32E첸-ES(ESS)
690 mA
250 mA
48
FX2N-48E첸-ES(ESS)
690 mA
460 mA
40
85
35
FX3U-16/32M첸-ES(ESS)
500 mA
400 mA
32
160
110
60
FX3U-48–128M첸-ES(ESS)
500 mA
600 mA
24
235
185
135
85
35
FX3UC-16MT/D(DSS)
600 mA
—
16
310
260
210
160
110
60
FX3UC-32MT/D(DSS)
560 mA
—
8
385
335
285
235
185
135
85
35
FX3UC-64MT/D(DSS)
480 mA
—
0
460
410
360
310
260
210
160
110
60
FX3UC-96MT/D(DSS)
400 mA
—
0
8
16
24
32
40
Number of additional inputs
48
56
64
Max. residual current values (in mA) for FX2N-48M첸-E첸첸 through FX2N-128M첸-E첸첸,
FX2N-48E첸-E첸첸 for the permissible configuration
Number of
additional
outputs
The residual currents for the 24 V DC service
voltage at different input/output configurations
are shown in the tables on the right.
A maximum of 256 I/Os is possible.
10
10
10
Special function modules have to be supplied externally, if the residual current for the service voltage is not satisfying.
Sample Calculations
The tables below and on the right show
different examples for sample power
calculation for a PLC system.
24 V DC calculation
Module
Current / module
Calculation
Current / module
Total current
460 mA
+460 mA
+290 mA
+290 mA
3
50 mA
-150 mA
30 mA
-90 mA
2
200 mA
-400 mA
30 mA
-60 mA
1
80 mA
-80 mA
40 mA
The current values for the special function
modules can be found in the specifications
on the following pages.
FX2N-80MR-ES
1
FX2N-4AD
Comparison with the current value tables
show that the calculated figures for the
5 V bus lie within the allowable ranges.
FX2N-4DA
FX2N-232IF
-40 mA
-170 mA !!!
In the example below all units can be
supplied sufficiently with the internal
24 V power supply.
Module
5 V DC calculation
No.
290 – 190 mA
Result:
An external 24 V power supply has to
be added in the example above.
Number of I/Os
24 V DC calculation
No.
X
Y
X/Y
FX2N-48MR-ES/UL
1
24
24
—
FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL
1
—
16
—
FX2N-8EX-ES/UL
1
8
—
—
FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL
1
—
8
—
FX0N-3A
1
—
—
8
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL
1
16
16
—
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
1
16
—
—
FX2N-4AD
1
—
—
8
1
—
—
8
Total 햲
X=8
Y = 24
➞
5 V DC calculation
Total current 햳
+185 mA
-90 mA
Current / module
Total current
290 mA
+290 mA
—
0 mA
—
0 mA
—
0 mA
30 mA
-30 mA
+95 mA (OK!)
FX2N-1HC
Result:
햲
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:33
X = 16
Y=0
➞
64 + 64 + 24 = 152 ! (< 256) OK!
Total no. of I/Os which are connected to a base unit to calculate the max. residual current values (see tables)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
100 mA (OK !)
+150 mA
+690 mA
—
0 mA
50 mA
30 mA
-30 mA
0 mA
90 mA
+100 mA (OK!)
햳
+260 mA (OK!)
690 mA
-90 mA
+570 mA (OK!)
see tables above (max. residual current values)
45
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Modules
50
8
16
24
Number of additional inputs
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
FX1S Series
The FX1S series base units are available
with 10 to 30 input/output points.
It is possible to choose between relay and
transistor output types.
100-240
VAC
L
N
앬
X7
X5
X3
X1
S/S
X6
X4
X2
X0
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
앬
IN
MITSUBISHI
앬
POWER
RUN
ERROR
앬
FX1S-14MR
OUT
앬
0 1 2 3
4 5
Y4
Y2
Y1
Y0
0V
Y5
OM2 Y3
24V COM0 COM1C
14MR
-ES/UL
앬
Integrated power supply (AC or DC
powered)
Maintenance-free EEPROM memory
Ample memory capacity (2000 steps)
and device ranges
High-speed operations
Incorporated positioning control
Integrated real-time clock
앬
앬
앬
앬
System upgrades by exchangeable
interface and I/O adapter boards for
direct fitting into the base unit
LEDs for indicating the input and output
status
Standard programming unit interface
User-friendly programming systems,
including IEC 1131.3 (EN 61131.3) compatible programming software, HMIs
and hand-held programming units
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Base Units with 10 – 14 I/Os
Specifications
FX1S-10
MR-DS
FX1S-10
MR-ES/UL
FX1S-10
MT-DSS
FX1S-14
MR-DS
FX1S-14
MR-ES/UL
FX1S-14
MT-DSS
Max. number inputs/outputs
10
10
10
14
14
14
Power supply
24 V DC
100–240 V AC
24 V DC
24 V DC
100–240 V AC
24 V DC
Integrated inputs
6
6
6
8
8
8
Integrated outputs
4
4
4
6
6
6
Output type
Relay
Relay
Transistor
(source)
Relay
Relay
Transistor
(source)
Power consumption
W
6
19
6
6.5
19
6.5
Weight
kg
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
60 x 90 x 49
60 x 90 x 75
60 x 90 x 49
60 x 90 x 49
60 x 90 x 75
60 x 90 x 49
141240
141243
141246
141247
141248
141249
Specifications
FX1S-20
MR-DS
FX1S-20
MR-ES/UL
FX1S-20
MT-DSS
FX1S-30
MR-DS
FX1S-30
MR-ES/UL
FX1S-30
MT-DSS
Max. number inputs/outputs
20
20
20
30
30
30
Power supply
24 V DC
100–240 V AC
24 V DC
24 V DC
100–240 V AC
24 V DC
Integrated inputs
12
12
12
16
16
16
Integrated outputs
8
8
8
14
14
14
Relay
Relay
Transistor
(source)
Relay
Relay
Transistor
(source)
8
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
Base Units with 20 – 30 I/Os
Output type
Power consumption
W
7
20
7
8
21
Weight
kg
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.8
0.8
0.8
75 x 90 x 49
75 x 90 x 75
75 x 90 x 49
100 x 90 x 49
100 x 90 x 75
100 x 90 x 49
141251
141252
141254
141255
141256
141257
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
46
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:38
mm
Art. no.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
FX1N Series
100-240
VAC
L
N
X15
X7 X11 X13
X5
X3
X1
X14
S/S
X6 X10 X12
X4
X2
X0
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
MITSUBISHI
The FX1N series base units are available
with 14 to 60 input/output points and are
expandable up to 128 I/O points.
앬
It is possible to choose between relay and
transistor output types.
앬
앬
IN
POWER
RUN
ERROR
앬
앬
FX1N-24MR
OUT
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
10 11
Y6 Y10
Y5
Y3
Y2
Y1
Y11
Y0
0V
COM4 Y7
COM2 COM3 Y4
24+ COM0 COM1
Integrated serial interface for communication between Personal computers and
HMI
Standard programming unit interface
LEDs for indicating the input and output
status
앬
앬
앬
Detachable terminal blocks for units with
14, 24, 40, and 60 I/Os.
Slot for memory cassettes
All DC models with variable voltage from
12 up to 24 V
Integrated real-time clock
Exchangeable interface and I/O adapter
boards for direct fitting into the base
unit
24MR
-ES/UL
Specifications
FX1N-14
MR-DS
FX1N-14
MR-ES/UL
FX1N-14
MT-DSS
FX1N-24
MR-DS
FX1N-24
MR-ES/UL
FX1N-24
MT-DSS
Integrated inputs/outputs
14
14
14
24
24
24
Power supply
12–24 V
100–240 V
12–24 V
12–24 V
100–240 V
12–24 V
Integrated inputs
8
8
8
14
14
14
Integrated outputs
6
6
6
10
10
10
Relay
Relay
Transistor
(source)
Relay
Relay
Transistor
(source)
13
29
13
15
30
15
90 x 90 x 75
90 x 90 x 75
90 x 90 x 75
90 x 90 x 75
90 x 90 x 75
90 x 90 x 75
141258
141259
141260
141261
141262
141263
Output type
Power consumption
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
W
mm
Art. no.
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Base Units with 14 – 24 I/Os
Base Units with 40 – 60 I/Os
Specifications
FX1N-40
MR-DS
FX1N-40
MR-ES/UL
FX1N-40
MT-DSS
FX1N-60
MR-DS
FX1N-60
MR-ES/UL
FX1N-60
MT-DSS
Integrated inputs/outputs
40
40
40
60
60
60
Power supply
12–24 V DC
100–240 V AC
12–24 V DC
12–24 V DC
100–240 V AC
12–24 V DC
Integrated inputs
24
24
24
36
36
36
Integrated outputs
16
16
16
24
24
24
Relay
Transistor
(source)
Relay
Transistor
(source)
Output type
Power consumption
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Relay
W
mm
Art. no.
18
32
18
20
35
20
130 x 90 x 75
130 x 90 x 75
130 x 90 x 75
175 x 90 x 75
175 x 90 x 75
175 x 90 x 75
141264
141265
141266
141267
141268
141269
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:43
Relay
47
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
FX2N Series
The FX2N series base units are available
with 16, 32, 48, 64, 80 or 128 input/output
points (expandable to 256 I/O).
It is possible to choose between relay and
transistor output type.
Triac output types for 110 V AC for
sink/source are also available.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Detachable terminal blocks (except for
16 I/O base units)
Slot for memory cassettes for up to 16 k
steps PLC program
Integrated real-time clock
Exchangeable interface modules for
direct mounting into a base unit
Standard programming unit interface
LEDs for indicating the input and output
status
Base Units with 16 – 128 I/Os
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
48
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:50
FX2N-16
MR-DS
16
24 V DC
8
8
Relay
20 W
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 87
Art. no.
141270
FX2N-16
MT-DSS
16
24 V DC
8
8
Transistor (source type)
20 W
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 87
Art. no.
103689
FX2N-16
MR-ES/UL
16
100–240 V AC
8
8
Relay
30 VA
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 87
Art. no.
141271
FX2N-16
MT-ESS/UL
16
100–240 V AC
8
8
Transistor (source type)
30 VA
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 87
Art. no.
141272
FX2N-32
MR-DS
32
24 V DC
16
16
Relay
25 W
0.65
150 x 90 x 87
FX2N-48
MR-DS
48
24 V DC
24
24
Relay
30 W
0.85
182 x 90 x 87
FX2N-64
MR-DS
64
24 V DC
32
32
Relay
35 W
1.0
220 x 90 x 87
FX2N-80
MR-DS
80
24 V DC
40
40
Relay
40 W
1.2
285 x 90 x 87
141273
141277
141281
141286
FX2N-32
MT-DSS
32
24 V DC
16
16
Transistor (source type)
25 W
0.65
150 x 90 x 87
FX2N-48
MT-DSS
48
24 V DC
24
24
Transistor (source type)
30 W
0.85
182 x 90 x 87
FX2N-64
MT-DSS
64
24 V DC
32
32
Transistor (source type)
35 W
1.0
220 x 90 x 87
FX2N-80
MT-DSS
80
24 V DC
40
40
Transistor (source type)
40 W
1.2
285 x 90 x 87
141275
141279
141283
141288
FX2N-32
MR-ES/UL
32
100–240 V AC
16
16
Relay
40 VA
0.65
150 x 90 x 87
FX2N-48
MR-ES/UL
48
100–240 V AC
24
24
Relay
50 VA
0.85
182 x 90 x 87
FX2N-64
MR-ES/UL
64
100–240 V AC
32
32
Relay
60 VA
1.0
220 x 90 x 87
FX2N-80
MR-ES/UL
80
100–240 V AC
40
40
Relay
70 VA
1.2
285 x 90 x 87
FX2N-128
MR-ES/UL
128
100–240 V AC
64
64
Relay
100 VA
1.8
350 x 90 x 87
141274
141278
141282
141287
141290
FX2N-32
MT-ESS/UL
32
100–240 V AC
16
16
Transistor (source type)
40 VA
0.65
150 x 90 x 87
FX2N-48
MT-ESS/UL
48
100–240 V AC
24
24
Transistor (source type)
50 VA
0.85
182 x 90 x 87
FX2N-64
MT-ESS/UL
64
100–240 V AC
32
32
Transistor (source type)
60 VA
1.0
220 x 90 x 87
FX2N-80
MT-ESS/UL
80
100–240 V AC
40
40
Transistor (source type)
70 VA
1.2
285 x 90 x 87
FX2N-128
MT-ESS/UL
128
100–240 V AC
64
64
Transistor (source type)
100 VA
1.8
350 x 90 x 87
141276
141280
141284
141289
141292
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
FX3U Series
The FX3U series base units are available
with 16, 32, 48, 64, 80 or 128 input/output
points expandable to 384 points.
Models are available for selection with
relay or transistor outputs.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
LEDs for indicating the input and output
status
Slot for memory cassettes for up to
64 k steps PLC program
Integrated real-time clock
Exchangeable interface modules for
direct mounting into
a base unit
Standard programming unit interface
FX3U-16
MR/ES
16
100–240VAC
8
8
Relay
W 30
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 86
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Art. no.
FX3U-16
MT/ESS
16
100–240VAC
8
8
Transistor (source type)*
W 30
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 86
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Art. no.
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Art. no.
206174
FX3U-16
MT/DSS
16
24 VDC
8
8
Transistor (source type)*
W 25
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 86
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
206168
FX3U-16
MR/DS
16
24 VDC
8
8
Relay
W 25
kg 0.6
mm 130 x 90 x 86
Specifications
Order information
206136
Art. no.
206184
FX3U-32
MR/ES
32
100–240VAC
16
16
Relay
35
0.65
150 x 90 x 86
FX3U-48
MR/ES
48
100–240 V AC
24
24
Relay
40
0.85
182 x 90 x 86
FX3U-64
MR/ES
64
100–240 V AC
32
32
Relay
45
1.0
220 x 90 x 86
FX3U-80
MR/ES
80
100–240 V AC
40
40
Relay
50
1.2
285 x 90 x 86
FX3U-128
MR/ES
128
100–240 V AC
64
64
Relay
65
1.8
350 x 90 x 86
206137
206138
206139
206140
206141
FX3U-32
MT/ESS
32
100–240VAC
16
16
Transistor (source type)*
35
0.65
150 x 90 x 86
FX3U-48
MT/ESS
48
100–240 V AC
24
24
Transistor (source type)*
40
0.85
182 x 90 x 86
FX3U-64
MT/ESS
64
100–240 V AC
32
32
Transistor (source type)*
45
1.0
220 x 90 x 86
FX3U-80
MT/ESS
80
100–240 V AC
40
40
Transistor (source type)*
50
1.2
285 x 90 x 86
FX3U-128
MT/ESS
128
100–240 V AC
64
64
Transistor (source type)*
65
1.8
350 x 90 x 86
206169
206170
206171
206172
206173
FX3U-32
MR/DS
32
24 VDC
16
16
Relay
30
0.65
150 x 90 x 86
FX3U-48
MR/DS
48
24 VDC
24
24
Relay
35
0.85
182 x 90 x 86
FX3U-64
MR/DS
64
24 VDC
32
32
Relay
40
1.0
220 x 90 x 86
FX3U-80
MR/DS
80
24 VDC
40
40
Relay
45
1.2
285 x 90 x 86
206175
206176
206177
206178
FX3U-32
MT/DSS
32
24 VDC
16
16
Transistor (source type)*
30
0.65
150 x 90 x 86
FX3U-48
MT/DSS
48
24 VDC
24
24
Transistor (source type)*
35
0.85
182 x 90 x 86
FX3U-64
MT/DSS
64
24 VDC
32
32
Transistor (source type)*
40
1.0
220 x 90 x 86
FX3U-80
MT/DSS
80
24 VDC
40
40
Transistor (source type)*
45
1.2
285 x 90 x 86
206185
206186
206187
206188
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Base Units with 16 – 128 I/Os
* Units with sink type transistor outputs on request.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:54
49
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
FX3UC Series
The base units of the FX3UC series are
available in versions with 16, 32, 64 or 96
inputs/outputs (expandable to 384 I/Os).
POWER
RUN
BATT
ERROR
RUN
X0
STOP
MITSUBISHI
FX3UC-16MT
2
3
X4
5
6
7
앬
The units are available with transistor outputs only.
Y0
1
앬
1
Slot for memory cassettes for up to 64 k
steps PLC program
Adapter modules and system cabling
sets available for units with ribbon cable
connectors
2
3
Y4
Special Features:
5
6
7
앬
앬
앬
Very compact dimensions
Standard programming unit interface
LEDs for indicating the input and output
status
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Base Units with 16 – 96 I/Os
FX3UC-16
MT/DSS
16
24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %)
8
8
Transistor (source type)*
W 6
kg 0.2
mm 34 x 90 x 74
Specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Power supply
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Art. no.
210086
FX3UC-32
MT/DSS
32
24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %)
16
16
Transistor (source type)*
8
0.2
34 x 90 x 74
FX3UC-64
MT/DSS
64
24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %)
32
32
Transistor (source type)*
11
0.3
59.7 x 90 x 74
FX3UC-96
MT/DSS
96
24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %)
48
48
Transistor (source type)*
14
0.35
85.4 x 90 x 74
210087
210088
210089
* Units with sink type transistor outputs on request.
50
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:19:58
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
FX Expandability and Functionality
앬
Additional special function and expansion
modules are available that make it possible to
extend the capacity of the PLC system. There
are three basic categories of modules:
앬
앬
Modules that occupy digital I/Os (connected
on the right hand side of the base unit).
These are the digital unpowered and powered extension units, as well as the special
function modules.
Communication and adapter modules that
are connected to the left hand side of the
base unit, for example FX3U-4AD-ADP and
FX2NC-485ADP.
Internal adapter boards for the FX1S/FX1N/
FX2N series and the FX3U series. These
expansion units are installed directly in the
base unit and do not occupy any digital I/O.
Note: To connect special function modules or extension units of the
FX0N/FX2N/FX3U series to an FX3UC series base unit, an adapter
FX2NC-CNV-IF or the power supply FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.
Various unpowered and powered extension units (FX3UC unpowered only) are
available for extending the base units.
The unpowered units contain 16 or 32 digital inputs/outputs max. and do not need
a separate power supply, since they are
powered via the system bus.
The powered extension units contain a
larger number of inputs/outputs and an
integrated power supply unit, to power
the system bus and the digital inputs.
2
IN
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Powered Expansion I/O
Unpowered Expansion I/O
Integrated inputs/outputs
Application
Power supply
AC range (+10 %, -15 %)
Integrated inputs
Integrated outputs
POWERED
FX2N-32
FX2N-48
FX2N-8
FX2N-8
FX2N-8
ER-ES/UL
ER-ES/UL
ER-ES/UL
EX-ES/UL
EYR-ES/UL
32
48
8
8
8
All FX1N, FX2N and FX3U series nase units
100 – 240 V
100 – 240 V
All modular extension blocks are supplied by the base unit.
16
24
4
8
—
16
24
4
—
8
Output type
Relay
Specifications
Switching voltage (max.)
per output
Max. output
current
per group *
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
A
A
mm
Art. no.
FX2N-8
EYT-ESS/UL
8
UNPOWERED
FX2N-16
EX-ES/UL
16
FX2N-16
EYR-ES/UL
16
FX2N-16
EYT-ESS/UL
16
—
16
Transistor
(source)**
—
8
Transistor
(source)**
16
—
—
16
—
Relay
Generally for relay version: < 264 V AC, < 30 V DC; for transistor version: 5 – 30 V DC
2
2
2
—
2
8
8
8
—
8
32
48
16
8
8
150 x 90 x 87
182 x 90 x 87
43 x 90 x 87
43 x 90 x 87
43 x 90 x 87
0.5
0.8
8
43 x 90 x 87
—
—
16
40 x 90 x 87
2
8
16
40 x 90 x 87
0.5
1.6
16
40 x 90 x 87
65568
166287
65776
65580
65581
Relay
Relay
65571
166285
—
166284
Relay
166286
* This limitation applies only per reference terminal for each group. Please observe the terminal assignments for the group identification. ** Units with sink type transistor outputs on request.
Specifications
FX2NC-16
EX-T-DS
FX2NC-16
EYR-T-DS
FX2NC-16
EX-DS
FX2NC-16
EYT-DSS
FX2NC-32
EX-DS
FX2NC-32
EYT-DSS
Integrated inputs/outputs
16
16
16
16
32
32
Application
All FX3UC series base units
Power supply
All modular extension units are supplied by the base unit.
Integrated inputs
16
—
16
—
32
—
Integrated outputs
—
16
—
16
—
32
Output type
—
Relay
—
Transistor (source)**
—
Transistor (source)**
0.1 / 0.3 햲
—
0.1 / 0.3 햲
Switching voltage (max.)
Max. output
current
Max. switching
power
per output
per group *
V
Generally for relay version: < 264 V AC, < 30 V DC; for transistor version: 5 – 30 V DC
A
—
2
—
A
—
4/8
—
0.8
—
0.8
inductive load
VA
—
80
—
2.4 / 7.2 햳
—
2.4 / 7.2 햳
lamp load
W
—
100
—
0.3 / 0.9 햴
—
0.3 / 0.9 햴
Connection type
Removable screw terminal blocks
Ribbon cable connector
Ribbon cable connector
Ribbon cable connector
Ribbon cable connector
Related I/O points
16
16
16
16
32
32
20.2 x 90 x 89
24.2 x 90 x 89
14.6 x 90 x 87
14.6 x 90 x 87
26.2 x 90 x 87
26.2 x 90 x 87
128152
128153
104503
104504
104505
104506
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
햲
for Y0 and Y1 = 0.3 A; all others 0.1 A 햳 7.2 W for Y0 to Y3; all others 2.4 W 햴 0.9 W for Y0 to Y3; all others 0.3 W
* This limitation applies only per reference terminal for each group. Please observe the terminal assignments for the group identification. ** Units with sink type transistor outputs on request.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:20:06
51
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
Analog output modules
The analog output modules provide the user
with 2 to 4 analog outputs. The modules convert
digital values from the FX1N/FX2N/FX3U- and
FX3UC controller to the analog signals required
Specifications
by the process. The modules can output both
current and voltage signals.
Resolution
2.5 mV / 4 µA (12 bit)
Fullscale overall accuracy
5 V DC
Power supply
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
±1 %
30 mA (from baseunit)
85 mA (from baseunit)
8
43 x 90 x 87
FX3U-4DA
—
4
-10 – +10 V DC / 0 – +20 mA /
4 – +20 mA
0.32 mV (15 bit + sign)
5 mV (10 bit) / 20 µA (11 bit + sign)
0.6 µA (15 bit )
±1 %
±0.3 – 1 %
30 mA (from baseunit)
100 mA (from baseunit)
200 mA
200 mA
8
8
55 x 90 x 87
24.2 x 90 x 89
102868
65586
Analog channels
FX2N-2DA
—
2
0 – +10 V DC / 0 – +5 V DC /
4 – +20 mA
inputs
outputs
Analog output range
Order information
mm
Art. no.
FX2N-4DA
—
4
-10 – +10 V DC / 0 – +20 mA /
4 – +20 mA
169509
Analog input modules
MICRO CONTROLLERS
The analog input modules provide the user with
2 to 8 analog inputs. The module converts analog
process signals into digital values which are further
processed by the MELSEC
FX1N/FX2N/FX3U/FX3UC controller. The actual values or mean values over several measurements may
be output.
FX 2N -2AD
POWER
Specifications
Analog channels
FX2N-2AD
2
—
0 – +10 V DC / 0 – +5 V DC /
0/ 4 – +20 mA
inputs
outputs
Analog input range
voltage
current
Fullscale overall accuracy
5 V DC
Power supply
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
FX3U-4AD / FX3UC-4AD
4
—
-10 – +10 V DC / -20 –
+20 mA / 4 – +20 mA
0.32 mV (15 bit+sign)
1.25 µA (14 bit+sign)
±0.3 – 0.5 %
100 mA (from base unit)
200 mA
8
20.2 x 90 x 89
FX2N-8AD
8
—
-10 – +10 V DC / -20 –
+20 mA / 4 – +20 mA
0.63 mV (14 bit + sign)
2.5 µA (13 bit + sign)
±0.3 – 0.5 %
50 mA (from base unit)
80 mA
8
75 x 105 x 75
102869
65585
169508 / 210090
129195
2.5mV, 1.25mV,
4 µA (12 bits)
Resolution
Order information
±1 %
20 mA (from base unit)
50 mA (from base unit)
8
43 x 90 x 87
FX2N-4AD
4
—
-10 – +10 V DC / -20 –
+20 mA / 4 – +20 mA
5 mV (11 bit + sign)
20 µA (10 bit + sign)
±1 %
30 mA (from base unit)
55 mA
8
55 x 90 x 87
mm
Art. no.
Note: The FX2N-8AD can be configured to accept standard analog inputs as well as selected temperature inputs such as K, T or J type thermocouples.
Combined analog I/O modules
The analog input/output modules are available in
two different models. They provide the user with
2 or 4 analog inputs and 1 analog output. They
serve for conversion of analog process signals into
digital values, and vice versa.
Specifications
Analog channels
Resolution
(input)
Resolution
(output)
Power supply
inputs
outputs
voltage
current
voltage
current
5 V DC
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
52
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:20:15
mm
Art. no.
As of the FX2N-5A module the analog inputs can
be selected between current or voltage input
signals.
FX0N-3A
2
1
0 – +10 V (8 bit), 0 – +5 V (8 bit)
0/4 – +20 mA (8 bit)
0 – +10 V (8 bit), 0 – +5 V (8 bit)
4 – +20 mA (8 bit)
30 mA (from base unit)
90 mA (from base unit)
8
43 x 90 x 87
FX2N-5A
4
1
-10–+10V(15bit+sign),-100–+100mV(11bit+sign)
-20 – +20 mA (14 bit + sign), 0/4 – +20 mA (14 bit)
-10 – +10 V (12 bit)
0/4 – +20 mA (10 bit)
70 mA (from base unit)
90 mA (from base unit)
8
55 x 90 x 87
41790
153740
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
Analog I/O adapters
The FX3U-4AD-ADP adapter module for analog
input is a special function adapter to add four
analog input points to the FX3U/FX3UC PLC
system.
Specifications
FX3U -4DA-ADP
POWER
Analog channels
inputs
outputs
COM2
I2+
V2+
COM1
I1+
V1+
24-
24+
Analog range
Resolution
Overall accuracy
COM3
I3+
V3+
Power supply
5 V DC
24 V DC
COM4
I4+
V4+
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
The FX3U-4DA-ADP adapter module for analog
output is a special function adapter to add four
analog output points to the FX3U/FX3UC PLC
system.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
4
—
0 – +10 V DC, 4 – +20 mA
2.5 mV / 10 µA (12 bit / 11 bit )
±0.5 %* / ±1 %
15 mA (from base unit)
40 mA
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
FX3U-4DA-ADP
—
4
0 – +10 V DC, 4 – +20 mA
2.5 mV / 4 µA (12 bit)
±0.5 %* / ±1 %
15 mA (from base unit)
150 mA
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
165241
165271
*Dependent on the ambient temperature and signal quality
Note: When connecting these adapter modules to a FX3U, the communications adapter FX3U-CNV-BD is required.
The analog input module for thermocouples
FX2N-4AD-TC is used for processing temperatures. It has 4 independent inputs for detecting
signals from thermocouples of types J and K.
The type of thermocouple can be chosen independently for each point.
The temperature control module FX2N-2LC is
equipped with two temperature input points
and two transistor (open collector) output
points. It is used to read temperature signals
from thermocouples and Pt100 sensors, and
performs PID output control
The analog input module for Pt100 inputs
FX2N-4AD-PT permits the connection of four
Pt100 sensors to the FX2N or FX3U/FX3UC series
controller.
FX2N -4AD-TC
A/D
Specifications
Analog inputs
Compensatedtemperaturerange
°C
Digital outputs
Resolution
Power supply
5 V DC
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
FX2N-4AD-TC
4 (J or K type)
-100–+600(Jtype)/-100–+1200(Ktype)
-1000 – +6000 (J type) /
-1000 – +12000 (K type)
0.3 (J type) / 0.4 (K type)
40 mA (from base unit)
60 mA
8
55 x 90 x 87
FX2N-4AD-PT
4 (Pt100 sensors)
-100 – +600
-1,000 – 6,000
(12 bit conversion)
0.2 – 0.3 °C
30 mA (from base unit)
50 mA
8
55 x 90 x 87
FX2N-2LC
2 points
Thermocouple and Pt100 sensor
0.1 °C or 1 °C
70 mA (from base unit)
55 mA
8
55 x 90 x 87
65588
65587
129196
2 transistor output points
Note: The FX2N-8AD can be configured to accept standard analog inputs as well as selected temperature inputs such as K, T or J type thermocouples.
Analog temperature input adapters
The analog input adapter for thermocouples
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP is used for processing temperatures. It has 4 independent inputs for
detecting signals from thermocouples of
types J and K.
FX3U -4AD-TC-ADP
The FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP and FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
analog input adapters enable the connection of
up to four Pt100 thermocouples to the PLC system.
All analog adapters can be used in combination
with the base units of the FX3U/FX3UC series
only.
•ú
24-
24+
POWER
•ú
FX3U -4AD-PT-ADP
The FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP analog input adapter
enables the connection of up to four
Pt1000/Ni1000 thermocouples.
24+
•ú
•ú
24-
L2-
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Analog inputs
L1+
J-type
Specifications
Compensated temperature
range
°C
L4-
L4+
L3-
L3+
L2-
L2+
L1-
L4-
L4+
L3-
L3+
L2+
L1-
L1+
J-type
POWER
Digital outputs
Resolution
Total accuracy
Power supply
°C
5 V DC
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
(Pt1000/Ni1000 sensors,
4 (J or K type)
2/3 wire)
-100 – +600 (J type) /
-50 - +250 (Pt1000) /
-100 – +1000 (K type)
-40 - +110 (Ni1000)
-1000 – +6000 (J type) / -500 - +2500 (Pt1000) /
-1000 – +10000 (K type) -400 - +1100 (Ni1000)
0.3 (J type) / 0.4 (K type) 0.1
±0.5 % fullscale
±0.5 – 1.0 % (fullscale)*
15 mA (from base unit) 15 mA (from base unit)
45 mA
45 mA
0
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
165273
214172
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
4 (Pt100 sensors)
4 (Pt100 sensors, 3-wire)
-50 – +250
-100 - +600
-500 – +2500
-1000 - +6000
0.1
±0.5 – 1.0 % (fullscale)*
15 mA (from base unit)
50 mA
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
0.2 – 0.3
±0.5 – 1.0 % (fullscale)*
15 mA (from base unit)
50 mA
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
165272
214173
*Dependent on the ambient temperature
Note: When connecting these adapter modules to a FX3U, the communications adapter FX3U-CNV-BD is required.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:20:29
53
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Analog temperature input modules
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
High speed counter and pulse train modules
These high speed modules provide additional
counting and pulse train output features to the PLC.
The high speed counters allow 1- or 2-phase
pulses with counting speeds up to a maximum
of 50 kHz for the FX2N-1HC and 200 kHz for the
Specifications
Signal level
Counter
FX2N -1HC
Max. frequency
inputs
outputs
inputs
outputs
kHz
kHz
16 bit
32 bit
Counting range
(Up/down & ring counter)
Output
Power supply
5 V DC
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
FX3U adapter (ADP) module. The FX3U pulse
train output module can provide pulse streams
up to 200 kHz for use in basic positioning applications.
FX2N-1HC
5, 12, 24 V DC / 7 mA
2 (1 phase) or 1 (2 phase)
—
50
—
0–65535
-2147483648 – +2147483647
5 – 24 V DC; 0.5 A
90 mA (from base unit)
—
8
55 x 90 x 87
FX3U-4HSX-ADP *
5 V DC
4
—
100/200
—
—
—
—
30 mA (from base unit)
30 mA (from base unit)
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
FX3U-2HSY-ADP *
Differential line driver
—
2
—
200
—
—
less than 25 mA
30 mA (from base unit)
60 mA (from base unit)
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 89.5
65584
165274
165275
MICRO CONTROLLERS
*for FX3U only
Positioning modules
POWER
ERROR
FX 2N -10PG
START
DOG
X0
X1
øA
øB
PGO
FP
RP
CLR
The positioning modules FX2N-1PG-E and
FX2N-10PG are extremely efficient single-axis
positioningmodules for controlling either step
drives or servo drives (by external regulator) with a
pulse chain.It is very suitable for achieving accurate positioning in combination with the MELSEC
FX series.
Specifications
Accessible axes
Output frequency
Signal level for digital inputs
5 V DC
Power supply
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
pulse/s
mm
Art. no.
The configuration and allocation of the position
data are carried out directly via the PLC program.
A very wide range of manual and automatic
functions are available to the user.
FX2N-1PG-E
1
10 – 100 000
24 V DC / 40 mA
55 mA (from base unit)
—
8
43 x 90 x 87
FX2N-10PG
1
1 – 1 000 000
5 V DC / 100 mA; 24 V DC / 70 mA
120 mA (from base unit)
—
8
43 x 90 x 87
65583
140113
SSCNET III module FX3U-20SSC-H
INT 0
INT 1
A
B
START
DOG
INT 0
INT 1
A
B
X READY
Y READY
X ERROR
Y ERROR
POWER
FX2CU-20SSC-H
The SSCNET module FX3U-20SSC-H can be used
in combination with a FX3U/FX3UC programmable controller to achieve a cost effective solution
for high precision, high speed positioning. The
plug- and-play fiber optic SSCNET cabling
reduces setup time and increases control distance for positioning operations in a wide range
of applications.
Specifications
Accessible axes
Output frequency
Communications speed
Starting time
Max. to PLC connectable modules
5 V DC
Power supply
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
ms
mm
Art. no.
Servo parameters and positioning information
for the FX3U-20SSC-H are easily set up with an
FX3U or FX3UC base unit and a personal computer. For parameter setting, monitoring and
testing the easy programming software
FX Configurator-FP is available.
FX3U-20SSC-H
2 (independent or interpolation) via SSCNET III (servo bus)
1 Hz to 50 MHz
50 Mbps
1.6 (+1.7 SSCNET cycle time)
Up to 8 can be connected to the FX3U PLC
100 mA
—
8
55 x 90 x 87
206189
Note: The FX3U-20SSC-H can only be used in combination with a FX3U/FX3UC series base unit. For applicable servo amplifiers and motors please refer to the
MR-J3 servo section of this catalogue.
54
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:20:38
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
Master and slave modules for PROFIBUS/DP
The Mitsubishi PROFIBUS modules provide an
FX family CPU with an intelligent PROFIBUS/DP
link for the implementation of decentralised
control tasks.
RUN
TOKEN
FROM/TO
ERROR
The FX3U-64DP-M is a PROFIBUS/DP master
module that allows the integration of a MELSEC
FX3U or FX3UC PLC system as a class 1 master in
a PROFIBUS/DP network.
POWER
FX 3U -64DP-M
The FX0N-32NT-DP and FX3U-32DP are
PROFIBUS/DP slave modules that make it
possible to integrate a MELSEC FX1N/FX2N or
FX3U/FX3UC in an existing PROFIBUS/DP
network.*
It links the system to the master PLC in the
PROFIBUS/DP network for efficient and
trouble-free data exchange.
The FX3U Profibus/DP master supplys comprehensive data and alarm processing to the
Profibus/DP V1 standard. It is easily set up
with the GX Configurator-DP software.
FX 0N -32NT-DP
DC
BF
DIA
RUN
Specifications
Module type
Transmission type
FX0N-32NT-DP
Slave
Interface
Max. number of master per configuration
Repeaters
Max. number of slaves
Communications speed
Communications distance
m
Communication cable
5 V DC
Power supply
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm
FX3U-64DP-M
FX3U-32DP
Master
Slave
Bus network
32 byte/slave (normal service mode)
244 byte/slave (extended service mode)
PROFIBUS/DP (with 9 pole D-SUB connector)
1
—
3
—
64
—
PROFIBUS standard
Max. 1,200 (depends on communication speed)
PROFIBUS cable with 9-pin D-SUB connector
—
—
Max. 155 mA (from base unit)
145 mA (from base unit)
8
8
43 x 90 x 87
43 x 90 x 87
Order information
166085
62125
Transmission data
Art. no.
194214
—
—
—
MICRO CONTROLLERS
POWER
Max. 170 mA (from base unit)
60 mA
8
43 x 90 x 87
*Note: The FX3U-64DP-M and FX3U-32DP can only be used in combination with a FX3U/FX3UC series base unit.
Remote I/O Station FX2N-32DP-IF
The remote I/O station FX2N-32DP-IF forms an
extremely compact communication unit and
provides a connection of I/O modules with up
to 256 I/O points and/or up to 8 special function
modules of the FX2N series as an alternative (analog I/Os, network, communications and positioning modules).
RUN
STOP
L
COM
N
24 +
MITSUBISHI
POWER
It features an entire electrical isolation of the
PROFIBUS/DP connector and of the
sensor/actuator circuits.
The FX2N-32DP-IF includes a 240 V power supply unit and a 24 V service voltage terminal, e.g.
for analog modules. The FX2N-32DP-IF-D is supplied with 24 V DC.
PROFIBUS data such as the baud rate or I/O data
can be monitored directly with the programming software or on the hand-held programming unit FX-20P-E. This facilitates an easy error
diagnosis directly on the remote I/O station.
RUN
BF
DIA
Specifications
1200 m
kbps
1000 m
kbps
Communication
400 m
kbps
speed
200 m
kbps
100 m
kbps
Communication distance
m
Communication cable
Max. number of controllable I/O points
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm
FX2N-32DP-IF
FX2N-32DP-IF-D
100 – 240 V AC
24 V DC
(+10 % / -15 %) 50/60 Hz
(+20 % / -30 %)
30 VA
14 W
5 V DC / max. 220 mA (from base unit),
5 V DC / max. 220 mA (from base unit)
24 V DC / 500 mA
9-pin D-SUB for PROFIBUS/DP, 8-pin Mini-DIN for PC or programming unit FX-20P-E
9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75
187.5
500
1500
3000 / 6000 / 12000
Max. 1200 (depends on communication speed)
PROFIBUS cable with 9-pin D-SUB connector
256
0
75 x 98 x 87
Order information
103705
FX2N-32DP-IF
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Power supply
ON
Power consumption
OFF
Internal current consumption
Interface (connectors)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:20:48
Art. no.
142763
55
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
Network Module for Ethernet
RUN
INIT.
100M
SD
RD
ERR.
COM.ERR.
POWER
FX3U-ENET
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
The FX3U-ENET communications modules provides the FX3U or FX3UC PLC with a direct connection on to an Ethernet network.
With the Ethernet module installed an PLC can
exchange data quickly and easily with process
visualization systems in addition to supporting
The FX3U-ENET also support Peer to Peer connection and MC Protocol. It is easily set-up with
the FX Configurator-EN software.
Specifications
FX3U-ENET
Protocol
TCP/IP, UDP
Communication mode
Full-duplex / half-duplex
No. of simultaneous open connections
8
Fixed buffer communication
1023 word x 8
Communication with mail server
SMTP, POP3
Interface
IEEE802.3u (100BaseTX), IEEE802.3 (10BaseT)
Connector
RJ45
Max. transfer rate
100 Mbits/s, 10 Mbit/s
Max. segment length
m 100
Cable
CAT5 STP or 3 STP
Power supply
24 V DC / 240 mA (from base unit)
Related I/O points
8
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm 55 x 90 x 87
Order information
MICRO CONTROLLERS
full program UP/DOWN load as well as comprehensive monitoring support.
Art. no.
166086
Ethernet Communications Adapter FX2NC-ENET-ADP
FX2NC-ENET-ADP
POWER
LINK
ACT
The FX2NC-ENET-ADP communications adapter
is an Ethernet interface with 10BASE-T specifications for the FX1S, FX1N and FX2N series.
via Ethernet from a personal computer (the
software GX Developer or MX Components
must be installed).
The FX2NC-ENET-ADP enables upload, download, monitor and test sequence of programs
SD
RD
Specifications
Protocol
No. of simultaneous open connections
Interface
Connector
Max. transfer rate
Cable
5 V DC
Power supply
24 V DC
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
FX2NC-ENET-ADP
TCP/IP
1
mm
Art. no.
IEEE802.3u (100BaseTX), IEEE802.3 (10BaseT)
RJ45 (to Ethernet), 3 screw terminals (to ground)
10 Mbit/s
CAT5 STP or 3 STP
135 mA (from base unit)
—
0
19.1 x 90 x 78
157447
Note: When connecting this adapter module to a FX1S or FX1N PLC the communications adapter FX1N-CNV-BD is required. When connecting this adapter module to a FX2N PLC the communications adapter FX2N-CNV-BD is required.
56
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:20:55
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
CC-Link Master and Slave Modules
RUN
ERR.
MST
TEST 1
TEST 2
L RUN
L ERR.
CC-LINK
FX2n-16CCL-M
SW
M/S
PRM
TIME
LINE
SD
RD
FX2N-32CCL
The CC-Link network enables the controlling
and monitoring of decentralized I/O modules at
the machine.
The communication module FX2N-32CCL
enables the user to connect the FX PLC as a
slave on an existent CC-Link network.
The CC-Link master module FX2N-16CCL-M is a
special extension block which assigns an FX
series PLC as the master station of the CC-Link
system.
The buffer memory of the FX2N-32CCL is read
and written by FROM/TO instructions.
The setting of all modules within the network is
handled directly via the master module.
The connection is to the extension bus on the
right-hand-side of the controller.
The FX2N-32CCL can be used by FX1N/FX2N
and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
Up to 15 remote stations and remote device
stations can be connected to the master station
as decentralized I/O stations. These remote stations can be up to 7 I/O modules and up to 8
intelligent modules. 2 master modules can be
connected to one FX1N or FX2N base unit.
The maximum communications distance is
1200 m without repeater.
Specifications
FX2N-16CCL-M
FX2N-32CCL
Module type
Master station
Remote station
I/O points 32
32
register
8
8
Max. number of I/O points
128 (with FX1N PLC), 256 (with FX2N PLC),
384 (with FX3U PLC)*
—
Number of connectable modules
Max. 15
—
Link points per station
5 V DC
—
Max. 130 mA (from base unit)
24 V DC
150 mA
50 mA
Related I/O points
8
8
Dimensions (W x H x D)
85 x 90 x 87
43 x 90 x 87
133596
102961
Power supply
Order information
Art. no.
MICRO CONTROLLERS
LRUN • LERR • RD • SD
Note: Refer to the Network section of this catalog for I/O blocks and power supply units.
*Including I/O points in PLC and network.
Network Module for CANopen
RUN
FROM/TO
The FX2N-32CAN communications module
makes it possible to connect an FX1N, FX2N or
FX3U/FX3UC PLC to an existing CANopen network.
configuration. Up to 120 data words can be sent
and received as process data objects (30 PDOs).
In addition to real-time capabilities and
high-speed data transfer at rates of up to
1Mbit/s the CANopen module also has high
transfer reliability and simple network
Communication with the module’s memory
buffer is performed with simple FROM/TO
instructions.
Tx/Rx
ERROR
POWER
FX2N -32CAN
Specifications
FX2N-32CAN
Module type
CANopen master
CAN standard
ISO 11898/1993
CANopen standard by CiA
DS-301 version 3.0
Additional CANopen features
NMT, Guarding, and Guarding request based on DS-302 V2.0.
network variables based on DS-405 V1.0
Max. nbr. of modules that can be connected to the network
30 without repeater; 127 with repeater
Station numbers
1 – 127
Supported baud rate
Power supply
kBaud
290 mA
24 V DC
—
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:04
10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000
5 V DC
Related I/O points
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
The number of words that can be transmitted in
each direction can be set between 1 and 120.
8
mm
Art. no.
43 x 90 x 88.7
141179
57
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
Active data modules (RS485 and RS232)
FX2NC-485ADP
POWER
RD
FX3U -232ADP
SD
POWER
RD
SD
The addition of active data interface
modules permit active communication between
the PLC and surrounding devices. With RS232
communications this can include printers, bar
code readers, PC’s, PLCs etc. Information can be
sent and received and is handled by the PLC program with the RS instruction.
With RS485 communication can be configured
as either 1:N multidrop, parallel link or peer to
peer operation.
FX3U-232ADP-MB and FX3U-485ADP-MB also
support Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII.
RDA
RDB
kbps
m
FX2NC-232ADP �
RS232C with 9 pin D-SUB
compact plug
(photocoupler isolation)
0.3 – 19.2
15
5 V DC
100 mA (from base unit)
30 mA (from base unit)
24 V DC
mm
—
0
19.1 x 90 x 83
—
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 74
0.3 – 19.2
500
max. 150 mA (from base
unit)
—
0
19.1 x 90 x 78
149110
206190
149111
Specifications
SDA
SDB
Interface
SG
Communication speed*
Max. communication distance
Power supply
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Art. no.
FX3U-232ADP-MB �
RS232 with 9-pin D-SUB
connector;
Modbus RS232C
0.3 – 19.2
15
FX2NC-485ADP �
FX3U-485ADP-MB �
RS485
RS485; Modbus RS485
0.3 – 19.2
500
—
0
17.6 x 90 (106) x 74
206191
20 mA (from base unit)
�
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Application for FX1S/FX1N/FX2N base unit � Application for FX3U/FX3UC base units
* Speed depends on communication method (Parallel link, N:N Network, No protocol, Dedicated protocol etc.)
Note: When connecting these adapter modules to a FX3U, the communications adapter FX3U-CNV-BD is required. When connecting the FX2NC adapters to a
FX1S or FX1N PLC the communications adapter FX1N-CNV-BD is required. When connecting this adapter to a FX2N PLC the communications adapter
FX2N-CNV-BD is required.
Interface adapters
The FX첸첸-232-BD interface adapters provide
an RS232C interface for serial data communications with the MELSEC FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3U.
FX2N-232-BD
JY331B89001C
The interface adapters FX첸첸-485-BD provide
the controller with an additional RS485 interSpecifications
Applicable for
Interface
Power supply
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
face. The adapter, which is simply inserted into
the base unit’s expansion slot, enables the configuration of RS485 1:n multidrop, parallel link or
peer-to-peer networks with
FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3U systems.
FX1N-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
Base units FX1S/FX1N
Base units FX2N
RS232C with 9 pole D-SUB connector
5 V DC / 20 mA (from base unit)
—
—
43 x 38.5 x 22
35 x 54 x 22
—
19.3 x 46.1 x 62.7
130743
65596
165281
Specifications
Applicable for
Interface
FX1N-485-BD
Base units FX1S/FX1N
RS485 / RS422
FX2N-485-BD
Base units FX2N
FX3U-485-BD
Base units FX3U
Power supply
5 V DC / 60 mA (from base unit)
—
43 x 38.5 x 22
—
35 x 54 x 22
5 V DC / 40 mA
(from base unit)
—
19.6 x 46.1 x 69
130742
65597
165283
Order information
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
mm
Art. no.
FX3U-232-BD
Base units FX3U
Digital and analog extension adapter
•
BY0+ BY0- BY1+ BY1-
FX1N-2EYT-BD
Two different digital and analog extension
adapters are available at a time for direct
Specifications
Applicable for
Function
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
58
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:15
mm
Art. no.
intallation in the base unit controllers of the
FX1S and FX1N series.
FX1N-4EX-BD
Base units FX1S/FX1N
4 digital inputs
43 x 38.5 x 22
FX1N-2EYT-BD
Base units FX1S/FX1N
2 transistor outputs
43 x 38.5 x 22
FX1N-2AD-BD
Base units FX1S/FX1N
AD converter
43 x 38.5 x 22
FX1N-1DA-BD
Base units FX1S/FX1N
DA converter
43 x 38.5 x 22
139418
139420
139421
139422
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
Communications adapter FX3U-USB-BD
D
SD
This adapter board allows direct USB 2.0 connection to the front of the FX3U base unit for
programming the PLC e.g. via a notebook
which does not have a serial interface.
FX3U-USB-BD
R
Specifications
FX3U-USB-BD
Applicable for
Base units FX3U
Power supply
5 V DC (via base unit)
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
kg
mm
Art. no.
0.02
19.6 x 46,1 x 53.5
139421
Communications adapter FX2N(C)-CNV-IF
The FX2N-CNV-IF interface adapter allows standard FX expansion units and special function
modules to be connected to a FX1N or FX2N
base unit.
Thus the adapter provides the compatibility
between a FX1N/FX2N PLC and former FX series
modules or special function modules.
Specifications
FX2N-CNV-IF
FX2NC-CNV-IF
Applicable for
Base units FX1N/FX2N
Base units FX2NC
General specifications
Conforms to FX1N/FX2N/FX2NC base units
Power supply
Not necessary
Related I/O points
FX2N -CNV-IF
0
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
MICRO CONTROLLERS
MITSUBISHI
The FX2NC-CNV-IF interface adapter allows
FX0N-/FX2N-/FX3U series special function
modules to be connected to an FX3UC base
unit.
kg
mm
Art. no.
0,15
23 x 140 x 45
14.6 x 90 x 74
65599
104508
Communications adapter
The FX첸N-CNV-BD adapters enable the connection of the FX첸첸-첸첸첸ADP special function
FX2N-CNV-BD
JY331B89201B
modules to the left-hand side of the FX1N, FX2N,
FX3U or FX3UC series base units.
Specifications
FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2N-CNV-BD
FX3U-CNV-BD
Applicable for
Base units FX1S/FX1N
Base units FX2N
Base units FX3U/FX3UC
General specifications
Conforms to FX1N/FX2N base units
Power supply
Not necessary
Related I/O points
Dimensions (W x H)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
Conforms to FX3U/FX3UC base units
0
0
0
43 x 38 x (D) 14
54 x 35
19.6 x 46.1 x 53.5
130745
65598
165285
Power supply modules
To enhance the power supply of a FX3U or
FX3UC base unit, discrete power supply
modules are available.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:23
For detailled informations please refer to the
power supplies chapter in this catalogue.
59
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
Display module FX1N-5DM
MITSUBISHI
ESC
The display module is inserted directly into the
FX1S and FX1N series controllers and enables monitoring and editing of the data stored in the PLC.
+
-
OK
Specifications
Applicable for
Display
Power supply
Current consumption
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mA
mm
Art. no.
The display module e.g. can be used instead of
digital switches and external 7-segment displays
in very confined areas.
FX1N-5DM
Base units FX1S/FX1N
LCD (with backlight)
5 V DC ±5 % (from base unit)
110
40 x 32 x 17
129197
Control and display panel FX3U-7DM, holder FX3U-7DM-HLD
The FX3U-7DM display module can be incorporated in the main unit, or can be installed in the
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Specifications
Applicable for
Display
Resolution
Power supply
Current consumption
Extension cable
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mA
mm
Art. no.
enclosure using the FX3U-7DM-HLD display
module holder.
FX3U-7DM
Base units FX3U
16 letters x 4 lines
—
5 V DC (from base unit)
20
—
48 x 35 x 11.5
FX3U-7DM-HLD
Base units FX3U
—
—
—
—
Included
66.3 x 41.8 x 13
165268
165287
Memory cassettes for FX1S, FX1N and FX2N
8L
PLC
WR
ON
PROTECT
SW
RD
8L
PLC
OFF
All FX1S, FX1N and FX2N base units are equipped
with a slot for the optional, robust FX memory
cassettes. By connection of these memory cassettes, the internal memory of the controller is
switched off and only the program specified in
the respective memory cassette is run.
and the Mitsubishi Electric frequency inverters
of the series FR-S500, FR-E500 and FR-A500.
The FX2N-ROM-E1 technically corresponds to
the FX-EEPROM-16.
The FX2N-ROM-E1 memory module simplifies
the direct communication between the FX2N
Specifications
Applicable for
Memory type
Size
Protect switch
Data transfer buttons
Order information
Art. no.
FX-EEPROM-8
Base units FX2N
EEPROM
8,000 steps
Provided
Not provided
FX1N-EEPROM-8L
Base units FX1S/FX1N
EEPROM
2,000/8,000 steps
Provided
Provided
FX-EEPROM-16
Base units FX2N
EEPROM
16,000 steps
Provided
Not provided
FX2N-ROM-E1
Base units FX2N
EEPROM
16,000 steps
Not provided
Not provided
23826
130746
65600
141528
Memory cassettes for FX3U
The memory cassette can be installed in the
main unit, and when installed, the memory cassette’s internal program is used in place of the
internal RAM memory.
Specifications
Applicable for
Number of steps
Memory type
Protect switch
Data transfer buttons
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
60
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:30
mm
Art. no.
The FX3U-FLROM-64L features additional data
transfer buttons.
FX3U-FLROM-16
Base units FX3U
16,000
Flash memory
Provided
Not provided
37 x 20 x 6.1
FX3U-FLROM-64
Base units FX3U
64,000
Flash memory
Provided
Not provided
37 x 20 x 6.1
FX3U-FLROM-64L
Base units FX3U
64,000
Flash memory
Provided
Provided
37 x 20 x 6.1
165278
165279
165280
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MICRO CONTROLLERS ///
The ALPHA 2 Series
Alpha base units
-
+
(A)
(B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DC INPUT
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
POWER
24V DC
The Alpha 2 brings the benefits of the
Alpha closer to the functionality of a Micro
PLC. A program capacity of 200 functions
and 38 function blocks including mathematical operations, PWM,1KHz high speed
counter and SMS text messaging, along
with a wide operating temperature
(-25 to 55°C) open up new possibilities
in all areas of building and industrial automation.The large back lit screen features
display options including bar graphs and
scrolling text. Optional extension units
canincrease the I/O by 4 points of digital
I/O. Features include:
15
MITSUBISHI
ESC
OK
AL2-24MR-D
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Expandable with transistor and relay
output options
Analog input/output
High Speed counters up to 1 kHz
GSM function for communication with
mobile phones
Multi language support for 8 different
languages
Specifications
Electrical specifications
Integrated inputs/outputs
Digital inputs
Analog inputs
Channels
Integrated outputs
Max. power consumption
Typ. power
All I/Os
consumption
ON /OFF
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
AL2-10MR-A
10
6
—
—
4
W 4.9
3.5/1.85 240 V AC
W
3.0/1.55 120 V AC
kg 0.2
mm 71.2 x 90 x 55
Art. no.
163515
AL2-10MR-D
AL2-14MR-A
AL2-14MR-D
AL2-24MR-A
AL2-24MR-D
10
6
6
6
4
4.0
14
8
8
8
6
7.5
0.3
124.6 x 90 x 52
24
15
—
—
9
7.0
5.5/2.5 240 V AC
4.5/2.0 120 V AC
0.35
124.6 x 90 x 52
24
15
8
8
9
9.0
0.2
71.2 x 90 x 55
14
8
—
—
6
5.5
4.5/2.0 240 V AC
3.5/1.5 120 V AC
0.3
124.6 x 90 x 52
163516
164867
164868
164869
164870
2.5/0.75
4.0 / 1.0
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Base Units with 10 – 24 I/Os
5.0 / 1.0
0.3
124.6 x 90 x 52
Power supplies with DIN-rail or wall mounting possibility for powering the 24 V DC modules (refer to the power supply chapter in this catalogue);
IP40 mounting frame AL-FRAME-20-IP40, art. no.: 132333; IP54 mounting frame AL-FRAME-20-IP54, art. no.: 132337 for AL2-14/24
IP40 mounting frame AL-FRAME-6/10-IP40, art. no.: 132332; IP54 mounting frame AL-FRAME-6/10-IP54, art. no.: 132335 for AL2-10
Accessories
AS interface module AL2-ASI-BD
The Actuator Sensor Interface module
AL2-ASI-BD in combination with an ALPHA
2 controller facilitates the data communications via an AS interface system. The
AL2-ASI-BD is attached to an ALPHA 2
series module and forms a slave unit. Up to
4 inputs and 4 outputs can be exchanged
with the AS Interface master.
ASI+ ASI-
The addresses of the slave devices are
assigned either automatically via the
master in the network or via a programming device (software).
Specifications
Module type
Number of I/O points
External power supply
External current consumption
Communications protocol
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
For the AS-Interface a separate power supply is required. The communication signal
is superimposed on the power supply of
the AS-Interface bus.
Note: The AL2-ASI-BD cannot be used with
the AL2-10MR series.
AL2-ASI-BD
Slave module
4 inputs, 4 outputs
30.5 V DC (AS interface power supply)
mA Max. 40
AS Interface standard
kg 0.05
mm 53.1 x 90 x 24.5
Art. no.
142525
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:37
The maximum communication distance is
100 m without a repeater. If 2 repeaters are
used, the distance is extended to up to 300 m.
61
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MICRO CONTROLLERS
Digital extension modules
EO2
EO1
There are 4 different extension modules
available for the ALPHA 2, which allow the
controller to be extended through additional inputs or outputs. The modules are
inserted directly into the ALPHA 2 and
therefore do not take up any additional
space.
RELAY
OUTPUT
MITSUBISHI
The AL2-4EX has the additional feature that
2 inputs may be used as high-speed counters with a counting frequency of 1 kHz.
All modules feature photocoupler isolation
for all I/Os.
4EYR
EO4
EO3
Digital extension modules specifications
Inputs
Integrated inputs
Input voltage
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Input current
Outputs
Integrated outputs
Output type
Switched voltage (max.)
V
Rated current
A
Electrical specifications
Power Supply
AC range (+10 %, -15 %)
Mechanical specifications
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm
Order information
Art. no.
AL2-4EX-A2
AL2-4EX
AL2-4EYR
AL2-4EYT
4
220–240 V AC
7.5 mA at 240 V AC (50 Hz),
9.0 mA at 240 V AC (60 Hz)
4
24 V DC (+20%, -15%)
—
—
—
—
5.4 mA ±1 mA at 24 V DC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
Relay
250 V AC, 30 V DC
2 A per output
4
Transistor
5–24 V DC
1 A per output
220–240 V AC
24 V DC
100–240 V AC
24 V DC
53.1 x 90 x 24.5
53.1 x 90 x 24.5
53.1 x 90 x 24.5
53.1 x 90 x 24.5
142522
142521
142523
142524
Note: EI1 and EI2 of the AL2-4EX can be used as high-speed counter inputs. In each case the response time for the high-speed counter inputs will be 0.5 ms or less.
The AL2 digital extension modules can not be used with the AL2-10MR series
Analog extension modules
+
-
POWER
24V DC
V1+
V1-
CH1
OUTPUT
V2+
V2-
CH2
0~10V
MITSUBISHI
+
-
V1+
V1-
V2+
V2-
POWER
POWER
24V DC
CH1
OUTPUT
CH2
0~10V
+
MITSUBISHI
POWER
CH2
CH1
-50°C Line
450°C -50°C Line 450°C
V1+
ANALOG
OUTPUT
MITSUBISHI
L1-
I1-
L2+
L2-
I2-
AL2-2TC-ADP
-50~450°C
K-type Thermocouple
2DA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
CH2
V2+
L1-
SLD L2+
L2-
VI1-
CH2
CH1
L1+
I1+
AL2-2PT-ADP
PT100 -50~200°C
L1+
CH1
-
POWER
24V DC
CH2
CH1
-50°C Line
200°C -50°C Line 200°C
I2+ VI2-
SLD
The analog extension modules significantly increase the range of applications
for the ALPHA 2. With these modules it is
possible to output voltage or current signals or to measure temperatures.
Three different analog extension modules
are available:
앬 The AL2-2DA offers two additional analog outputs for the ALPHA 2 and converts a digital input value into a voltage
or a current. This module is inserted
directly onto the ALPHA 2.
앬
앬
The AL2-2PT-ADP connects an external
Pt100 sensor to convert temperature
readings into analog signals (0 – 10 V).
The AL2-2TC-ADP connects thermocouple
sensors (K type) to convert temperature
readings into analog signals (0 – 10 V).
Analog extension modules specifications
Analog inputs
Integrated inputs
AL2-2DA
AL2-2PT-ADP
AL2-2TC-ADP
—
Connectable temperature sensors
—
Compensated range
Analog outputs
Integrated outputs
—
2
Pt100 sensor
Temp. coefficient 3.850 ppm/°C (IEC 751)
-50 – +200 °C
2
Thermocouple (K type), isolated type
(IEC 584-1 1977, IEC 584-2 1982)
-50 – +450 °C
2
0 – 10 V DC (5 k⏲ – 1 M⏲)
4 – 20 mA (max. 500 ⏲)
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
24 V DC (-15 – +10 %), 70 mA
2
24 V DC (-15 – +20 %), 1 W
2
24 V DC (-15 – +20 %), 1 W
53.1 x 90 x 24.5
35.5 x 90 x 32.5
35.5 x 90 x 32.5
151235
151238
151239
voltage
current
Electrical specifications
Number of channels
Power Supply
Mechanical specifications
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Analog output
range
Order information
mm
Art. no.
Note: The AL2-2DA module can not be used with the AL2-10MR series
62
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:44
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
HMI ///
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACES
HMI Control Units Facilitate Communication Between Operator and Machine
HMI control units make systems and their
functions transparent, facilitating a processoriented dialogue between operators and
machine. They enable the user to monitor and
change their parameters as required. Installation is simple as the HMI units are installed
directly at the machine, with no additional
modules required for connection to the PLC.
All the information required is at your fingertips, providing maximum transparency for all
system processes and with an IP65 rating
(IP67 for GOT1000) the HMIs can be used
under heavy-duty conditions.
and the GOT range.These HMIs can be text or
graphic and key or touch based.
The graphs below are showing the full range of
both main ranges of HMIs.
Mitsubishi offers two ranges of Human
Machine Interfaces (HMI), the E Series range
GOT Range
of functions and simple touchscreen operation
give users everything they want and need.
HMIs
The GOT series is the ultimate in control unit
quality and performance. The impressive array
E Series Range
The E Series is a superb example of successful
industrial design. Users can select between
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:47
small easy text terminals and high-end touch
terminals.
63
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// HMI
HMI Control Units for Human-Machine Communication
앬
GOT series
Mitsubishi Electric has once again set new standards in human-machine communication with
their new GOT1000 series of touch-screen operation terminals. Providing the features customers
have been asking for was a top priority in the
design of these units – combined with
advanced technology and the experience
drawn from other series. The result is products
that will make work easier for programmers and
service staff as well as operators.
HMIs
The terminals are outstandingly user-friendly.
The capabilities of the GOT1000 series really
become apparent when they are used in combination with Mitsubishi Electric’s MELSEC controllers – whether compact PLCs or modular
systems like the advanced System Q platform –
or as human-machine interfaces (HMI) for servo
amplifiers or frequency inverter drives.
앬 The high-resolution screens with 256 or even
up to 65,536 colours can also display complex graphics
앬 Fast USB port on the front of the units with
transparent mode to MELSEC Controllers,
servo amplifiers and frequency inverters
Compact Flash cards to transfer and save
project data and operation system updates
앬 Unicode enables display of all international
languages
앬 Online language-switching up to 10 different
languages
앬 Optional interfaces for Ethernet,
Melsecnet/10, CC-Link as well as additional
RS232C and RS422
The control units are programmed with
the GT Designer2 software package running on
a PC under MS Windows®.
The following interfaces are possible on
E series HMI units
앬 RS422/RS232C/RS485
앬 Profibus/DP
앬 Ethernet TCP/IP
Programming the E Series range of HMIs is
done with the E Designer programming software on a PC running Windows 98 or above.
For the GOTs, the programming software is
GT Designer2, which runs on any standard
Windows PC.
Drivers for the E series HMI can be easily
updated over the Internet. Data communications over longer distances via modems is also
possible. This means you can monitor and edit
your configuration, programs and data from
the comfort of your desk.
E series
The most important benefits for the E series
include:
앬 user-friendly text
앬 control parameters
앬 data editing
앬 alarm handling
앬 recipes
앬 menu operation
앬 international characters are supported
Mitsubishi’s HMIs can support a large range of
international character sets. Like all products in
the MELSEC range, the HMI units have CE
approval.
All units are applicable for all MELSEC PLC systems
and all major third party PLC manufacturers.
F920GOT
-BBD
F930GOT
-BBD
F930GOT
-BWD-E
F940GOT
-LWD-E
F940GOT
-SWD-E
F940GOT
-LBD-H-E
F940GOT
-SBD-H-E
F940WGOT
-TWD-E
GT1020
GT1030
GT1150(HS)
-QLBD
Text blocks
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Touch screen
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Graphic blocks
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Colour display
쏹
쏹
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
—
—
—
3rd party connectivity
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Network capability
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
GOT series
GT1155(HS)
-QSBD
GT1550
-QLBD
GT1555-QSBD/
-QTBD/-VTBD
GT1562
-VNBA/-VNBD
GT1572
-VNBA/-VNBD
GT1575
-VNBA/-VNBD
GT1565
-VTBA/-VTBD
GT1575
-VTBA/-VTBD
GT1575(V)
-STBA/-STBD
GT1585
-STBA/-STBD
GT1595
-XTBA/-XTBD
Text blocks
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Touch screen
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Graphic blocks
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Colour display
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
3rd party connectivity
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Network capability
—
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
GOT series
E series
E50
E100
E150
E200
E300
E410
E600
E610
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
Text blocks
E615
Touch screen
—
—
—
—
—
쏹
Graphic blocks
—
—
—
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Colour display
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
쏹
3rd party connectivity
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Network capability
—
—
—
—
쎻
쏹
쎻
쎻
쎻
E series
E1012/E1022
E1032
E1041
E1043
E1060
E1061
E1063
E1070
E1071
E1100
E1101
E1151
Text blocks
쏹
쏹
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Touch screen
—
—
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
Graphic blocks
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Colour display
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
3rd party connectivity
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Network capability
쎻
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹 = available
쎻 = optional
64
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:21:49
— = not available
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
HMI ///
F920GOT-BBD
F3
F4
F5
8
9
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
-
.
1
2
3
0
+/-
.
DEV
F940GOT-LWD-E/-SWD-E,
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F6
7
SET
F930GOT-BWD-E
ESC
ENT
The F920GOT-BBD is a fully graphical 2-colour operation terminal.
The combination of a numerical
keypad plus definable function
keys offers a high degree of functionality. The 128kB of flash memory ensures that all data is secured
and saved in the case of power
failure.
SET
ESC
DEV
ENT
The F930GOT-BBD is a graphical
2-colour operation terminal. The
combination of a numerical keypad plus definable function keys
offers a high degree of functionality.
The 256 kB of flash memory
ensures that all data is secured
and saved in the case of power
failure. The F930GOT-BBD is
equipped with an integrated
touch display, for those who wish
to combine the use of both a keyboard terminal with a
touch-screen .
POWER
This entry-level F930GOT- BWD-E
touch screen offers a simple
monochrome graphical display in
a compact housing. The combination of touch screen and IP65
design makes the unit easy to
keep clean in environments that
need a high level of hygiene or
cleanliness. User screens can be
created using a wide variety of
graphical elements and stored in
the onboard, 256 kB memory.
Other special functions include
alarm processing, recipe handling
and data sampling.
Building on the F930 specifications,
the F940GOT-첸WD-E features a doubling of screen size and resolution
making the display crisp and easy to
view. The F940GOT-SWD-E provides
the additional benefit of a colour
screen. The F940WGOT-TWD-E unit
offers a bright, clear 256 colour TFT
display which can be used in both a
split screen configuration and in
landscape or portrait mounting positions. The unit also boasts a further
doubling of memory, over the standard F940, to 1MB.
F920GOT-BBD
F930GOT-BBD
F930GOT-BWD-E
F940GOT-LWD-E /
F940GOT-SWD-E
F940WGOT-TWD-E
type
STN, 2-colours, backlit
LCD, 2-colours, backlit
STN, monochrome
LCD, monochrome /
LCD, 8-colours
TFT, 256 colours, backlit
dimensions (mm)
60 x 30
117 x 42
117 x 42
115 x 86 (5.7")
155.5 x 87.8
text (lines x characters)
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
character height (mm)
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
graphical resolution (pixels)
128 x 64
240 x 80
240 x 80
320 x 240
480 x 234
Power supply
5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
Internal memory capacity
128 kB
256 kB
256 kB
512 kB
1 MB
Memory card slot
—
—
—
—
—
Keyboard type
Membrane
Membrane/Touch-panel
Touch-panel
Touch-panel
Touch-panel
6 (user assignable) +numerical
keyboard with 12 keys
6 (user assignable) + numerical
keyboard with 12 keys
Touch keys
(max. 50 keys/screen)
Touch keys
(max. 50 keys/screen)
Touch keys
(max. 50 keys/screen)
Specifications
Display unit
Function keys
internal
external
—
—
—
—
—
—
8 (green)
—
1 (Power ON)
1 (Power ON)
RS232C, RS422
RS232C, RS422
RS232C, RS422
RS232C, RS422
2 x RS232C, 1 x RS422
Interface slot for optional cards
1
1
1
1
—
Real-time clock
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
type
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
max. no. of nodes
4
4
4
4
4
LED indicators
Interfaces
Network communication possibilities
serial
IP Rating (front panel)
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
106 x 134 x 35.5
168 x 183 x 37.5
146 x 75 x 49
162 x 130 x 57
215 x 133 x 70.6
Weight (kg)
Order information
Art. no.
Accessories
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:22:00
0.3
0.6
0.3
1.0
0.8
146508
146721
128789
113862 / 113841
136797
Programming software (refer to page 5), cables and interface adapters (refer to page 73)
65
HMIs
F2
F1
F930GOT-BBD
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// HMI
GT1020,
GT1030
GT1150-QLBD,
GT1155-QSBD
GT1150HS-QLBD,
GT1155HS-QSBD
GT1550-QLBD/GT1555-QSBD/
GT1555-QTBD/GT1555-VTBD
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
POWER
MITSUBISHI
HMIs
The new micro GOTs GT1020 and
GT1030 offer a broad spectrum of
display functions on the STN 3.7“
or 4.5“ monochrome monitor; the
tri-colour background illumination (two colour versions) are additional eye-catchers.
Recipe management, alarming
and messaging are included as
standard. The unit has a built-in
memory for up to 4000 16-bit data
words which can be used to store
or exchange data with a connected PLC.
The GT11 panels GT1150-QLBD and
GT1150HS-QLBD(16colours) as well
as the GT1155-QSBD and
GT1155HS-QSBD (256 colours) are
the standard models of the
GOT1000 series and offer a full
array of basic functions for
stand-alone use.
Beside their outstanding speed
and performance they offer a
modern design and a first on the
market front USB port for project
download and PLC maintenance.
The GT1550 and GT1555 models
provide an exceptionally clear 5.7 “
display comprising 16 grey scale
steps over 4096 colours up to
65536 colours and full VGA resolution (640 x 480 pixles).
Mitsubishi Electric Controllers,
inverters and servo amplifiers can
be easily programmed via the
transparent USB functionality.
Windows fonts are utilized for
clear text presentation as well as
CF card interface for project operation systems and data storage are
available.
All GT11 terminals feature recipes,
alarms, multi-language and
Unicode support.
Furthermore they offer various
graphical object libraries.
The GT1020-LBD/-LBL have a
RS422 and a RS232 port and the
GT1020-LBD2 has a RS232 port
only.
The panels can be mounted and
used horizontally or vertically.
GT1020-LBL/-LBD/-LBD2/LBLW/-LBDW/-LBDW2
GT1030-LBD/-LBD2/-LBDW/-LBDW2
GT1150-QLBD /
GT1155-QSBD
GT1150HS-QLBD /
GT1155HS-QSBD
GT1550-QLBD / GT1555-QSBD /
GT1555-QTBD / GT1555-VTBD
type
STN, monochrome
QL: STN, 16 grayscales
QS: STN, 256 colours
QL: STN, 16 grayscales
QS: STN, 256 colours
STN monochrome / STN 4096 colours /
TFT, 65536 colours
dimensions (mm)
86.4 x 34.5 (3.7") / 109.4 x 36 (4.5")
115 x 86 (5.7")
115 x 86 (5.7")
115 x 86 (5.7")
text (lines x characters)
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
character height (mm)
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
graphical resolution (pixels)
160 x 64 / 288 x 96
320 x 240
320 x 240
320 x 240 / VTBD: 640 x 480
Specifications
Display unit
The GT1150HS-QLBD and
GT1155HS-QSBD are handsome
portable terminals that boast top
level quality for medium sized terminals. They share the same functions as all GT11 series terminals.
Power supply
GT1020: 5 V DC / 24 V DC / 24 V DC,
GT1030: 24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
Internal memory capacity
512 kB / 1.5 MB
3 MB
3 MB
9 MB
Memory card slot
—
1 (CF)
1 (CF)
1 (CF)
Touch-panel
Keyboard type
Function keys
Touch-panel
Touch-panel
Touch-panel
internal
Touch keys
Touch keys
Touch keys + 6 function keys
Touch keys (300 per screen)
external
—
—
—
—
—
1 (Power ON)
1 (Power ON)
1 (Power ON)
serial
RS232, RS422 / 2 x RS232
RS232C, RS422 (2ch)
RS232C, RS422 (1ch)
RS232
parallel
—
—
—
—
others
—
USB (at front panel)
USB (top)
USB (at front panel)
LED indicators
Interfaces
Interface slot for optional cards
—
—
—
2
Real-time clock
—
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Ethernet (TCP/IP), CC-Link, RS422,
A-Bus, Q-Bus, MELSECNET/10
Network communication possibilities
type
Serial
Serial
—
max. no. of nodes
2
2
—
IP Rating (front panel)
IP67
IP67F
IP67F
IP67F
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
113 x 74 / 145 x 76
164 x 135 x 56
176 x 220 x 93
167 x 135 x 60
Weight (kg)
0.2 / 0.3
0.7
1.0
1.1
Order information
200738 / 200491 / 200492 / 208670 / 208668 / 208669
206969 / 206970 / 206971 / 206972
162709 / 162710
170180 / 170181
203472 / 203471 / 203470 / 209823
Accessories
66
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:22:11
Art. no.
Programming software (refer to page 5), cables and interface adapters (refer to page 73)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
HMI ///
GT1562-VNBA/VNBD,
GT1565-VTBA/VTBD
GT1572-VNBA/VNBD,
GT1575-VNBA/VNBD
GT1575-VTBA/VTBD,
GT1575-STBA/STBD,
GT1575V-STBD
GT1585-STBA/STBD,
GT1595-XTBA/XTBD,
GT1585V-STBD
POWER
The proprietary operating system
as well as the completely new
developed hardware result in an
outstanding performance and
quality of the GT15 operator terminals. The user can choose between
several fast project up- and download options; high-speed serial
connection with 115 kBaud, USB
or project transfer via CF-card is
available.
Specifications
Display unit
Power supply
type
dimensions (mm)
text (lines x characters)
character height (mm)
graphical resolution (pixels)
A types
D types
Internal memory capacity
Memory card slot
Keyboard type
Function keys
internal
external
LED indicators
serial
parallel
others
Interface slot for optional cards
Real-time clock
Network communicatype
tion possibilities
IP Rating (front panel)
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
Weight (kg)
Interfaces
Order information
Art. no.
Accessories
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:22:22
POWER
In addition, the GT15 offer
Ethernet project transfer via the
Ethernet interface
GT15-J71E71-100.
MELSEC PLCs can easily be programmed using the front USB port
with integrated Transparent
Mode, so updates on PLCs, servo
amplifiers, inverters and GOT terminals can be accomplished without opening the cabinet.
The file system of the CF card is PC
compatible. Projects and operating system components can be
downloaded to the CF card. The
GT15 can load the files from the CF
card. This is a cruical advantage for
manufacturers of serial machines.
In terms of networks, the GT15 are
especially powerful with options
for MELSECNET/10/H, CC-Link and
Ethernet as well as the
four-driver-concept (4 drivers at
the same time and the possibility
of data exchange via gateway
between the drivers as well as
third party manufacturers).
The new Video models
GT1585V-STBD and
GT1575V-STBD additionally support video/RGB input to monitor
images from PC's, cameras and
vision sensors directly on the GOT.
All GT15 operator terminals listed
on this page are available as AC
type ( models*)
or as DC type ( models).
*Not for the video models
TFT, 16 colours / 256 colours
211 x 158 (10.4")
User definable
User definable, Windows fonts
640 x 480
100 – 240 V AC
24 V DC
GT1575-VTBA / GT1575-STBA
GT1575-VTBD / GT1575-STBD,
GT1575V-STBD
TFT, 65536 colours (expandable)
211 x 158 (10.4")
User definable
User definable, Windows fonts
640 x 480 / 800 x 600
100 – 240 V AC
24 V DC
GT1585-STBA / GT1595-XTBA
GT1585-STBD / GT1595-XTBD,
GT1585V-STBD
TFT, 256 colours (expandable)
246 x 185 (12.1") / 304 x 228 (15")
User definable
User definable, Windows fonts
800 x 600 / 1024 x 768
100 – 240 V AC
24 V DC
5 MB (expandable up to 53 MB)
9 MB (expandable up to 57 MB)
9 MB (expandable up to 57 MB)
1 (compact flash 256 MB max.)
Touch-panel
Touch keys
—
1
RS232C
—
USB (on panel front)
1
Integrated
Ethernet (TCP/IP), CC-Link, RS422,
A-Bus, Q-Bus, MELSECNET/10
IP67
303 x 214 x 56
2.3
1 (compact flash 256 MB max.)
Touch-panel
Touch keys
—
1
RS232C
—
USB (on panel front)
2
Integrated
Ethernet (TCP/IP), CC-Link, RS422,
A-Bus, Q-Bus, MELSECNET/10
IP67
303 x 214 x 56
2.3 / 2.4
1 (compact flash 256 MB max.)
Touch-panel
Touch keys
—
1
RS232C
—
USB (on panel front)
2
Integrated
Ethernet (TCP/IP), CC-Link, RS422,
A-Bus, Q-Bus, MELSECNET/10
IP67
316 x 242 x 56 / 397 x 296 x 61
2.8 / 4.9
166241 / 166242
169482 / 169483
162706 / 162707 / 169484 / 169485,
video model 203496
162708 / 169464 / 169486 / 203469,
video model 203495
GT1562-VNBA / GT1565-VTBA
GT1562-VNBD / GT1565-VTBD
GT1572-VNBA / GT1575-VNBA
GT1572-VNBD / GT1575-VNBD
TFT, 16 colours / 65536 colours
171 x 128 (8.4")
User definable
User definable, Windows fonts
640 x 480
100 – 240 V AC
24 V DC
VNtypes:5MB(expandableupto53MB)
VTtypes:9MB(expandableupto57MB)
1 (compact flash 256 MB max.)
Touch-panel
Touch keys
—
1
RS232C
—
USB (on panel front)
1/2
Integrated
Ethernet (TCP/IP), CC-Link, RS422,
A-Bus, Q-Bus, MELSECNET/10
IP67
241 x 150 x56
1.9
166240 / 162705
169480 / 169481
HMIs
POWER
POWER
Programming software (refer to page 5), cables and interface adapters (refer to page 73)
67
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// HMI
E50
E100
E150
E200
150
-.
0
F1
F2
F3
F1
1
F2
2
F3
3
F4
4
5
F4
PREV
NUM
6
7
8
9
0
HMIs
The E50 is a key-oriented HMI unit
with four function keys. It can display up to 50 text blocks, which
can be paged with the function
keys. Values can be edited directly
with the unit’s keyboard. The
RS232C and RS422 ports are both
integrated in a 25-pin connector.
Specifications
Display unit
The E100 has programmable function keys with freely definable
labels and alternating function
assignment. Recipes, passwords
and changes can be entered via
input keys. The unit has one
RS232C port and a RS422 port,
which can be connected to either
two PLCs or a PLC and a printer,
bar code reader or other RS232
devices.
9
7
8
4
5
6
1
2
3
The E150 display features programmable function keys with
definable labels and numerical
keypad. Recipes, passwords and
editing changes can all be entered
and edited directly with the units
keyboard. The unit has one
RS232C port and one RS422 port
for flexible communication.
The E200 display offers programmable function keys with freely
definable labels and alternating
function assignment. LEDs indicate the process status. Recipes,
passwords, texts, alarms and
changes can be entered via input
keys. The E200 posseses one
RS232C port and a RS422 port,
which can be connected to
various other devices.
E50
E100
E150
E200
type
LCD, mono, backlit
LCD, mono, backlit
LCD, mono, backlit
LCD
dimensions (mm)
55.7 x 100
73.5 x 11.5
73.5 x 11.5
70.4 x 20.8
text (lines x characters)
2 lines x 16 characters
2 lines x 20 characters
2 lines x 20 characters
2 lines x 20 characters
character height (mm)
5
5 (user definable)
5 (user definable)
5 (user definable)
—
—
—
—
Power supply
graphical resolution (pixels)
5 V DC (± 5 %)
5 V DC (± 5 %)
5 V DC (± 5 %)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
Internal memory capacity
16 kB
64 kB
64 kB
64 kB
External memory card
—
—
—
—
Keyboard type
Membrane
Membrane
Membrane
Membrane
internal
4
4
6 (user assignable)
+ numerical keyboard with 12 keys
5 (user assignable)
+ numerical keyboard with 12 keys
external
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 (2 colours: red, green)
serial
RS232C, RS422 (via adapter)
RS232C, RS422
RS232C, RS422
RS232C, RS422
parallel
—
—
—
—
others
—
Modbus (via optional adapter)
Modbus (via optional adapter)
Modbus (via optional adapter)
Real-time clock
—
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Networkcommunication type
possibilities(optional)
max. no. devices
Modbus
Modbus, serial
Modbus, serial
Modbus, serial
(serial = 4)
(serial = 4)
(serial = 4)
IP Rating (front panel)
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
104 x 69 x 38
142 x 90 x 29
142 x 100 x 29
147 x 163,5 x 38
Weight (kg)
0.2 kg
0.25 kg
0.5 kg
0.7 kg
129590
88413
135935
69344
Function keys
LED indicators
Interfaces
Interface slot for optional cards
Order information
Accessories
68
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:22:35
Art. no.
Programming software E-Designer (refer to page 6), cables and interface adapters (refer to page 73)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
HMI ///
E410
E600
E610,
E615
N
am
Ty e:
pe
:
The E300 has a key-oriented user
interface with programmable
function keys. The graphical
screen can display symbols,
alarms, graphs and texts in a variety of sizes. Recipes, passwords,
texts, alarms, and changes can be
entered via input keys. The unit
has one RS232C port and a RS422
port as well as an optional slot for
communication and expansion
cards.
Specifications
N
am
Ty e:
pe
:
The new E410 offers built-in
Ethernet and advanced functionality features, including web technology – yet takes up only a handful of space.
The terminal features a monochrome touch sensitive display
with a resolution of
320 x 240 pixels.
E300
The E600 monochrome display
with screen-oriented function
keys provides user-friendly operation. In addition to historical
graphs this controller can also
display symbols, alarms and texts.
Recipes, texts, and changes can be
entered via input keys. The unit
has one RS232C port and a RS422
port as well as an optional slot for
communication and expansion
cards.
E410
The E610 features a touch sensitive display that supports
16 greyscales with a resolution of
320 x 240 pixels. The E615 has a
256 colours graphic display with
touch screen.
Applications can be programmed
to use the display in either horizontal or vertical mode. To handle
the communication, there is an
RS232C, an RS485 and an RS422
interface on board and one
optional slot for communication
expansion cards.
E600
E610 / E615
type
LCD, mono, backlit
LCD, mono, backlit
LCD, mono, backlit
LCD, backlit
16 grayscales / 256 colours
dimensions (mm)
127.2 x 33.9
79 x 60
120 x 64
115.2 x 86.4
text (lines x characters)
4 (8) lines x 20 (40) characters
User definable
16 lines x 40 characters
User definable
character height (mm)
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
graphical resolution (pixels)
—
320 x 240
—
320 x 240
Power supply
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
Internal memory capacity
400 kB (expandable)
400 kB
400 kB (expandable)
400 kB (expandable)
1 (PCMCIA card 4 or 8 MB)
Display unit
External memory card
1 (PCMCIA card 4 or 8 MB)
1 (PCMCIA card 4 or 8 MB)
1 (PCMCIA card 4 or 8 MB)
Keyboard type
Membrane
Touch-panel
Membrane
Touch-panel
8 (user assignable)
+numerical keyboard with 12 keys
—
16 (user assignable)
+numerical keyboard with 12 keys
—
Function keys
internal
external
LED indicators
Interfaces
Max. 128 (optional with IFC-128/E)
Max. 128 (optional with IFC-128/E)
Max. 128 (optional with IFC-128/E)
Max. 128 (optional with IFC-128/E)
16 (2 colours: red, green)
1 (Power ON)
16 (2 colours: red, green)
1 (Power ON)
serial
RS232C, RS422
RS232C, RS422, RS485
RS232C, RS422
RS232C, RS422, RS485
parallel
Optional with IFC-PI
Optional with IFC-PI
Optional with IFC-PI
Optional with IFC-PI
others
Ethernet, Profibus, Modbus
(via optional adapter)
Built-in Ethernet
Ethernet, Profibus, Modbus
(via optional adapter)
Ethernet, Profibus, Modbus
(via optional adapter)
Interface slot for optional cards
1
1
1
1
Real-time clock
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Network communication possibilities
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus,
Profibus/DP (all optional)
Max. 4 terminals to one PLC
Ethernet TCP/IP integrated,
Modbus, Profibus/DP (optional);
Max. 4 terminals to one PLC
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus,
Profibus/DP (all optional);
Max. 4 terminals to one PLC
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus,
Profibus/DP (all optional);
Max. 4 terminals to one PLC
IP Rating (front panel)
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
212 x 198 x 69
142 x 90 x 43.5
214 x 232 x 69
200 x 150 x 70
Weight (kg)
1.5
1.7
1.6
1.7
64458
156317
104496
135945 / 135946
Order information
Art. no.
Accessories
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:22:46
Programming software E-Designer (refer to page 6), cables and interface adapters (refer to page 73)
69
HMIs
E300
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// HMI
E1012 / E1022
E1032
E1041 / E1043
E1060
E1061 / E1063
9
7
8
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
4
5
6
MNOP
QRST
UVWX
1
2
3
YZ!?
C1-C4
+/*=
PREV
7
8
ABCD
EFGH
9
IJKL
4
5
6
MNOP
QRST
UVWX
.
_'@,
NEXT
ALARM
ACK
è
1
2
3
YZ!?
C1-C4
< >()
-
5
+/*=
°%#
ü
è
ç
HOME
NEXT
ALARM
ACK
PREV
< >()
5
°%#
HOME
ç
ü
.
_'@,
6
HMIs
E1012, E1022 and E1032 have
programmable function keys
and a separate keypad. The
graphic-capable displays illustrate
symbols, alarms, line diagrams
and text in arbitrary sizes. Formulae, text and changes in the
sequence program can be done
directly via the keys.
Specifications
Display unit
The E1041 and E1043 terminals
have a 3.5" TFT touch screen
(65,536 colours or 16 grayscales).
Recipes, text and editing changes
are entered via keys. Password
levels protect the system against
unauthorised access, while sixteen
separate alarm groups keep you
informed on all-important developments. The unit features two
PLC ports, a USB host port to connect mouse, keyboard, printer and
USB memory as well as an integrated Ethernet interface.
Profibus/DP is available via a
separate extension module.
The E1060 colour display with
65,536 colours and screenoriented function keys provides
user-friendly operation.
Recipes,text and editing changes
are entered via keys. Password
levels protect the system against
unauthorised access, while sixteen
separate alarm groups keep you
informed on all-important developments. The unit features two
PLC ports, a USB host port to
connect mouse, keyboard, printer
and USB memory as well as an
integrated Ethernet interface.
Profibus/DP is available via a
separate extension module.
The E1061 and E1063 terminals
have a 5.7" STN touch screen
(65,536 colours or 16 grayscales).
Recipes, text and editing changes
are entered via keys. Password
levels protect the system against
unauthorised access, while sixteen
separate alarm groups keep you
informed on all-important developments. The unit features two
PLC ports, a USB host port to connect mouse, keyboard, printer and
USB memory as well as an integrated Ethernet interface.
Profibus/DP is available via a
separate extension module.
E1012 / E1022
E1032
E1041 / E1043
E1060
E1061 / E1063
type
LCD monochrome
LCD monochrome
TFT colour / TFT grayscale
User definable
STN colour / STN monochrome
dimensions (mm)
89.6 x 17.9 / 90.2 x 24.0
135 x 36
75 x 54 (3.5")
120 x 91 (5.7")
145 x 110 (5.7")
text (lines x characters)
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
character height (mm)
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
graphical resolution (pixels)
320 x 240
160 x 32 / 240 x 64
240 x 64
320 x 240
320 x 240
Power supply
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
Internal memory capacity
512 kB
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
32 MB (Intel Strata Flash)
Flash memory
—
32 MB (Intel Strata Flash)
32 MB (Intel Strata Flash)
32 MB (Intel Strata Flash)
Keyboard type
Membrane
Membrane
Touch-panel
Membrane
Touch-panel
internal
6
8
Touch keys
16
Touch keys
external
—
—
—
—
—
6 (integrated in keys)
16 (8 integrated in keys)
1 (Power ON)
16 (8 integrated in keys)
1 (Power ON)
serial
RS232C, RS422/RS485
RS232C, RS422/RS485
RS232C, RS422/RS485
RS232C, RS422/RS485
RS232C, RS422/RS485
parallel
—
—
—
—
—
others
USB
Function keys
LED indicators
Interfaces
—
USB
USB
USB
Interface slot for optional cards
1
1
1
1
1
Real-time clock
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Network communication possibilities
Ethernet (TCP/IP) (optional)
Ethernet (TCP/IP), Modbus TCP,
MPI (all integrated);
Profibus/DP (optional)
Ethernet (TCP/IP), Modbus TCP,
MPI (all integrated);
Profibus/DP (optional)
Ethernet (TCP/IP), Modbus TCP,
MPI (all integrated);
Profibus/DP (optional)
Ethernet (TCP/IP), Modbus TCP,
MPI (all integrated);
Profibus/DP (optional)
IP Rating (front panel)
IP 66
IP 66
IP 66
IP 66
IP 66
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
155 x 114 x 40 / 155 x 155 x 41
202 x 187 x 63
156 x 119 x 63
275 x 168 x 63
201 x 152 x 63
Weight (kg)
0,4 / 0,5
0,9
0,56
1,1
0,87
202084 / 202085
169297
169298 / 169299
169300
169301 / 169302
Order information
Accessories
70
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:23:03
Art. no.
Programming software E-Designer (refer to page 6), cables and interface adapters (refer to page 73)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
HMI ///
E1070 (Pro+)
E1071 (Pro+)
E1100 (Pro+)
E1101/E1151 (Pro+),
DT1151
9
7
8
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
7
8
ABCD
EFGH
9
IJKL
4
5
6
4
5
6
UVWX
MNOP
UVWX
QRST
QRST
MNOP
1
2
3
1
2
3
YZ!?
C1-C4
< >()
YZ!?
C1-C4
< >()
.
-
5
.
-
5
+/*=
°%#
_'@,
+/*=
°%#
_'@,
HOME
NEXT
HOME
NEXT
ALARM
ACK
ALARM
ACK
è
ç
PREV
ç
PREV
è
ü
ü
The operator terminal
offers
a 6.5" TFT display with 65,536
colours and a resolution of 640 x
480 pixels. 16 freely programmable function keys facilitate the
inputs directly at the terminal.
The operator terminal
offers
a 10.4" TFT display with 65,536
colours and a resolution of 800 x
600 pixels. Freely programmable
function keys facilitate the inputs
directly at the terminal.
The 6.5" TFT colour display of the
with 65,536 colours provides a user-friendly touch screen
operation. Recipes, text and editing changesare entered via touch
keys.
The operator terminals
and
provide a user-friendly TFT
colour touchscreen. The E1101
offers a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels on a 10" screen, the E1151 provides a 15" screen with 1024 x
768 pixels.
Specifications
Display unit
E1070 / E1070 Pro+
All E1000 operator terminals on
this page provide two PLC ports, a
USB host port to connect mouse,
keyboard, printer and USB memory as well as an integrated
Ethernet interface. Profibus/DP is
available via a separate extension
module.
Using an E1000 Pro+ operator terminal gives the user all the functionality of the standard E1000
family but also makes it possible
to view external files such as PDF
files, HTML pages and PowerPoint
presentations directly on the
screen of the operator terminal.
The internal memory of 12 MB can
be expanded.
The DT1151 is an industrial monitor with a 15" TFT-LCD touch
screen, designed to be mounted
in a cabinet and connected to an
industrial PC.
The monitor is optimized for a
maximum resolution of 1024 x
768 pixels.
The integrated password protection protect the system against
unauthorised access, and sixteen
separate alarm groups keep you
informed on all-important developments.
E1071 / E1071 Pro+
E1100 / E1100 Pro+
E1101 / E1101 Pro+,
E1151 / E1151 Pro+, DT1151
type
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
dimensions (mm)
134 x 100 (6.5")
134 x 100 (6.5")
211 x 158 (10.4")
211 x 158 (10") , 304 x 228 (15")
text (lines x characters)
User definable
User definable
User definable
User definable
character height (mm)
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
User definable, Windows fonts
graphical resolution (pixels)
800 x 600 , 1024 x 768
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
Power supply
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
24 V DC (20 – 30 V)
Internal memory capacity
12 MB (expandable)
12 MB (expandable)
12 MB (expandable)
12 MB (expandable)
2 (compact flash 4 – 1024 MB)
Memory card (intern./extern.)
2 (compact flash 4 – 1024 MB)
2 (compact flash 4 – 1024 MB)
2 (compact flash 4 – 1024 MB)
Keyboard type
Membrane
Touch-panel
Membrane
Touch-panel
16 (8 with integrated LEDs)
Touch keys
20 (10 with integrated LEDs)
Touch keys
Function keys
internal
external
LED indicators
Max. 64 (optional with MAC-E-Key16)
Max. 64 (optional with MAC-E-Key16)
Max. 64 (optional with MAC-E-Key16)
Max. 64 (optional with MAC-E-Key16)
18
1 (Power ON)
20
1 (Power ON)
serial
RS232C, RS422, RS485
RS232C, RS422, 485
RS232C, RS422, RS485
RS232C, RS422, 485
parallel
—
—
—
—
others
USB
USB
USB
USB
Interface slot for optional cards
1
1
1
1
Real-time clock
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
Network communication possibilities
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus TCP, MPI
(all integrated); Profibus/DP (optional)
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus TCP, MPI
(all integrated); Profibus/DP (optional)
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus TCP, MPI
(all integrated); Profibus/DP (optional)
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus TCP, MPI
(all integrated); Profibus/DP (optional)
Interfaces
IP Rating (front panel)
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
285 x 177 x 62
219 x 154 x 61
382 x 252 x 64
302 x 228 x 64 , 398 x 304 x 60
Weight (kg)
1.3
1.1
2.3
2.0 / 3.7
156096 / 203301
156097 / 203302
156098 / 203303
156099 / 203334 ,
156100 / 203225, DT1151: 203326
Order information
Art. no.
Accessories
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:23:20
Programming software (refer to page 5), cables and interface adapters (refer to page 73)
71
HMIs
7
6
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
HMIs
/// HMI
IPC-MC1121
IPC-MC1151
IPC-VP1151
IPC-VP1171
Personal computers are a part of
everyday life as Industrial PCs are a
part of automation and process
control.
The ETX technology permits scalable CPU performances for a wide
range of industrial applications.
Ruggedly designed for heavy-duty
industrial applications and environments, these PCs feature high
quality, fast performance, attractive design and brilliantly legible
displays.
A wide operating and storage
temperature range, tough vibration resistance and high IP ratings
mean these IPCs can be used in
locations users could never consider before.
The CANopen, DeviceNet or
Profibus field buses can optionally
be integrated directly on board of
the V panels.
The new IPC1000 line based on
ETX technology offers supreme
computing performance with processors based on Intel‘s Celeron/
Pentium® M technology giving
extremely low power consumption.
Specifications
The integrated innovative cooling
concept realizes passive and
fanless cooling for the highest
processor performance but at the
same time reducing one of the
major moving parts that could fail.
IPC-MC1121
IPC-MC1151
IPC-VP1151
type
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
dimensions (mm)
12.1"
15"
15"
17"
graphical resolution
(pixels)
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
Power supply
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
Processor type
Intel Celereon 800 MHz
Intel Celereon 800 MHz
Intel Pentium M370 1.5 GHz
Intel Pentium M370 1.5 GHz
Operating system
Windows XP Professional
Windows XP Professional
Windows XP Professional
Windows XP Professional
Internal memory capacity
512 MB RAM
512 MB RAM
512 MB RAM
512 MB RAM
Screen type
Resistive analog touch-panel
Resistive analog touch-panel
Resistive analog touch-panel
Resistive analog touch-panel
Integrated harddisk
40 GB
40 GB
40 GB
40 GB
1 (Power ON)
Display unit
LED indicators
IPC-VP1171
1 (Power ON)
1 (Power ON)
1 (Power ON)
serial
1 x RS232C
1 x RS232C
2 x RS232C
2 x RS232C
others
2 x USB (2 x rear side)
2 x USB (2 x rear side)
5 x USB (1 x front; 4 x rear side)
5 x USB (1 x front; 4 x rear side)
LAN network interface
1 x 10/100
1 x 10/100
1 x 10/100, 1 x 100/1000
1 x 10/100, 1 x 100/1000
Free card slots
—
—
2 x PCI, PCMCIA slot optional
2 x PCI, PCMCIA slot optional
Cooling
Fanless
Fanless
Fanless
Fanless
Field busses
CANopen or DeviceNet or Profi bus
CANopen or DeviceNet or Profi bus
CANopen or DeviceNet or Profi bus
CANopen or DeviceNet or Profi bus
Internal Drives
CompactFlash, HDD optional
CompactFlash, HDD optional
CompactFlash, HDD optional
CompactFlash, HDD optional
IP Rating
IP65 (front)
IP65 (front)
IP65 (front)
IP65 (front)
Operating temperature range
0 – 50 °C
0 – 50 °C
0 – 50 °C
0 – 50 °C
Storage temperature range
-20 – +60 °C
-20 – +60 °C
-20 – +60 °C
-20 – +60 °C
Operating humidity range
20 – 85 % (no condensation)
20 – 85 % (no condensation)
20 – 85 % (no condensation)
20 – 85 % (no condensation)
Interfaces
Vibration resistance
1 G: resistant to vibrations from 10 – 500 Hz along all 3 axes (acc. to EN 60068-2-6)
Dimensions WxHxD (mm)
380 x 300 x 53
452 x 362 x 57
450 x 354 x 158
461 x 399 x 166
204305
204306
204307
204308
Order information
Art. no.
72
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:23:40
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
HMI ///
Interface Adapters and Cables
The HMI communications and interface
adapters support connection directly to a
PLC or directly to a network.
Adapter type (use)
MELSEC A-Bus interface
MELSEC Q-Bus interface
Ethernet RJ45
Serial interface
CC-Link interface
For all GOT and E series operator terminals
a wide variety of different cables are
available.
MELSECNET/10
USB
Interface name
GT15-75ABUSSL
GT15-ABUS
GT15-75ABUS2SL
GT-15ABUS2
GT15-75QBUSSL
GT15-QBUS
GT15-75QBUS2SL
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-J71E71-100
GT15-RS2-9P
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-TS
GT15-RS2T4-25P
GT15-J61BT13
GT15-75J71 BT13-Z
GT15-75J71LP23-Z
GT15-PRN
Application
GT15 (1 channel), slim model
GT15 (1 channel), standard model
GT15 (2 channels), slim model
GT15 (2 channels), standard model
GT15 (1 channel), slim model
GT15 (1 channel), standard model
GT15 (2 channels), slim model
GT15 (2 channels), standard model
GT15
GT15 (serial interface RS232, 9-pin D-Sub)
GT15 (converter RS232 -> RS422; 9-pin D-Sub)
GT15 (serial interface RS422/485, 9-pin D-Sub)
GT15 (serial interface RS422/485, screw terminals)
GT15 (converter RS232 -> RS422; 25-pin D-Sub)
GT15
GT15 (for coaxial connection)
GT15 (for optical SI cable)
GT15 (for USB connection to pictbridge compatible printers)
Order number
166243
169467
166304
169468
166305
169465
166306
169466
166309
169469
166307
169470
169471
166308
203494
166311
166312
170169
HMIs
All cables and interfaces have to be
ordered separately due to the specific
application. The following table shows an
overview of the available cables.
Operator terminal Interface
Cable name
Connector
Application
Available length (m)
F900GOT
RS232
FX-232-CAB1
D-SUB male connector 9 pin <–> D-SUB male connector 9 pin
Personal Computer
3
124972
F900GOT
A9GT-RS2/RS232
QC30R2
D-SUB male connector 9 pin <–> MINI-DIN male connector 6 pin
MELSEC System Q
3
128424
F900GOT
RS422
FX-40DU-CAB/EN
D-SUB male connector 9 pin<–> D-SUB male connector 25 pin
MELSEC A/Q series
3
62503
F900GOT
RS422
FX-50DU-CAB0/EN
D-SUB male connector 9 pin<–> MINI-DIN male connector 8 pin
MELSEC FX family
3
E series
RS422
CAB 18 (MAC40 CPU-CAB-R4)
D-SUB male connector 25 pin<–> D-SUB male connector 25 pin
MELSEC A/Q series
3, 5, 7, 10, 15
146855 (3m)
E series
RS422
CAB 19 (FX-20P-CAB/EN)
D-SUB male connector 25 pin<–> MINI-DIN male connector 8 pin
MELSEC FX family
1, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15
146861 (3m)
E series
RS232
CAB 5(MAC-PC-CAB-R2)
D-SUB female connector 9 pin<–> D-SUB female connector 9 pin
Personal Computer
2.5
E series
RS232
CAB16
D-SUB male connector 9 pin<–> MINI-DIN male connector 6 pin
MELSEC System Q
3
140461
E series
RS422
CAB17
D-SUB male connector 25 pin<–> MINI-DIN male connector 6 pin
MELSEC System Q
3
140422
E1000
RS232
CAB30
D-SUB female connector 9 pin<–> D-SUB female connector 9 pin
Personal Computer
3
163002
E1000
RS232
CAB34/3
D-SUB male connector 9 pin<–> MINI-DIN male connector 6 pin
MELSEC System Q
3
163006 (3m)
E1000
RS422
CAB36
D-SUB male connector 25 pin <-> D-SUB male connector 9 pin
Siemens S7/MPI direct
3
205178
GT10
RS232
GT01-C30R2-6P
Mini-DIN male connector 6-pin <-> D-SUB male connector 9 pin
Personal Computer
3
163959
GT10
RS422
GT10-C30R4-8P
Open terminals <-> MINI-DIN male connector 8 pin
MELSEC FX family
3
200494
GT10
RS232
GT10-C30R2-6P
Open terminals <-> MINI-DIN male connector 6 pin
MELSEC System Q
3
200498
GT10
RS232
GT10-RS2TUSB-5S
Mini-DIN male connector 6-pin <-> MINI-B USB
PC + GT09-C20USB-5P
3
200500 +166373
GT11, GT15
RS232
FX-232-CAB1
D-SUB male connector 9 pin <–> D-SUB male connector 9 pin
Personal Computer
3
124972
GT11, GT15
USB
GT09-C20USB-5P
USB <–> USB
GT11, GT15
RS232
GT01-C30R2-6P
D-SUB male connector 9 pin<–> MINI-DIN male connector 6 pin
GT11, GT15
RS232
GT01-C30R2-9S
GT11, GT15
RS422
GT01-C
GT15
RS422
GT15
Q(A)nS Bus
GT15
A Bus, QnA Bus
System Q Bus
GT15
70451
124265
2
166373
3
163959
D-SUB male connector 9 pin <–> D-SUB male connector 9 pin
MELSEC FX family
3
D-SUB female connector 9 pin<–> MINI-DIN female connector 8 pin
MELSEC FX family
1, 3, 10, 20, 30
GT01-C첸첸첸R4-25P
D-SUB female connector 25pin <–> D-SUB female connector 25 pin
MELSEC A/Q series
3, 10, 20, 30
163953 (3m)
GT15-A1SC첸첸B
Special Bus connector
MELSEC (Q)AnS series
0.7, 1.2, 3, 5
166358 (3m)
GT15-C첸첸첸NB
Special Bus connector
GT15 via AnA-/QnA-Bus
0.7, 1.2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30
166371 (3m)
GT15-QC첸첸첸B
Special Bus connector
MELSEC System Q
0.6, 1, 3, 5, 10
166348 (3m)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:23:47
MELSEC System Q
Order number
R4-8P
163957
163948 (3m)
73
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
FREQUENCY INVERTERS
Mitsubishi's comprehensive range of frequency
inverters offers a wealth of benefits for the user,
making it easy to choose the perfect solution for
every drive application. With most Mitsubishi
Frequency Inverters an overload capacity of
200 % is standard. This means they deliver double the performance of the competing inverters
with the same rating. Mitsubishi Electric inverters also have active current limiting. This provides the perfect response characteristics of
the current vector system and gives you the confidence you need for demanding drive applications.
Feature
FR-D700
Mitsubishi inverters are real energy savers
achieving maximum drive capacity utilisation
with minimum power consumption. Flux optimisation ensures that the connected motor
only gets exactly the amount of magnetic flux
required for optimum efficiency. This is particularly important at low speeds as motors are normally using a voltage/frequency control system.
The system instantly identifies over currents and
limits them automatically with its fast response,
allowing the motor to continue operating normally at the current threshold.
Mitsubishi inverters are also able to communicate with industry standard bus systems like
Profibus/DP, DeviceNet, CC-Link, CANopen,
LON Network, RS 485/Modbus RTU making it
possible to integrate frequency inverters as part
of a complete automation system.
FR-S500E
FR-E700
FR-E500
FR-F700
FR-A700
Hz
A
V
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
MON P.RUN
PU
EXT
Hz
A
V
NET
FWD
REV
PU
EXT
REV
FWD
MODE
SET
STOP
RESET
FR-DU07
MITSUBISHI
FR-S500
PU
EXT
EXT
NET
FWD
REV
FWD
SET
STOP
RESET
FR-DU07
MITSUBISHI
RUN
RUN
STOP
RESET
MODE
EXT
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
RUN
PU
MON P.RUN
PU
REV
PU
EXT
MODE
STOP
RESET
MITSUBISHI
FR-F 700
FR-A 700
MITSUBISHI
SET
!
!
and electric shock
DANGER: Risk of injuryfollow the safety instructions before use.
Read the manual and
removing this cover.
wait 10 minutes before
Isolate from supply and
Ensure proper earth connection
CAUTION: Risk of fire a non-combustible surface.
Mount the inverter on
!
!
and electric shock
DANGER: Risk of injuryfollow the safety instructions before use.
Read the manual and
removing this cover.
wait 10 minutes before
Isolate from supply and
Ensure proper earth connection
CAUTION: Risk of fire a non-combustible surface.
Mount the inverter on
400V
400V
FR–A740–2.2K
INVERTER
FR–F740–2.2K
Rated motor output range
0,1–7,5 kW
0.2–3.7 kW
0,4–15 kW
0.4–7.5 kW
0.75–630 kW
0.4–630 kW
Frequency range
0,2–400 Hz
0.5–120 Hz
0,2–400 Hz
0.2–400 Hz
0.5–400 Hz
0.2–400 Hz
Power supply
Single phase,
200–240 V (-15 %/+10 %)
Three-phase,
380–480 V (-15 %/+10 %)
Single phase,
200–240 V (-15 %/+10 %)
Three-phase,
380–480 V (-15 %/+10 %)
Three-phase,
380–480 V ( -15 %/+10 %)
Single phase,
200–240 V (-15 %/+10 %)
Three-phase,
380–480 V (-15 %/+10 %)
Three-phase,
380–480 or 500 V (-15 %/+10
%)
Three-phase,
380–480 or 500 V (-15 %/+10
%)
Protection
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
FR-F700: IP 00 / IP 20
FR-F746: IP54
IP 00 / IP 20
앫 V/f control
앫 Sensorless vector control
앫 Brake transistor
앫 Safety stop function
Special functions
control
앫 Brake transistor
앫 Safety stop function
앫 V/f control
conforming EN 954-1 Cat3
conforming EN 954-1 Cat3
앫 Torque limit
앫 Ext. brake control
앫 Flying start
앫 Remote I/O
앫 Maintenance timer
앫 Energy saving control
(Optimum exitation control)
앫 Maintenance timer
Three Phase
Single Phase
Specifications
Refer to page 76
S520SE
0.2 – 1.5 kW
E520S
0.4 – 2.2 kW
S540E
0.4 – 3.7 kW
E540/D740
0.4. – 7.5 kW
E740
0.4 – 15 kW
Refer to page 77
Refer to page 78
F740
F746
앫 Traverse function
앫 Switch motor to direct
앫 V/f control
앫 Real sensorless vector
앫 V/f control
앫 Magnetic flux vector control
Refer to page 79
mains
operation
앫 Advanced PID function
(multi pump function)
앫 Regeneration avoidance
function
앫 Flying start
앫 V/f control
앫 Simple magnetic flux vector
control
앫 Life time diagnostics
Refer to page 80
앫 Torque control
앫 Positon control
앫 Real sensorless vector
control
앫 Closed loop vector control
앫 Traverse function
앫 Regeneration avoidance
function
앫 Integrated PLC function
앫 Easy gain tuning
앫 Life time diagnostics
Refer to page 82
0.75 – 630 kW
Larger kW ratings available up to 900kW
on request
0.4 – 630 kW
Larger kW ratings available up to 900kW
on request
0.75 – 55 kW
A740
0 kW
74
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:24:19
55 kW
630 kW
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
Intelligent Motor Control Functions
Compatible with numerous I/Os
앬
앬
앬
PID control
The integrated PID control for example
supports a flow control for pumps.
Torque boost
Torque boost selection is possible.
앬
앬
Comprehensive protection
functions for safe operation
앬
앬
Built-in electronic overcurrent protection
Selection of the protection function for automatic retry after alarm occurence.
앬
앬
Operating functions and other
convenient functions
Flexible 5-point V/f curve
The integrated flexible 5-point V/f curve enables you to match the torque curve perfectly
to the characteristics of your machine.
앬
앬
앬
V/f characteristic
앬
Voltage
V/F5
V/f pattern
앬
Frequency jumps (three points) to avoid the
machine's resonant frequency
Fast acceleration/deceleration mode
Full monitoring capabilities for monitoring
actual operating time and much more
Switch between two sets of motor
characteristics by means of a second
parameter function
Zero current detection
V/F4
V/F3
V/F1
V/F2
0
Multi-speed operation
(15 different pre-selected speeds
are available)
0/4 to 20 mA and 0 to 5 V DC /
0 to 10 V DC control input
Multi-input terminals: selection of different
input functions
Multi-output terminals: selection of
different output functions
24 V external power supply output
(permissible values: 24 V DC/0.1 A)
Torque
characteristic
Base frequency
Magnetic flux vector control
The integrated flux vector control (except
FR-S500E) of the inverters system makes it
possible to achieve high torques, even at low
motor speeds.
High accuracy/fast response speed operation
by vector control can be performed with a
general-purpose motor without encoder
when the real sensorless vector control of the
FR-A700 inverter series is used.
When the FR-A7AP is mounterd to the FR-A700,
full-scale vector control operation can be
performed using a motor with encoder. Fast
response/high accuracy speed control (zero
speed control, servo lock), torque control, and
position control can be performed. Vector
control offers excellent control characteristics
when compared to V/F control and other control techniques, achieving the control characteristics equal to those of DC machines.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:24:28
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failures
In pump and fan applications normal operation
can be continued automatically after brief
power failures. The system simply reactivates
the coasting motor and automatically accelerates it back up to its setpoint speed.
The graphic below shows how the frequency
inverter can respond to a brief power outage.
Instead of coasting down completely and stopping, the motor is automatically "caught" by the
frequency inverter and re-accelerated back up
to its previous speed.
Power supply
IPF
Output frequency
Deceleration
Restart
acceleration
Second electronic thermal function
Maintenance timer
This function is used to rotate two motors of
different rated currents individually by a single
inverter.
The maintenance timer function (except
FR-E500) can be used to monitor the
service life of different components.
INVERTER
Compatible with many new applications
Regeneration avoidance function
The regeneration avoidance function of the
FR-F700 and FR-A700 can prevent the inverter
from being shut down by regenerative overvoltages when strong regenerative loads cause
power to be released into the frequency inverter (for example when braking the motor
or with loads that actively drive the motor).
The inverter can automatically increase the
output frequency or disable the braking ramp
when a programmed threshold value is
reached. The response sensitivity, dynamics
and working range are all adjustable.
For example, this function can prevent
a shutdown with an overvoltage error
when the speed of a fan controlled by the
inverter is increased by the draft from another
fan operating in the same ventilation duct.
The function then temporarily increases the
output frequency above the setpoint value.
This function can also be used to brake loads
with the DC bus voltage, without using braking
modules.
75
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
FR-D700
The ultra compact FR-D700 series frequency converters excel through their
very simple operation whilst still providing many functions.
MITSUBISHI
The spring clamp controller connections
version enables simple and fast set-up of
the frequency inverter.
The FR-D700 is equipped with a safety
stop function.
The small dimensions render the
FR-D700 series frequency inverters ideal
for use in restricted spaces. New functions such as intermediate circuit control
of the ouput frequency, the dancer roll
control or the traverse function,
Product line
Output
INVERTER
Input
Controlspecifications
Control
signals for
operation
Others
facilitate universal use in numerous
applications such as
앬 Pumps
앬 Fans
앬 Presses
앬 Conveyor belts
앬 Industrial washing machines
앬 Automatic shelf systems
The frequency inverters FR-D720S EC are
for single-phase use 200 to 240 V AC.
The FR-D740 EC frequency inverters are
designed for 3-phase connections 380 to
480 V AC.
FR-D720S EC
FR-D740 EC
008
014
025
042
070
100
012
022
036
050
080
120
160
Applicable motor capacity 햲
kW 0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
Rated capacity 햳
kVA —
—
—
—
—
—
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.6
7.2
9.1
13.0
Rated current
A 0.8
1.4
2.5
4.2
7.0
10.0
1.2
2.2
3.6
5.0
8.0
12.0
16.0
Overload capacity 햴
150 % of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 200 % for 0,5 s
Voltage 햵
3phase, 0 V up to power supply voltage
Power supply voltage
1phase, 200–240 V AC, -15 %/+10 %
3phase, 380–480 V AC, -15 %/+10 %
Voltage range
170–264 V AC at 50/60 Hz
325–528 V AC at 50/60 Hz
Frequency range
50 / 60 Hz ± 5 %
50 / 60 Hz ± 5 %
Rated input capacity 햶
kVA —
—
—
—
—
—
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9.5
12
17
Control method
V/f control, optimum excitation control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Modulation control
Sine evaluated PWM, Soft PWM
PWM switching frequency
kHz 0.7–14.5, user adjustable
Frequency range
Hz 0.2–400
Possible starting torque
³ 150 % / 1 Hz (for vector control oder slip compensation)
Torque boost
Manual torque boost
Acceleration / deceleration time
0.1 to 3600 s
Acceleration / deceleration
Linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode selectable
characteristics
BremsDC braking
Operating frequency: 0–120 Hz, operating time: 0–10 s, voltage: 0–30 % (externally adjustable)
moment
Motor protection
Electronic motor protection relay (rated current user adjustable)
Frequency setting signal
0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC, 0/4–20 mA, From control panel (parameter unit). Frequency setting increment is selectable.
Any of 5 signals can be selected using parameters 178 to 182 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed selection, remote setting, second function selection, terminal 4 input
selection, JOG operation selection, PID control valid terminal, external thermal input, PU-external operation switchover, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection,
Input signals
traverse function selection, forward rotation, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PU-NET operation switchover, external-NET operation switchover, command source
switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and PU operation external interlock
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forOperation functions
ward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, second function, multi-speed operation, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), optimum excitation control, power failure stop, speed smoothing control, Modbus-RTU
Can be selected usign parameters 190 and 192 (output termnal function selection): inverter operation, up-to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative
brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID foroperation status
Output
ward/reverse rotation output, fan alarm, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, PID output interruption, during retry,
signals
life alarm, current average value monitor, remote output, alarm output, fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm
analog signal
0–10 V DC
68 x 128 x 68 x 128 x 68 x 128 x 68 x 128 x 108 x 128 x 140 x 150 x 108 x 128 x 108 x 128 x 108 x 128 x 108 x 128 x 108 x 128 x 220 x 150 x 220 x 150 x
Dimensions (WxHxD)
80.5
80.5
142.5
162.5
155.5
155.5
80.5
80.5
80.5
80.5
80.5
155
155
Order informat ion
Art. no.
214189
214190
214191
214192
214193
214194
212414
212415
212416
212417
212418
212419
212420
Remarks:
햲
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
햳
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
햴
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current.
For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
햵
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the pulse voltage value
of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about Ö2 that of the power supply.
햶
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
76
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:24:37
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
FR-S500E Micro Inverters
MITSUBISHI
FR-S500
RUN
PU
PU
EXT
EXT
RUN
STOP
RESET
MODE
SET
These frequency inverters are available
with outputs from 0.2 to 1.5 kW for operation with single-phase 200 to 240 V AC
power supply (FR-S 520SE EC) or 0.4 to
3.7 kW with three-phase 380 to 480 V AC
power supply (FR-S 540E EC).
Product line
Output
Input
Controlspecifications
Applicable motor capacity 햲
Rated capacity
Rated current
Overload capacity 햳
Voltage 햴
Power supply voltage
Voltage range
Frequency range
Rated input capacity 햵
Control method
Modulation control
PWM switching frequency
Frequency range
Possible starting torque
Torque boost
Acceleration / deceleration time
Acceleration / deceleration
characteristics
regenerative
Braking
torque
DC braking
Motor protection
Frequency setting signal
kW
kVA
A
kVA
kHz
Hz
Input signals 2nd function
external thermal input
PID control
Operation functions
Output
signals
Others
operation status
analog signal
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Order informat ion
FR-S520SE EC
FR-S540E EC
-0.2 k
-0.4k
-0.75 k
-1.5 k
-0.4 k
-0.75 k
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
0.4
0.75
0.5
1.0
1.6
2.8
0.9
1.6
1.4
2.5
4.1
7.0
1.2 (1.3)*
2.3 (2.5)*
200 % of rated motor capacity for 0.5 s; 150 % for 1 min. (ambient temperature not higher than 50 °C)
3phase, 0 V up to power supply voltage
1phase, 200–240 V AC, -15 %/+10 %
3phase, 380–480 V AC, -15 %/+10 %
170–264 V AC at 50/60 Hz
325–528 V AC at 50/60 Hz
50 / 60 Hz ± 5 %
50 / 60 Hz ± 5 %
0.9
1.5
2.5
4.4
1.5
2.5
V/f control or automatic torque boost control
Sine evaluated PWM, Soft PWM
0.7–14.5, user adjustable
0.5–120
³ 150 % / 5 Hz (with automatic torque boost)
Manual torque boost; selectable between 0–30 %
0, 0.1 to 999 s (may be set individually for acceleration and deceleration)
-1.5 k
1.5
2.7
3.7 (4.1)*
-2.2 k
2.2
3.7
5.3 (5.8)*
-3.7 k
3.7
5.9
7.7 (8.5)*
4.5
5.5
9.5
Linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode selectable
multi-speed selection
Control
signals for
operation
The ultra-compact frequency inverters
FR-S 500E EC can support numerous applications. Typical applications include:
앬 Material transport systems such as
conveyor belts, chain conveyors,
feed belts, transport belts and worm
conveyors
앬 Saws, millling cutters, grinding and
drilling machines
앬 Pumps
앬 Fans
앬 Door drives
These frequency inverters are available
with outputs from 0.2 to 1.5 kW for operation with single-phase 200 to 240 V AC
power supply (FR-S 520SE EC) or 0.4 to
3.7 kW with three-phase 380 to 480 V AC
power supply (FR-S 540E EC).
INVERTER
The FR-S500 Evolution is the latest generation of the popular FR-S500 inverter. It
offers all of the past advantages such as
the easy to use setting dial but now is
enhanced with RS485 communications
as standard. Other new features include
Automatic restart after power failure, a
new maintenance timer and a second
electronic thermal function.
Art. no.
0.2 k: 150 %; 0.4 k and 0.75 k: 100 %; 1.5 k: 50 %; 2,2 k and 3,7 k: 20 %
Braking time and braking moment adjustable, Operating frequency: 0–120 Hz, operating time: 0–10 s, voltage: 0–15 % (externally adjustable)
Electronic motor protection relay (rated current user adjustable)
0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC, 0/4–20 mA, From control panel (parameter unit), RS-485 or network
Up to 15 speeds can be preset in the range of 0–120 Hz.
The current speed can be adjusted during operation via the control panel.
Selects 2nd function (acceleration time, deceleration time, torque boost, base frequency, electronic overcurrent protection)
Stopping the inverter with an externally mounted thermal relay
Select PID control
Maximum and minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal input selection, instantaneous power failure restart operation, forward run/reverse run
prevention, slip compensation, operation mode selection, PID control, computer link or open network operation
1 output type (open collector output) selectable: Inverter running, frequency reached, frequency detection, overload warning, zero current detection, output current detection,
maximum PID, minimum PID, PID forward run, PID reverse run, operation ready, current average value monitor signal, maintenance timer alarm, minor failure and error.
Instead of the open collector output type 1 relay contact can be selected for the output (230 V AC; 0.3 A / 30 V DC; 0.3 A).
One of the following output types can be selected: Output frequency, motor current, analog output (0–5 V DC with 1 mA full scale).
68 x 128 x 80,5 68 x 128 x 142,5 68 x 128 x 162,5 68 x 128 x 155,5 108 x 128 x 129,5 108 x 128 x 129,5 108 x 128 x 135,5 108 x 128 x 155,5 108 x 128 x 165,5
158459
158460
158461
158462
158463
158464
158465
158466
158467
햲
The specifications of the rated motor capacity are related to a motor voltage of 230 V for 1phase output and 440 V for 3phase output (max. ambient temperature of 50 °C).
The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverters rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperature and 100 % load.
햴
The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the input voltage. The maximum output voltage may be programmed individually, but it must be input voltage.
햵
The input capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
* The values in brackets indicatye the values for an ambient temperature up to 40 °C without restriction of PWM..
햳
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:24:44
77
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
FR-E700
Improved functions and equipment features such as an integrated USB interface,
an integrated “digital dial” with display,
improved efficiency in the low speed
range as well as the possibility of using
one of many option cards such as the
exchangeable I/O cards, for instance, render the FR-E700 a commercial universal
genius for many applications, such as
앬 textile machines
앬 door and gate actuators
앬 elevators
앬 cranes
앬 material handling systems
MITSUBISHI
Product line
Output
INVERTER
Input
Applicable motor capacity 햲
Rated capacity 햳
kVA
Rated current 햴
Overload capacity 햵
Voltage 햶
Power supply voltage
Voltage range
Frequency range
Rated input capacity 햷
kW
A
kVA
Control method
Controlspecifications
Modulation control
PWM switching frequency
Frequency range
Possible starting torque
Torque boost
Acceleration / deceleration time
Acceleration / deceleration
characteristics
Braking
DC braking
torque
Motor protection
Frequency setting signal
kHz
Hz
Others
The output frequency ranges from
0.2 to 400 Hz.
FR-E740 EC
016
0.4
026
0.75
040
1.5
060
2.2
095
3.7
120
5.5
170
7.5
230
11
300
15
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.6
7.2
9.1
13
17.5
23.0
17
23
30
17
20
28
1.6 (1.4)
2.6 (2.2)
4.0 (3.8)
6.0 (5.4)
9.5 (8.7)
12
150 % of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 200 % for 3 s
3phase, 0 V up to power supply voltage
3phase, 380–480 V AC, -15 %/+10 %
325–528 V AC at 50/60 Hz
50 / 60 Hz ± 5 %
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9.5
12
V/f control,
optimum excitation control, general-purpose magnetic flux vector control or advanced magnetic flux vector control
Sine evaluated PWM, Soft PWM
0.7–14.5, user adjustable
0,2–400
³ 200 % / 0.5 Hz (advanced magnetic flux vector control (3.7K or less))
Manual torque boost
0.01 to 360 s, 0.1 to 3600 s (may be set individually for acceleration and deceleration)
Operating frequency: 0–120 Hz, operating time: 0–10 s, voltage: 0–30 % (externally adjustable)
operation status
analog signal
Dimensions (BxHxT)
Order information
The frequency cinverters are desiged for
3-phase connections 380 to 480 V AC
(50/60 Hz).
Electronic motor protection relay (rated current user adjustable)
0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC, 0/4–20 mA, From control panel (parameter unit)
Any of 7 signals can be selected using parameters 178 to 184 (input terminal function selection): You can select from among multi-speed selection, remote setting, stop-on contact selection, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, PID control valid terminal, brake opening completion signal, external thermal input,
PU-external operation switchover, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PU-NET operation
switchover, external-NET operation switchover, command source switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and PU operation external interlock
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, multi-speed operation, stop-on contact control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip
compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485)
Can be selected usign parameters 190 to 192 (output termnal function selection): inverter operation, up-to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative
brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, brake opening request, fan alarm, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry,
life alarm, current average value monitor, remote output, alarm output, fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm
0–10 V DC
140 x 150 x 114 140 x 150 x 114 140 x 150 x 135 140 x 150 x 135 140 x 150 x 135 150 x 220 x 147 150 x 220 x 147 220 x 260 x 190 220 x 260 x 190
Operation functions
Output
signals
The FR-E740 is available in the output
power range 0.4 to 15 kW.
Linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode selectable
Input signals
Control
signals for
operation
Improved speed/power limitation guarantees increased machine protection.
This reliably prevents damage to the
machines.
Art. no.
211955
211956
211957
211958
211959
211960
211961
211962
211963
Remarks:
햲
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
햳
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
햴
The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise operation is to be performed at an ambient temperature higher than 40 °C with the parameter
72 (PWM frequency selection) value set to 2 kHz or higher.
햵
The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverters rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or
below the temperature and 100 % load.
햶
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the pulse voltage value
of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about Ö2 that of the power supply.
햷
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
78
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:24:53
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
FR-E500 Compact Inverters
POWER
ALARM
MITSUBISHI
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
STOP
RESET
RUN
MITSUBISHI
Product line
Ratedmotor
capacity[kW] 햲
Rated current
[A] 햶
Output
Rated output capacity
kVA
Overload
capacity 햳
Input
Control
specifications
Voltage 햴
Power supply voltage
Frequency range
Voltage range
Rated input capacity 햵
kVA
Control method
Carrier frequency
Possible starting torque
Torque boost
Acceleration / deceleration time
Acceleration / deceleration characteristics
regenerative
Braking torque
DC braking
Motor protection
Frequency setting values
Input signals multi-speed selection
2nd function
Input signals
external thermal input
Control
signals for
operation
Operation functions
Output
signals
operation status
analog signal
Others
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
The inverters are available for a performance range of 0.4 to 2.2 kW (1 phase)
and of 0.4 to 7.5 kW (3 phase).
The output frequency ranges from 0.2 to
400 Hz.
FR-E 520S EC
FR-E 540 EC
0.4 k
0.75k
1.5 k
2.2 k
0.4 k
0.75 k
1.5 k
2.2 k
3.7k
5.5 k
7.5 k
0.75
1.1
2.2
3
0.75
1.1
2.2
3
4
7.5
11
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4
5.5
7.5
3.6
5
9.6
12
1.8
3
4.9
6.7
9.5
14
21
2.5
4
7
10
1.6 (1.4)
2.6 (2.2)
4 (3.8)
6 (5.4)
9.5 (8.7)
12
17
0.95
1.5
2.7
3.8
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.6
7.2
9.1
13.0
150 % of rated motor capacity for 0.5 s; 120 % for 1 min. (max. ambient temperature = 50 °C)
200 % of rated motor capacity for 0.5 s; 150 % for 1 min. (max. ambient temperature = 50 °C)
3-phase, 0 V up to power supply voltage
1-phase, 200–240 V AC, -15 %/+10 %
3-phase, 380–480 V AC, -15 %/+10 %
50 / 60 Hz ± 5 %
50 / 60 Hz ± 5 %
170–264 V AC at 50/60 Hz
323–528 V AC at 50/60 Hz
1.5
2.3
4.0
5.2
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9
12
17
Extended flux vector control with online auto tuning of motor data or V/f control
0.7–14.5 kHz (user adjustable)
³ 150 % / 1 Hz, ³ 200 % / 3Hz (for vector control oder slip compensation)
Manual torque boost; selectable between 0–30 %
0.01; 0.1 to 3600 s individual settings
Linear or S-form course, user selectable
0.4 k and 0.75 k: 100 % or more; 1.5 k: 50 % or more; 2.2 k to 7.5 k: 20 % or more
Braking time and braking moment adjustable,
Operating frequency: 0–120 Hz, operating time: 0–10 s, voltage: 0–30 %
Electronic motor protection relay (rated current user adjustable)
0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC, 0/4–20 mA, From control panel (parameter unit), RS-485 or network
Up to 15 set speeds (each speed can be set between 0 and 400 Hz; speed can be changed via control panel or during operation)
Selects 2nd function (acceleration time, deceleration time, torque boost, base frequency, electronic overcurrent protection)
Stopping the inverter with an externally mounted thermal relay
Maximum and minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal input selection, instantaneous power failure restart
operation, forward run/reverse run prevention, slip compensation, operation mode selection, off-line auto tuning function, PID control,
computer link operation (RS485), open network operation
2 output types (open collector output) can be selected: inverter running, frequency reached, frequency detection, overload warning, zero return detection, output current detection, maximum PID, minimum PID, PID forward run, PID reverse run, operation ready, minor failure and error.
1 relay contact can be selected for the output (230 V AC; 0.3 A / 30 V DC; 0.3 A)
One of the following output types can be selected:
output frequency, motor current, output voltage, analog output (0–10 V DC).
140 x 150 x 136
140 x 150 x 156
140 x 150 x 116
140 x 150 x 136
140 x 150 x 148
102938
102939
102940
102941
69197
69198
69200
69201
69204
102942
102943
Remarks:
햲
The specifications of the rated motor capacity are related to a motor voltage of 230 V resp. 400 V.
햳
The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverters rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperature and 100 % load.
햴
The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage.
햵
The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
햶
The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise operation is to be performed at an ambient temperature higher than 40 °C with the parameter 72 (PWM frequency selection) value set to 2 kHz or higher.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:00
79
INVERTER
Due to its versatility and compact dimensions, the FR-E500 EC is a frequency
inverter that can solve most of your individual drive tasks. Its extensive functions
make it a flexible solution for applications such as:
앬 Textile machines such as spinning
machines, knitting machines, weaving
looms
앬 Material transport systems such as
chain, belt, and screw conveyors
앬 Door and gate drives
앬 Machines for working of metal, stone,
wood, and plastics
앬 Palettisers, material-handling
technology
앬 Pumps and ventilating
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
FR-F700 Energy Saving Inverters
Hz
A
V
MON P.RUN
PU
EXT
NET
FWD
REV
PU
EXT
REV
FWD
MODE
SET
STOP
RESET
FR-DU07
Hz
A
V
MON P.RUN
PU
EXT
NET
FWD
REV
PU
EXT
REV
FWD
MODE
SET
STOP
RESET
FR-DU07
FR-F 700
!
!
and electric shock
DANGER: Risk of injuryfollow the safety instructions before use.
Read the manual and
removing this cover.
wait 10 minutes before
Isolate from supply and
Ensure proper earth connection
CAUTION: Risk of fire a non-combustible surface.
Mount the inverter on
400V
FR–F740–2.2K
Rated motor
capacity � [kW]
Rated
current
INVERTER
The FR-F746 with its waterproof structure IP54 is available with outputs from
0.75 – 55 kW.
All the inverters in the series are designed
for connection to 3~ 380 – 480 V/500 V
(50/60 Hz) power supplies.
The output frequency range is 0.5 – 400 Hz
FR-F740 / FR-F746
Series
Output
capacity
00023
00038
00052
00083
00126
00170
00250
00310
00380
00470
00620
00770
00930
01160
120%overloadcapacity(SLD) 햶
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
150% overload capacity (LD)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
2.3
3.8
5.2
8.3
12.6
17
25
31
38
47
62
77
93
116
2.5
4.2
5.7
9.1
13.9
18.7
27.5
34.1
41.8
51.7
68.2
84.7
102.3
127.5
2.8
4.6
6.2
10
15.1
20.4
30
37.2
45.6
56.4
74.4
92.4
111.6
139.2
2.1
3.5
4.8
7.6
11.5
16
23
29
35
43
57
70
85
106
120%
overload
capacity
(SLD) 햶
[A] 햷
150%
overload
capacity
(LD)
I nenn
I max. 60 s
I max. 3 s
I nenn
I max. 60 s
I max. 3 s
SLD 햶
[kVA] LD
Overload current
rating �
Input
The FR-F 740 is available in versions with
outputs from 0.75 – 640 kW.
Air conditioning systems, e.g. in building
management
앬 Air extraction systems
앬 Fans and blowers
앬 Hydraulics systems
앬 Compressors
앬 Sewage and drains systems
앬 Ground water pumps
앬 Heat pumps
앬 Drive systems with high idling rates
MITSUBISHI
Output
These inverters are very user-friendly and
they are available with output ratings
matched to users’ real needs.
Mitsubishi Electric’s FR-F 740 series is a
completely new range of frequency
inverters with truly exceptional power
conservation capabilities. These inverters are ideal for pumps, ventilation fans
and applications with reduced overload
requirements such as:
SLD
2.5
4.2
5.8
9.1
13.8
19.2
27.6
34.8
42
51.6
68.4
84
102
127.2
3.1
5.2
7.2
11.4
17.2
24
34.5
43.5
52.5
64.5
85.5
105
127.5
159
1.8
2.9
4.0
6.3
9.6
13
19.1
23.6
29.0
35.8
47.3
58.7
70.9
88.4
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.8
8.8
12.2
17.5
22.1
26.7
32.8
43.4
53.3
64.8
80.8
120 % of rated motor capacity for 3s; 110 % for 1 min. (max. ambient temperature 40 °C) – typical for pumps and fans
LD
150 % of rated motor capacity for 3s; 120 % for 1 min. (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – typical for conveyor belts and centrifuges
Voltage �
3-phase AC, 0 V to power supply voltage
Frequency range
0.5–400 Hz
Control method
V/f control, optimum excitation control or simple magnetic flux vector control
Modulation control
Sine evaluated PWM, Soft PWM
Carrier frequency
0.7 kHz–14.5 kHz (user adjustable)
Power supply voltage
3-phase, 380–480 V AC, -15% / +10%
Voltage range
323–528 V AC at 50 / 60 Hz
50 / 60 Hz ±5%
Power supply frequency
SLD 햶
Rated input
capacity � [kVA] LD
Cooling
Protective
structure
Others
Power loss
[kW]
5.0
6.1
10
13
19
22
31
37
45
57
73
88
110
2.5
4.5
5.5
9
12
17
20
28
34
41
52
66
80
100
FR-F740
Self cooling
FR-F746
Fan cooling
FR-F740
IP20 햸
FR-F746
IP54
SLD 햶
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.16
0.19
0.24
0.34
0.39
0.49
0.58
0.81
1.0
1.17
1.51
LD
0.05
0.08
0.09
0.14
0.18
0.22
0.31
0.35
0.44
0.52
0.71
0.93
1.03
1.32
Frequency inverter FR-F740
weight [kg]
FR-F746
Fan cooling
IP00
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
6.5
6.5
7.5
7.5
13
13
23
35
35
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
18.5
18.5
21.5
21.5
30
30
30
42
42
156569
156570
156571
156572
156573
156594
156595
156596
156597
156598
156599
Input power frame
169827
169828
169829
Control card FR-CF70-EC
189878
189878
189878
163807
163808
163809
Frequency inverters
햹
2.8
Art. no.
163796
163797
163798
163799
163800
163801
163802
163803
163804
163805
163806
Remarks:
Explanation for 햲 to 햹 see next page.
80
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:12
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
FR-F740
Series
Rated motor capacity [kW] �
Rated current [A] 햷
Output
Input
Output capacity [kVA]
02160
02600
03250
03610
04320
04810
05470
06100
06830
07700
08660
09620
10940
12120
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962
1094
1212
198
238
286
357
397
475
529
602
671
751
847
953
1058
1203
1333
216
259
312
390
433
518
577
656
732
820
924
1039
1154
1313
1454
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962
1094
173
216
259
312
390
433
518
577
656
732
820
924
1039
1154
1313
216
270
324
390
487
541
648
721
820
915
1024
1155
1299
1443
1641
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
733
834
924
110
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
733
834
Overload current rating �
120 % of rated motor capacity for 3s; 110 % for 1 min. (max. ambient temperature 40 °C) – typical for pumps and fans
Voltage �
3-phase AC, 0 V to power supply voltage
Frequency range
0.5–400 Hz
Control method
V/f control, optimum excitation control or simple magnetic flux vector control
150 % of rated motor capacity for 3s; 120 % for 1 min. (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – typical for conveyor belts and centrifuges
Modulation control
Sine evaluated PWM, Soft PWM
Carrier frequency
0.7 kHz–6 kHz (user adjustable)
Power supply voltage
3-phase, 380–500 V AC, -15% / +10%
Voltage range
323–550 V AC at 50 / 60 Hz
Power supply frequency
SLD 햶
50 / 60 Hz ±5%
Rated input
capacity � [kVA] LD
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
520
587
660
733
834
924
110
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
520
587
660
733
834
Cooling
Fan cooling
Protective structure
Others
01800
Power loss
[kW]
IP00
SLD 햶
2.7
3.3
3.96
4.8
5.55
6.6
7.5
8.4
9.45
10.65
12.0
13.5
15.0
16.8
18.9
LD
2.25
2.7
3.3
3.96
4.8
5.55
6.6
7.5
8.4
9.45
10.65
12.0
13.5
15.0
16.8
Frequency inverter weight [kg]
37
50
57
72
72
110
110
220
220
220
260
260
370
370
370
Reactor weight [kg]
20
22
26
28
29
30
35
38
42
46
50
57
67
85
95
Input Power Frame
169830 169831
169832
169833
169834
169835
169836
169837
169838
169839
169840
169841
169842
169843
169844
Control Card FR-CF70-ECT
189879 189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
189879
Remarks:
햲
The performance figures at the rated motor capacity are based on a motor voltage of 400 V.
햳
Theoverloadcapacityin%istheratiooftheoverloadcurrenttotheinverter’sratedcurrentintherespectiveoperatingmode.Forrepeateddutycyclesallowsufficienttimefortheinverter
and themotor to cool below thetemperaturereached at 100%load. Thewaiting periods can becalculated using the r.m.s. current method (I² × t), for which knowledgeof theduty.
햴
The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The output voltage can be varied over the entire power supply voltage range.
햵
The rated input capacity varies depending on the impedance values on the power supply side of the inverter (including the cables and input reactor).
햶
When the load curve with 120 % overload capacity is selected the maximum permitted ambient temperature is 40 °C.
햷
When operating with carrier frequencies ³ 2.5 kHz this value is reduced automatically as soon as the frequency inverter exceeds 85% of the rated output current.
햸
When the cable bushing for the optional expansion cards is broken out the unit has an IP 00 protection rating.
햹
The inverter types FR-F740-02160 and above are all delivered with PCBs with two coats of protective varnish. For types FR-F740 00023 through 01800 varnished PCBs are standard. The double-coated version is available as an option.
Common specifications FR-F 740/F 746
Voltage / frequency characteristics
Control
specifications
Control
signals for
operation
Display
Starting torque
Acceleration / deceleration time
Acceleration / deceleration characteristics
DC injection brake
Motor protection
Input signals
operating state
Output
when using the
signals
FR-A7AY option
pulse/analog output
Control unit
display
(FR-PU04/
FR-DU07)
operating state
alarm definition
interactive guidance
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:15
Description
Base frequency adjustable from 0 to 400 Hz;
selection between constant torque, variable torque or optional flexible 5-point V/f characteristics
120 % (3 Hz) whe1n set to simple magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation
0; 0.1 to 3600 s (can be set individually)
Linear or S-form course, user selectable
Operating frequency (0–120 Hz), operating time ( 0–10 s) and operating voltage (0–30 %) can be set individually. The DC brake can also be activated via the digital input.
Electronic motor protection relay (rated current user adjustable)
Any of 12 signals can be selected using parameters 178 to 189 (input terminal function selection)
Any of 7 signals can be selected using parameter 190 to 196 (output terminal function selection)
In addition to the above operating modes parameters 313-319 (function selection for the additional 7 output terminals) can also be used to assign the following four signals:
control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life
You can also use parameter 54 (assign analog current output) and 158 (assign analog voltage output) to assign the following displays to one or both outputs
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, alarm indication, frequency setting, motor running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak
value), electronic thermal load factor, input power, output power, road meter, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, watt-hours meter,
power saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake circuit duty (01800 and above), PID set point, PID process value, PID deviation monitor, I/O terminal monitor, optional input terminal monitor (FR-DU07 only), optional output terminal monitor (FR-DU07 only), option fitting state monitor (FR-PU04 only), terminal assignment
state (FR-PU04 only)
Alarm definition is displayed when the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the protection function was activated and the past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function (FR-PU04 only)
81
INVERTER
Frequency Inverters
Order information 햹
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
FR-A700 High End Inverters
The new FR-A700 frequency inverters
combine innovative functions and
reliable technology with maximum
power, economy and flexibility.
Hz
A
V
The FR-A740 is the appropriate inverter
for demanding drive tasks with requirements for high torque and excellent frequency precision. Its extensive functions
allow adaption to many applications. The
outstanding drive features of the
FR-A740 suit various needs, like:
앬 Conveyor technology
앬 Chemical machines
앬 Winding machines
앬 Printing machines
MON P.RUN
PU
EXT
NET
FWD
REV
PU
EXT
REV
FWD
MODE
SET
STOP
RESET
FR-DU07
Hz
A
V
MON P.RUN
PU
EXT
NET
FWD
REV
PU
EXT
REV
FWD
MODE
SET
STOP
RESET
FR-DU07
MITSUBISHI
A 700
!
!
and electric shock
DANGER: Risk of injuryfollow the safety instructions before use.
Read the manual and
removing this cover.
wait 10 minutes before
Isolate from supply and
Ensure proper earth connection
앬
Cranes and lifting gear
High-bay warehousing systems
앬 Extruders
앬 Centrifuges
앬 Machine tools
The FR-A740 is available in versions with
outputs from 0.4 – 640 kW.
앬
All the inverters in the series are designed
for connection to 3~ 380 – 480 V/500 V
(50/60 Hz) power supplies.
The output frequency range is 0.2 – 400 Hz.
CAUTION: Risk of fire a non-combustible surface.
Mount the inverter on
400V
FR–A740
FR-A740
Series
Rated motor
capacity [kW] �
INVERTER
Rated
current [A] �
Output
Output
capacity [kVA] �
Overload current
rating �
00023 00038
00052
00083
00126
00170
00250
00310
00380
00470
00620
00770
00930
01160
120% overload capacity (SLD)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
90
150% overload capacity (LD)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
200% overload capacity (ND)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
250% overload capacity (HD)
0.25
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
120% overload capacity (SLD)
2.3
3.8
5.2
8.3
12.6
17
25
31
38
47
62
77
93
116
180
150% overload capacity (LD)
2.1
3.5
4.8
7.6
11.5
16
23
29
35
43
57
70
85
106
144
200% overload capacity (ND)
1.5
2.5
4
6
9
12
17
23
31
38
44
57
71
86
110
250% overload capacity (HD)
0.8
1.5
2.5
4
6
9
12
17
23
31
38
44
57
71
86
SLD
1.8
2.9
4.0
6.3
9.6
13.0
19.1
23.6
29.0
35.8
47.3
58.7
70.9
88.4
137
LD
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.8
8.8
12.2
17.5
22.1
26.7
32.8
43.4
53.3
64.8
80.8
110
ND
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.6
6.9
9.1
13.0
17.5
23.6
29.0
33.5
43.4
54.1
65.5
100
HD
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.6
6.9
9.1
13.0
17.5
23.6
29.0
33.5
43.4
54.1
80
SLD
110% of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 120% for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 40 °C) – inverse time characteristics
LD
120% of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 150% for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – inverse time characteristics
ND
150% of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 200% for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – inverse time characteristics
HD
200% of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 250% for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – inverse time characteristics
Voltage �
3-phase AC, 0 V to power supply voltage
Frequency range
0.2 – 400 Hz
Control method
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control
(selectable from among V/f control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and real sensorless vector control)
100 % torque / 2 % ED
3-phase, 380–480 V AC, -15% / +10%
Voltage range
323–528 V AC at 50 / 60 Hz
Power supply frequency
Rated input
capacity [kVA] �
Others
20 % torque / continuous �
Regenerative braking torque
Power supply voltage
Input
50 / 60 Hz ±5%
2.5
4.5
5.5
9
12
17
20
28
34
41
52
66
80
100
LD
2.1
4
4.8
8
11.5
16
20
27
32
37
47
60
73
91
110
ND
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9
12
17
20
28
34
41
52
66
80
100
HD
0.8
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9
12
17
20
28
34
41
52
66
80
Self cooling
Protective structure �
IP20 �
137
Fan cooling
IP00
SLD
0.06
0.082
0.98
0.15
0.21
0.28
0.39
0.4
0.55
0.69
0.97
1.18
1.36
1.78
2.65
LD
0.05
0.08
0.09
0.14
0.18
0.22
0.31
0.35
0.44
0.52
0.71
0.93
1.03
1.32
2.0
ND
0.05
0.065
0.075
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.29
0.4
0.54
0.65
0.81
1.02
1.3
1.54
HD
0.043
0.05
0.06
0.075
0.1
0.146
0.18
0.21
0.29
0.4
0.54
0.65
0.74
1.02
1.14
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
7.1
7.1
7.5
7.5
13
13
23
35
35
37
Frequency inverter weight [kg]
Frequency inverters
Order information
20 % torque / continuous
SLD
Cooling
Power loss [kW]
01800
Input power frame
Control card FR-CA70-EC
169826 169797 169798 169799 169800 169801 169802 169803 169804 169805 169806
169827 169828 169829 169830
169877 169877 169877 169877
Remarks:
Explanation for 햲 to 햺 see next page.
82
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:27
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
FR-A740
Series
Rated motor
capacity [kW] �
Rated
current [A] �
Output
capacity [kVA] �
Overload
current rating �
02600
03250
03610
04320
04810
05470
06100
06830
07700
08660
09620
10940
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
550
630
150% overload capacity (LD)
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
200% overload capacity (ND)
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
250% overload capacity (HD)
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
120% overload capacity (SLD)
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962
1094
1212
150% overload capacity (LD)
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962
1094
200% overload capacity (ND)
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962
250% overload capacity (HD)
110
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
SLD
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
733
834
924
LD
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
733
834
ND
110
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
733
HD
84
110
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
SLD
110 % of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 120 % for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 40 °C) – inverse time characteristics
LD
120 % of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 150 % for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – inverse time characteristics
ND
150 % of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 200 % for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – inverse time characteristics
HD
Voltage �
200 % of rated motor capacity for 60 s; 250 % for 3 s (max. ambient temperature 50 °C) – inverse time characteristics
3-phase AC, 0 V to power supply voltage
Frequency range
0.2 – 400 Hz
Control method
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among V/f control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and real sensorless vector control)
Regenerative braking torque
(nax. value / permissible duty)
20 %
torque / 10 % torque / continuous
cont.
Power supply voltage
3-phase, 380–500 V AC, -15 % / +10 %
Voltage range
323–550 V AC at 50 / 60 Hz
Power supply frequency
Input
Rated input
capacity
[kVA]
165
198
247
275
329
366
416
464
520
586
660
733
833
924
LD
137
165
198
247
275
329
366
416
464
520
586
659
733
833
ND
110
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
733
HD
84
110
137
165
198
248
275
329
367
417
465
521
587
660
Fan cooling
Protective structure
Power loss [kW]
50 / 60 Hz ±5 %
SLD
Cooling
Others
12120
INVERTER
Output
02160
120% overload capacity (SLD)
IP00
SLD
2.9
3.57
3.8
4.2
5.02
5.5
6.4
7.2
8.19
8.6
10.37
11.5
13.2
14.94
LD
2.4
2.9
3.0
3.8
4.2
5.1
5.5
6.4
7.2
8.0
8.6
10.2
11.5
13.20
10.5
ND
1.9
2.4
2.5
3.0
4.0
4.2
5.0
5.5
6.5
7.0
7.3
8.1
9.3
HD
1.44
1.9
1.97
2.5
2.57
4.0
4.2
5.0
5.5
6.5
7.0
6.91
8.1
9.3
Frequency inverter weight [kg]
50
57
72
72
110
110
175
175
175
260
260
370
370
370
Reactor weight [kg]
22
26
28
29
30
35
38
42
46
50
57
67
85
95
Frequency inverters
Order information
Input power frame
169831
169832
169833
169834
169835
169836
169837
169838
169839
169840
169841
169842
169843
169844
Control card FR-CA70-ECT
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
190051
Remarks:
햲
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
햳
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.
햴
When operating the inverter of 75K (type 02160) or more with a value larger than 2 kHz set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, the rated output current is max. 85 %.
햵
The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current.
For repeated duty, allow time forthe inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100 % load.
햶
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about Ö2 that of the power supply
햷
For the 11K to 22K capacities (type 00310 to 00620), using the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR) will achieve the performance of 100 % torque/6 % ED.
햸
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
햹
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00).
햺
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:30
83
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
Common Specifications FR-A700
FR-A740
Description
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and real sensorless vector control) /
vector control (when used with option FR-A7AP) �
Control method
Frequency
setting
resolution
Control
specifications
Analog input
0.015 Hz / 0–50 Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0–10 V / 12 bit)
0.03 Hz / 0–50 Hz / (terminal 2, 4: 0–5 V / 11 bit, 0–20 mA / 11 bit, terminal 1: -10–+10 V / 12 bit)
0.06 Hz / 0–50 Hz (terminal 1: 0–±5 V / 11 bit)
Digital input
0.01 Hz
Frequency accuracy
±0.2 % of the maximum output frequency (temperature range 25° ± 10 °C) via analog input;
±0.01 % of the set output frequency (via digital input)
Voltage / frequency characteristics
Base frequency adjustable from 0 to 400 Hz;
selection between constant torque, variable torque or optional flexible 5-point V/f characteristics
Starting torque
200 % 0.3 Hz (0.4 K to 3.7 K), 150 % 0.3 Hz (5.5 K or more) (under real sensorless vector control or vector control)
Torque boost
Manual torque boost
Acceleration / deceleration time
0; 0.1 to 3600 s (can be set individually),
linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
Acceleration / deceleration characteristics
Linear or S-form course, user selectable
DC injection brake
Operating frequency (0–120 Hz), operating time ( 0–10 s) and operating voltage (0–30 %) can be set individually.
The DC brake can also be activated via the digital input.
Stall prevention operation level
Operation current level can be set (0 to 220 % adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
Motor protection
Electronic motor protection relay (rated current user adjustable)
Torque limit level
Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400 % variable)
Frequency
setting values
Analog input
Terminal 2, 4: 0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC, 0/4–20 mA
Terminal 1: 0–±5 V DC, 0–±10 V DC
Digital input
Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit
Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Start signal
INVERTER
Input signals
Available individually for forward rotation and reverse rotation. Start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Common
Any of 12 signals can be selected using parameters 178 to 189 (input terminal function selection):
from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV connection), FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal , external DC injection brake operation start, PID control enable
terminal, brake opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load pattern selection forward rotation reverse rotation boost, V/F switching,
load torque high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, pre-excitation, output stop, start self-holding selection, control mode changing,
torque limit selection, start-time tuning start external input, torque bias selection 1, 2 햲, P/PI control switchover, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, and command
source switchover
Pulse train input
100 kpps
Operating status
Any of 7 signals can be selected using parameter 190 to 196 (output terminal function selection):
from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode,
inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, commercial
power supply-inverter switchover MC1, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC2, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC3, orientation completion
햲
, brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average
monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output 햲, reverse rotation output*1, low speed output, torque detection, regenerative status output 햲, start-time tuning completion, in-position completion 햲, minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and
alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector
When using the
FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR option
In addition to the above operating modes parameters 313-319 (function selection for the additional 7 output terminals) can also be used to
assign the following four signals: control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life
(Only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of the FR-A7AR)
Pulse train output
50 kpps
Analog output
You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor torque, converter output voltage (steady or peak
value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor
excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set point, PID measured value, motor output, torque
command, torque current command, and torque monitor.
Operating state
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed,motor torque, overload, converter output voltage (steady or
peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor 햳, output terminal option monitor 햳, option fitting status 햴, terminal assignment status 햴, torque
command, torque current command, feed back pulse 햲, motor output
Alarm definition
Alarm definition is displayed when the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the protection
function was activated and the past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive guidance
Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function 햴
Control
signals for
operation
Output
signals
Display
Protection
Control unit
display
(FR-PU07/
FR-DU07)
Protective
functions
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant
speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure
occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output
phase failure, external thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess, CPU alarm, operation
panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess, inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm
(inverter), USB error, opposite rotation deceleration error, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake
prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm 햳, brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation
panel lock, parameter copy alarm, speed limit indication, encoder no-signal 햲, speed deviation large 햲, overspeed 햲, position error large 햲, encoder phase error 햲
Remarks:
햲
Only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted
햳
Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
햴
Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04).
84
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:33
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
General Operating Conditions for all Inverters
Specifications
FR-D700
FR-S500E
FR-E700
FR-E500
FR-F700
FR-A700
-10 °C to +50 °C
(non-freezing)
-10 °C to +50 °C
(non-freezing)
-10 °C to +50 °C
(non-freezing)
-10 °C to +50 °C
(non-freezing)
-10 °C to +50 °C
(non-freezing) 햲
FR-F740: -10 °C to +50 °C;
FR-F746: -10 °C to +40 °C
(non-freezing)햳
-20 to +65 °C
-20 to +65 °C
-20 to +65 °C
-20 to +65 °C
-20 to +65 °C
-20 to +65 °C
Max. 90 %
(non-condensing)
Max. 90 %
(non-condensing)
Max. 90 %
(non-condensing)
Max. 90 %
(non-condensing)
Max. 90 %
(non-condensing)
Max. 90 %
(non-condensing)
Max. 1000 m above sea
level.
Max. 1000 m above sea
level. 햵
Max. 1000 m above sea
level.
Max. 1000 m above sea
level. 햵
Max. 1000 m above sea
level.
Max. 1000 m above sea
level.
Protective structure
Enclosed type IP 20
Enclosed type IP 20
Enclosed type IP 20
Enclosed type IP 20
FR-F740: IP 00 / IP 20 햶
FR-F746: IP 54
IP 00 / IP 20
Shock resistance
10 G (3 times each
in 3 directions)
10 G (3 times each
in 3 directions)
10 G (3 times each
in 3 directions)
10 G (3 times each
in 3 directions)
10 G (3 times each
in 3 directions)
10 G (3 times each
in 3 directions)
Vibration resistance
Max. 5.9 m/s2
0.6 G: resistance
to vibrations from
10 to 55 Hz for 2 hours
along all 3 axes
Max. 5.9 m/s2
(JIS 60068-2-6)
0.6 G: resistance
to vibrations from
10 to 55 Hz for 2 hours
along all 3 axes
Max. 0.6 G
(2.9 m/s² or less for the
04320 or more.)
Max. 5.9 m/s² or less
(2.9 m/s² or less for the
models from
FR-A740-04320 or above)
Ambient conditions
For indoor use only, avoid
environments containing
corrosive gases, install in a
dust-free location.
For indoor use only, avoid
environments containing
corrosive gases, install in a
dust-free location.
For indoor use only, avoid
environments containing
corrosive gases, install in a
dust-free location.
For indoor use only, avoid
environments containing
corrosive gases, install in a
dust-free location.
For indoor use only, avoid
environments containing
corrosive gases,
install in a dust-free location.
For indoor use only, avoid
environments containing
corrosive gases, install in a
dust-free location.
Approvals
UL / CSA / CE / EN / GOST /
CCC
UL / CSA / CE / EN / GOST /
CCC
UL / CSA / CE / EN / GOST /
CCC
UL / CSA / CE / EN / GOST /
CCC
FR-F740:
CE/UL/cUL/DNV/GOST;
FR-F746: CE/GOST / CCC
CE/UL/cUL/DNV/GOST / CCC
Ambient temperature in operation
Storage temperature 햴
Ambient humidity
Altitude
INVERTER
Remarks:
햲
For selection of the load characteristics with variable torque the max. temperature is 40 °C.
햳
For selection of the load characteristics with a 120 % overload rating the max. temperature is 40 °C (F740) and 30 °C (F746).
햴
The product may only be exposed to the full extremes of this temperature range for short periods (e.g. during transportation).
햵
After that derate by 3 % for every extra 500 m up to 2500 m.
햶
When the cable bushing for the optional expansion cards is broken out the unit has an IP 00 protection rating.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:36
85
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
Internal and External Options
1
A large number of options allows an individual adoption of the inverter to the
according task. The options can be
installed quickly and easily. Detailed
information on installation and functions
is included in the manual of the options.
The options can be divided into two
major categories:
앬 Internal options
앬 External options
Option
Internal
options
Description
INVERTER
The internal options comprise input and
output extensions as well as communications options supporting the operation
of the inverter within a network or connected to a personal computer or PLC.
External Options
In addition to the FR-PU07 control panel
that enables interactive operation of the
frequency inverter the available external
options also include additional EMC
noise filters, reactors for improving
efficiency and brake units with brake
resistors.
FR-D700
FR-S500E
FR-E700
FR-E500
FR-F700
FR-A700
Digital input
Input of the frequency setting via BCD or binary code
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
Digital output
Selectable standard output signals of the inverter can be output at the open
collector.
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
Expansion analog output
Selectable additional signals can be output and indicated at the
analog output.
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
Relay output
Selectable standard output signals of the inverter can be output through relay
terminals.
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
Orientation control,
Encoder feedback contro (PLG),
Vector control
This option is used for position control and precise speed control.
—
—
—
—
—
쏹
Communications
SSCNET
Integration of a frequency inverter into a SSCNET.
—
—
—
—
—
쏹
Profibus/DP
Integration of a frequency inverter into a Profibus/DP network.
—
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
DeviceNet TM
Integration of a frequency inverter into a DeviceNet.
—
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
CC-Link
Integration of a frequency inverter into a CC-Link network.
—
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
LonWorks
Integration of a frequency inverter into a LonWorks network.
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
—
CANopen
Integration of a frequency inverter into a CANopen network.
—
—
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
Ethernet
Integration of a frequency inverter into a Ethernet network.
—
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
FR-D700
FR-S500E
FR-E700
FR-E500
FR-F700
FR-A700
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
Option
Description
Control panel (8 languages)
Interactive control panel with LCD display.
VFD-Setup-Software
Parameterization and setup software for the Mitsubishi Electric inverter series.
—
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
쏹
EMC noise filter
Noise filter for compliance with EMC directives.
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
External brake resistor
To improve the brake capacity of the inverter. Depending on the inverter type
it is used in combination with a brake unit.
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
External high-duty brake resistor
To improve the brake capacity; used in combination with the internal brake
transistor.
쏹
—
쏹
쏹
—
쏹
DC reactor
AC chokes
For increased efficiency, reduction of mains feedback and compensation of
voltage fluctuations.
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Floor standing unit FSU
IP 20 physical contact protection in a freely-locatable floorstanding unit. Detailed information on request.
—
—
—
—
쏹
쏹
FR-Configurator software
External
options
Internal options
Mounting example
of an internal option
NET_B
CON2
FG
3
D199K3C
1
NET_A
ECHELON
FTT-10A
50051
T0121B
1
FR-A7NL
RUN–
RX–
WINK–
LRUN–
TX–
SERVICE–
®
LONWORKS
86
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:48
Interface
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
Overview Internal Options
Internal options
Description
Remarks/Specifications
Type
16-bit digital input
Interface for the input of the frequency setting via 4-digit BCD
or 16-bit binary code, setting of gain and bias supported.
Input: 24 V DC; 5 mA; open collector
or switching signal, sink or source logic
FR-A7AX
FR-A7AX E kit
Applicable
inverter
FR-F700 / FR-A700
FR-E700
Selectable of 43 standard output signals of the inverter can
be output at the open collector. The outputs are isolated with optocouplers.
Selectable 2 of 18 additional signals (e.g. output frequency, output voltage, output current)
can be output and indicated at the analog output.
Display on measuring gauge: 20 mA DC or 5 V (10 V) DC
Output load: 24V DC; 0.1 A,
sink or source logic
Output: max. 0–10 V DC; 0–20 mA;
Resolution: 3 mV at voltage output,
1 mA at current output, accuracy: ±10%
FR-A7AY
FR-F700 / FR-A700
156776
FR-A7AY E kit
FR-E700
210669
Relay output
Selectable 3 of 43 standard output signals of the inverter can be output through
relay terminals.
Switching load: 230 V AC/0.3 A, 30 V DC/0.3 A
FR-A7AR
FR-A7AR E kit
FR-F700 / FR-A700
FR-E700
156777
210670
Vector control and
orientation/encoder
Vector control with encoder can be performed.
5 V TTL differential
The main spindle can be stopped at a fixed position (orientation) in combination with a pulse 1024–4096 pulse
11 – 30 V HTL complimentary
encoder. The motor speed is sent back and the speed is maintained constant.
FR-A7AP
FR-A700
166133
FR-E5NC
FR-A7NC
FR-A7NC E kit
OI-FR-E5NCO
FR-A7NCA
FR-A7NCA E kit
FR-E500
FR-F700 / FR-A700
FR-E700
FR-E500
FR-A700
FR-E700
104558
156778
210671
139378
141403
210705
Only NA version
FR-A7NE
FR-A700
Connection of up to 64 inverters
supported. Maximum transfer rate: 78 kBaud
FR-A7NL
FR-F700 / FR-A700
FR-A7NL E kit
FR-E700
210672
FR-F700 / FR-A700
FR-E700
FR-F700 / FR-A700
FR-E500
FR-F700 / FR-A700
FR-E700
FR-E500
158524
210673
191751
104556
158525
210704
104557
FR-A700
141403
Expansion analog output
CC-Link
Option board for the integration of a frequency inverter into a CC-Link network. The operation, Maximum transfer distance:
display functions, and parameter settings can be controlled by a PLC.
1200 m (at 156 kBaud)
CAN Open
Option board for integration of a frequency inverter in a CAN Open network.
Operation, display functions and parameter settings can be controlled by a
computer (PC etc.) or a PLC.
Ethernet
Communications
LonWorks
Option board for integration of a frequency inverter in a Ethernet network.
Operation, display functions and parameter settings can be controlled by a
computer (PC etc.) or a PLC.
Option board for integration of a frequency inverter in a LonWorks network.
Operation, display functions and parameter settings can be controlled by a
computer (PC etc.) or a PLC.
Maximum transfer rate: 1 MBaud
Connection of up to 126 inverters supported. Maxi- FR-A7NP
mum transfer rate: 12 MBaud
FR-A7NP E kit
D-Sub9 connection adapter for FR-A7NP
FR-D-Sub9
Connection of up to 42 inverters supported.
FR-E5NP
FR-A7ND
Maximum transfer rate: 10 MBaud
FR-A7ND E kit
FR-E5ND
Profibus/DP
Option board for the integration of a frequency inverter into a Profibus/DP network.
The operation, display functions, and parameter settings can be controlled by a computer
(PC etc.) or a PLC.
DeviceNet TM
Option board for the integration of a frequency inverter into a DeviceNet.
The operation, display functions, and parameter settings can be controlled by
a computer (PC etc.) or a PLC.
SSCNET III
Option board for the integration of a frequency inverter into the Mitsubishi Electric servo system network SSCNET III. The operation and display functions can be controlled by Motion Con- Maximum transfer rate: 50 MBaud
troller (Q172H CPU, Q173H CPU).
FR-A7NS
156775
210668
on request
156779
Overview External Options
External options
Description
Remarks/Specifications
Type
Further details are provided by your Mitsubishi
Sales office or in the technical catalogue for frequency inverters.
FR-PA02-02
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
FR-PA07
Applicable
inverter
FR-E500
All
All
FR-A700 / FR-F700
FR-D700/FR-700
FR-ESP
FR-E500
FR-A5 CBL
All
FR-ADP
FR-A700
FR-F700
157515
SC-FR PC
All
88426
USB-RS232
—
FR-D700, FR-F700
All 500 series
155606
159746
All 700 series
190586
Optional control panel
Control panel
(parameter unit)
Control panel cover
Interactive control panel with LCD display (8 languages).
Interactive standard control panel
For mounting on the switchgear cabinet
Cover for the backside of the control panel FR-PA02-02 or FR-PU04 for installation in switchgear
Connection adapter integrated.
cabinet, for instance
Connection cable for
remote control panel
Cable for a remote connection of the control panel FR-PU04 or FR-PU07.
Adapter
Connection adapter for FR-DU07
Interface cable
USB-RS232 converter
VFD setup software
FR-Configurator
DIN rail mounting set
Communications cable for RS232 or RS485 interface to connect
an external personal computer
Port converter adapter cable from RS-232 to USB
Parameterization and setup software for Mitsubishi Electric inverter.
Adapter to mount the frequency inverter from 1.5 k on a DIN rail
Available length: 1; 2.5 and 5 m
Required for remote connection of the FR-DU07
with FR-A5CBL
Length 3 m; can be used for example with the
setup/configuration software
USB specification 1.1, 0.35 m long
Further details are provided by your Mitsubishi
Sales office or in the technical catalogue for frequency inverters.
When using the DIN rail adapters,
filters can not be footprint mounted.
—
FR-UDA 01
FR-UDA 02
EMC noise filter
Noise filter for compliance with EMC directives.
FFR -첸 첸,
FR-, FN-첸 첸
AC chokes
For increased efficiency, reduction of mains feedback and compensation
of voltage fluctuations.
FR-BAL-B
DC reactor
DC reactor for compensation of voltage fluctuations.
Please ask your distributor for more details
FR-HEL
Brake units
For an improvement of the brake capacity. For high inertia loads and active loads. Used in combination with a resistor unit.
FR-BU2,
MT-BU5 +,
MT-BR5
BU-UFS+RUFC
External brake resistors
To improve the brake capacity of the inverter; is used in combination with a brake unit
FR-ABR(H)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:52
FR-S500E
(<0.75 k)
FR-S500E
(>1.5 k)
All
FR-D700, FR-E700,
FR-E500, FR-A700,
FR-F700
FR-D700, FR-E700,
FR-A700, FR-F700
Art. no.
103686
67735
166134
157514
214795
125323
1 m: 70727
2.5m:70728
5 m: 70729
130833
130832
—
—
—
All
—
FR-D700, FR-E700,
FR-E500, FR-A500
—
87
INVERTER
Digital output
Art. no.
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
Overview of All Inverters and Applicable Noise Filters
Power supply
1~230 V
햲
Power supply
3~400 V
햳
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
INVERTER
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
88
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:55
Rated output
Rated motor
current [A]
capacity [kW] 햵
Overload capacity 120 % *
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2.3
0.75
3.8
1.5
5.2
2.2
8.3
3.7
12.6
5.5
17
7.5
25
11
31
15
38
18.5
47
22
62
30
77)
37
93
45
116
55
180
90
216
110
260
132
325
160
361
185
432
220
481
250
547
280
610
315
683
355
770
400
866
450
962
500
1094
560
1212
630
Rated output
Rated motor
current [A] 햷 capacity [kW] 햵
Overload capacity 150 %*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.6
0.75
5
1.1
9.6
2.2
12
3
1.8
0.75
3
1.1
4.9
2.2
6.7
3
9.5
4
14
7.5
21
11
2.1
0.75
3.5
1.5
4.8
2.2
7.6
3.7
11.5
5.5
16
7.5
23
11
29
15
35
18.5
43
22
57
30
70
37
85
45
106
55
144
75
180
90
216
110
260
132
325
160
361
185
432
220
481
250
547
280
610
315
683
355
770
400
866
450
962
500
1094
560
Rated output
Rated motor
current [A] 햴 capacity [kW] 햵
Overload capacity 200 %*
0,8
0,1
1,4
0,2
2,5
0,4
4,2
0,75
7
1,5
10
2,2
1,2
0,4
2,2
0,75
3,6
1,5
5,0
2,2
8,0
3,7
12,0
5,5
16,0
7,5
1.4
0.2
2.5
0.4
4.1
0.75
7
1.5
1.2 (1.3)
0.4
2.3 (2.5)
0.75
3.7 (4.1)
1.5
5.3 (5.8)
2.2
7.7 (8.5)
3.7
1,6 (1,4)
0,4
2,6 (2,2)
0,75
4,0 (3,8)
1,5
6,0 (5,4)
2,2
9,5 (8,7)
3,7
12
5,5
17
7,5
23
11
30
15
2.5
0.4
4
0.75
7
1.5
10
2.2
1.6
0.4
2.6
0.75
4
1.5
6
2.2
9.5
4
12
5.5
17
7.5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Frequency
inverter type
FR-D720S-008 k EC
FR-D720S-014 k EC
FR-D720S-025 k EC
FR-D720S-042k EC
FR-D720S-070 k EC
FR-D720S-100 k EC
FR-D740-012 EC
FR-D740-022 EC
FR-D740-036 EC
FR-D740-050 EC
FR-D740-080 EC
FR-D740-120 EC
FR-D740-160 EC
FR-S520SE-0,2 k EC
FR-S520SE-0,4 k EC
FR-S520SE-0,75 k EC
FR-S520SE-1,5 k EC
FR-S540E-0,4 k EC
FR-S540E-0,75 k EC
FR-S540E-1,5 k EC
FR-S540E-2,2 k EC
FR-S540E-3,7 k EC
FR-E740-016 EC
FR-E740-026 EC
FR-E740-040 EC
FR-E740-060 EC
FR-E740-095 EC
FR-E740-120 EC
FR-E740-170 EC
FR-E740-230 EC
FR-E740-300 EC
FR-E520S-0,4 k EC
FR-E520S-0,75 k EC
FR-E520S-1,5 k EC
FR-E520S-2,2 k EC
FR-E540-0,4 k EC
FR-E540-0,75 k EC
FR-E540-1,5 k EC
FR-E540-2,2 k EC
FR-E540-3,7 k EC
FR-E540-5,5 k EC
FR-E540-7,5 k EC
FR-F740-00023 EC
FR-F740-00038 EC
FR-F740-00052 EC
FR-F740-00083 EC
FR-F740-00126 EC
FR-F740-00170 EC
FR-F740-00250 EC
FR-F740-00310 EC
FR-F740-00380 EC
FR-F740-00470 EC
FR-F740-00620 EC
FR-F740-00770 EC
FR-F740-00930 EC
FR-F740-01160 EC
FR-F740-01800 EC
FR-F740-02160 EC
FR-F740-02600 EC
FR-F740-03250 EC
FR-F740-03610 EC
FR-F740-04320 EC
FR-F740-04810 EC
FR-F740-05470 EC
FR-F740-06100 EC
FR-F740-06830 EC
FR-F740-07700 EC
FR-F740-08660 EC
FR-F740-09620 EC
FR-F740-10940 EC
FR-F740-12120 EC
Order
number
Applicable
noise filter 햶
214189
214190
214191
214192
214193
214194
212414
212415
212416
212417
212418
212419
212420
158459
158460
158461
158462
158463
158464
158465
158466
158467
211955
211956
211957
211958
211959
211960
211961
211962
211963
102938
102939
102940
102941
69197
69198
69200
69201
69204
102942
102943
156569
156570
156571
156572
156573
156594
156595
156596
156597
156598
156599
156600
156601
156602
156603
156604
156605
156606
156607
156608
156609
156610
156611
156612
156613
156614
156615
156616
156617
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
I
I
II
III, IX
IV
IV
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INVERTER ///
Power supply Rated output Ratedmotor Rated output Ratedmotor Rated output Ratedmotor Rated output Ratedmotor Frequency
3~400 V
current [A] 햷 capacity[kW] 햵 current [A] 햷 capacity[kW] 햵 current [A] capacity[kW] 햵 current [A] capacity[kW] 햵 inverter type
Overload capacity 120 %*
Overload capacity 150 %*
Overload capacity 200 %*
Applicable noise
filter 햶
Overload capacity 250 %*
앬
2.3
0.75
2.1
0.75
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00023 EC
163796
앬
3.8
1.5
3.5
1.5
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00038 EC
163797
앬
5.2
2.2
4.8
2.2
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00052 EC
163798
앬
8.3
3.7
7.6
3.7
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00083 EC
163799
앬
12.6
5.5
11.5
5.5
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00126 EC
163800
앬
17
7.5
16
7,5
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00170 EC
163801
앬
25
11
23
11
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00250 EC
163802
앬
31
15
29
15
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00310 EC
163803
앬
38
18.5
35
18.5
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00380 EC
163804
앬
47
22
43
22
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00470 EC
163805
앬
62
30
57
30
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00620 EC
163806
앬
77
37
70
37
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00770 EC
163807
앬
93
45
85
45
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-00930 EC
163808
앬
116
55
106
55
—
—
—
—
FR-F746-01160 EC
163809
앬
2.3
0.75
2,1
0.75
1.5
0.4
0.8
0.25
FR-A740-00023 EC
169826
앬
3.8
1.5
3.5
1.5
2.5
0.75
1.5
0.4
FR-A740-00038 EC
169797
앬
5.2
2.2
4.8
2.2
4
1.5
2.5
0.75
FR-A740-00052 EC
169798
앬
8.3
3.7
7.6
3.7
6
2.2
4
1.5
FR-A740-00083 EC
169799
앬
12.6
5.5
11.5
5.5
9
3.7
6
2.2
FR-A740-00126 EC
169800
앬
17
7.5
16
7.5
12
5.5
9
3.7
FR-A740-00170 EC
169801
앬
25
11
23
11
17
7.5
12
5.5
FR-A740-00250 EC
169802
앬
31
15
29
15
23
11
17
7.5
FR-A740-00310 EC
169803
앬
38
18.5
35
18.5
31
15
23
11
FR-A740-00380 EC
169804
앬
47
22
43
22
38
18.5
31
15
FR-A740-00470 EC
169805
앬
62
30
57
30
44
22
38
18.5
FR-A740-00620 EC
169806
I
앬
77
37
70
37
57
30
44
22
FR-A740-00770 EC
169807
II
I
앬
93
45
85
45
71
37
57
30
FR-A740-00930 EC
169808
III, IV
앬
116
55
106
55
86
45
71
37
FR-A740-01160 EC
169809
IV
앬
180
90
144
75
110
55
86
45
FR-A740-01800 EC
169810
IV
앬
216
110
180
90
144
75
110
55
FR-A740-02160 EC
169811
앬
260
132
216
110
180
90
144
75
FR-A740-02600 EC
169812
앬
325
160
260
132
216
110
180
90
FR-A740-03250 EC
169813
앬
361
185
325
160
260
132
216
110
FR-A740-03610 EC
169814
앬
432
220
361
185
325
160
260
132
FR-A740-04320 EC
169815
앬
481
150
432
220
361
185
325
160
FR-A740-04810 EC
169816
앬
547
280
481
250
432
220
361
185
FR-A740-05470 EC
169817
앬
610
315
547
280
481
250
432
220
FR-A740-06100 EC
169818
앬
683
355
610
315
547
280
481
250
FR-A740-06830 EC
169819
앬
770
400
683
355
610
315
547
280
FR-A740-07700 EC
169820
앬
866
450
770
400
683
355
610
315
FR-A740-08660 EC
169821
앬
962
500
866
450
770
400
683
355
FR-A740-09620 EC
169822
앬
1094
560
962
500
866
450
770
400
FR-A740-10940 EC
169823
앬
1212
630
1094
560
962
500
866
450
FR-A740-12120 EC
169824
INVERTER
햳
Order
number
The values for 120 % overload capacity are valid at 110 % Irated for 60 s, 120 % for 0.5 s (3 s for FR-F740 and FR-F746) at 40 °C* max. (30 °C for FR-F746)
The values for 150 % overload capacity are valid at 120 % Irated for 60 s, 150 % for 0.5 s (3 s for FR-F740 and FR-F746) at 40 °C* max.
*(FR-A540L-G and FR-F740 do not have this limitation, the validity is 50 °C max. at 150 % overload capacity)
The values for 200 % overload capacity are valid at 150 % Irated for 60 s, 200 % for 0.5 s at 50 °C max. (3 s for FR-A740) at 50 °C max.
The values for für 250 % overload capacity are valid at 200 % Irated for 60 s,, 250 % for 3 s at 50 °C max.
Remarks:
햲
Permissible power supply voltage range for 1phase connection: 170–264 V.
햳
Permissible power supply voltage range for 3phase connection: 323–528 V (323–550 V for FR-F740-01800 – 12120)
햴
The values in brackets are valid without a restriction to the PWM frequency (up to 40 °C).
햵
At higher power supply voltages higher capacities can be output.
햶
Combination see next page.
햷
If the carrier of the FR-F 740 is set to 3 kHz or more, the carrier frequency is automatically reduced when the inverter output current exceeds the parenthesized rated output
current (= 85 % load).
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:25:57
89
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INVERTER
Filters and Conditioners
Filters and conditioners - a necessary part
of today’s environment
The need for various filters and conditioning
elements, to be added to power circuits, has
been driven by legislation and regulation from
Europe, the Government and Electricity suppliers.
Mitsubishi Electric offers a range of solutions to
help installations meet requirements such as
EMC directives through to G5/4 regulations.
Registration with the UK ECA scheme
Many of Mitsubishi Electric’s inverters are registered with the UK Governments ECA scheme.
More information about the scheme can be
found at www.eca.gov.uk . Mitsubishi Electric’s
company registration number in the scheme is
107, and was first registered 1/4/2003.
EMC information
Ensuring compliance with the EN 61800-3
product standard.
Inverters must be fitted with an appropriate
(see Accessories) to guarantee compliance with the EMC requirements of the
EN 61800-3 product standard.
These
are available as optional
accessories and are normally installed in the
direct vicinity of the inverter.
Definition of terms in EN 61800-3 & A11:
See the applicable technical documentation for
your Mitsubishi inverter for more information.
All the applicable guidelines and regulations for
using and installing the equipment must also be
observed at all times.
Please contact your Mitsubishi partner if you
require further information.
An environment including buildings and
domestic residential areas that are connected
directly to a low-voltage power supply network
without an interstage transformer.
Environments containing facilities that are not
directly connected to a low-voltage power
supply network for buildings in domestic and
residential areas.
The guidelines for using and installing Mitsubishi
inverters must be observed at all times.
EMC Filter conf. 55011A
EMC Filter conf. 55022B
FFR-S520S-14A-RF1
152736
FFR-S520-14A-RF1
FR-S 520SE-1,5 k EC
FFR-S520S-20A-RF1
152740
FFR-S520-20A-RF1
152740
FR-S 540E-0,4 k – 1,5 k EC
FFR-S540-8A-RF100
138425
FFR-S540-8A-RF100
138425
FR-S 540E-2,2 k – 3,7 k EC
FFR-S540-13A-RF100
138423
FFR-S540-13A-RF100
138423
FR-E 520S-0,4 k – 0,75 k EC
FFR-E520S-14A-SC1
152727
FFR-E520S-14A-SC1
152727
FR-E 520S-1,5 k – 2,2 k EC
FFR-E520S-26A-SC1
152730
FFR-E520S-26A-SC1
152730
FR-E 540-0,4 – 0,75 k EC
FFR-E540-4,5A-SF1
126654
FFR-E540-4,5A-SF1
126654
FR-E 540-1,5 – 3,7 k EC
FFR-E540-15A-SF1
126655
FFR-E540-15A-SF1
126655
FR-E 540-5,5 k – 7,5 k EC
FFR-E540-27A-SF1
126656
FFR-E540-27A-SF1
126656
FR-A&F 740-02160 – 02600 EC
FN3359-250-28
104663
FR-A&F 740-03250 – 04320 EC
FN3359-400-99
104664
FR-A&F 740-04810 – 06100 EC
FN3359-600-99
104665
FR-A&F 740-06830 – 09620 EC
FN3359-1000-99
104666
FR-A&F 740-10940 – 12120 EC
FN3359-1600-99
130229
FR-F 746-00023 – 00126 EC
FFR-AF-IP54-21A-SM1
166730
FFR-AF-IP54-21A-SM1
166730
FR-F 746-00170 – 00250 EC
FFR-AF-IP54-44A-SM1
166731
FFR-AF-IP54-44A-SM1
166731
FR-F 746-00310 – 00380 EC
FFR-AF-IP54-62A-SM1
166732
FFR-AF-IP54-62A-SM1
166732
FR-F 746-00470 – 00620 EC
FFR-AF-IP54-98A-SM1
166733
FFR-AF-IP54-98A-SM1
166733
FR-F 746-00770 EC
FFR-AF-IP54-117A-SM1
166734
FFR-AF-IP54-117A-SM1
166734
FR-F 746-00930 – 01160 EC
FFR-AF-IP54-172A-SM1
166735
FFR-AF-IP54-172A-SM1
166735
FR-A&F 740-00023 – 00126 EC
FFR-BS-00126-18A-SF100
193677
FFR-BS-00126-18A-SF100
193677
FR-A&F 740-00170 – 00250 EC
FFR-BS-00250-30A-SF100
193678
FFR-BS-00250-30A-SF100
193678
FR-A&F 740-00310 – 00380 EC
FFR-BS-00380-55A-SF100
193679
FFR-BS-00380-55A-SF100
193679
I
FR-A&F 740-00470 – 00620 EC
FFR-BS-00620-75A-SF100
193680
FFR-BS-00620-75A-SF100
193680
II
FR-A&F 740-00770 EC
FFR-BS-00770-95A-SF100
193681
FFR-BS-00770-95A-SF100
193681
III
FR-A&F 740-00930 EC
FFR-BS-00930-120A-SF100
193682
FFR-BS-00930-120A-SF100
193682
IV
FR-A&F 740-00930– 01800 EC
FFR-BS-01800-180A-SF100
193683
FFR-BS-01800-180A-SF100
193683
INVERTER
FR-S 520SE-0,2 k – 0,75 k EC
152736
The frequency inverters of the FR-A740/FR-F740 series are equipped with a built-in EMC filter for industrial environment (2nd environment ).
The filters shown in the table above are required for special cases only.
90
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:26:01
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Mitsubishi Electric offers a variety of Servo and
Motion system products providing solutions for
applications covering point-to-point and synchronised systems. Systems can be built using a
single axis or multi axes, for example when using
a System Q Motion CPU solution up to 96 axes
can be controlled.
With both standard pulse type output modules
and SSCNET bus modules specific application
needs are easy to meet.
revolution encoders, and all MR-J3 series motors
are fitted with 262144 pulse-per-revolution
encoders) and wide amplifier range (up to 55 kW).
The Super Series of Servo motors and amplifiers
takes Mitsubishi Motion Control to new levels of
precision with a wide range of motors (all MR-J2S
series motors are fitted with 131072 pulse-per-
All Mitsubishi Servo and Motion system hardware is complimented by a range of software
packages allowing easy programming and
set-up of the units.
What are the Components of a Servo System?
Servo motors
Utilising the most advanced concentrated
winding techniques and latest technology,
these brushless servo motors are among the
most compact on the market.
Mitsubishi Servo Motors are made to high standards and offer a wide range of power, speed
and inertia ratings providing a motor for all
applications. Ranging from 50 W through to
55 kW and with specialist type motors available
(flat “pancake”motors) the new Super Series
Servo Motors complete the line-up of products
offered by Mitsubishi Electric.
Also, all motors in the Mitsubishi Super Series
are fitted with absolute encoders as standard.
Therefore, an absolute system can be created by
simply providing power to Servo amplifier via a
battery. Once this has been done the super
capacitor inside the motor and back-up battery
allow the Servomotor position to be constantly
monitored.
400 V
HA-LFS 11 kW – 55 kW
HC-SFS 500 W – 7 kW
HA-LP 11 kW – 55 kW
HF-SP 500 W – 7 kW
HA-LFS 11 kW– 37 kW
200 V
HC-SFS / HF-SP 500 W – 7 kW
HC-RFS / HC-RP 1 kW – 5 kW
HC-MFS / HF-MP 50 W – 750 W
HC-KFS / HF-KP 50 W – 750 W
1 kW
5 kW
7 kW
10 kW
20 kW
30 kW
40 kW
55 kW
Servo amplifiers
Mitsubishi offer a wide range of Servo amplifiers
to meet the demands of all types of applications.
From standard digital pulse and analogue controlled amplifiers through to dedicated SSCNET
bus type amplifiers, there is a product for all
circumstances.
Real Time Adaptive Tuning (RTAT) is a unique
Mitsubishi technology, enabling the servo to
deliver maximum dynamic performance, even if
the load keeps changing, by automatically tuning online (during operation) to the application.
The Super Series digital pulse and analogue
units of the MR-J2S and MR-J3 series range from
100W units through to 55kW. The SSCNET bus
type amplifiers (type B) offer the user ease of
connectivity, via SSCNET.
400 V
MR-J2S-A/B 600 W – 55 kW
200 V
MR-J3-A/B/T 600 W – 55 kW
MR-J2S-A/B 100 W – 37 kW
MR-J3-A/B/T 100 W – 37 kW
0
1 kW
5 kW
10 kW
Positioning controllers
For the compact, cost effective, FX range of
PLCs, the FX2N-10PG unit provides single-axis
control with in-built positioning tables, fast
external start and an output pulse rate of up
to 1 MHz. The new module FX3U-20SSC-H is a
positioning module for the MR-J3B series. This
modules provide a quick and easy, but efficient
positoning control system for simpler applications.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:26:07
20 kW
30 kW
For larger, more complex applications the new
powerful Qn PLC range offers three new QD75
Series modules (one, two and four axes).
These are: open-collector output type (QD75P
series), Differential output type (QD75D series)
and SSCNET bus type (QD75M series). Using the
SSCNET system can provide much improved,
easier to use positioning system, with reduced
wiring and better noise immunity. All QD75
series controllers can provide functionality such
as interpolation and speed-position operation etc.
37 kW 40 kW
55 kW
Motion Controllers
For specialist applications requiring the highest
level of control and precision, the dynamic servo
technology provided by the Q-Motion CPU is
combined with the powerful processing power
of the Q series PLC CPU, creating a completely new
generation of motion controller products.This
fully integrated and flexible system has the
capability to control up to 96 axes using SSCNET,
which is more than capable for handling any
motion application.
91
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
0
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
System Configuration
PLC CPU
Software: GX (IEC) Developer
Software: MT Developer
Main base unit
/
/
/
Manual pulse generator
Pulse generator
interface module
Encoder
interface
External signals
interface
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Serial absolute
synchronous encoder
Cable
Cable
Servo amplifier
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
N
N
P1
P1
P2
P2
P
C
D
L11
L21
P
C
D
L11
L21
U
U
V
V
W
W
L1
L2
L1
L3
L2
N
L3
P1
N
P2
P1
P2
P
C
P
D
C
L11
D
L21
L11
U
L21
V
U
W
V
W
Servo motors
Notes:
1. The first CPU on the main base unit must always be a PLC CPU
(e.g. Q00, Q01, Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q12H/Q25H).
92
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:26:27
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
X-Y Table System Configurations
An X-Y table is a typical two axes servo application, commonly used in industry for pick and
place systems such as PCB component insertion
machines through to welding machines.
The following information provides two examples of possible X-Y table system configurations,
using Mitsubishi automation equipment.
The first is a linear FX2N-10PG based system and
the second is a more complex interpolating
QD75M (SSCNET) based system.
System 1: FX2N-10PG based system
Products
FX2N-16MR-ES/UL
FX2N-10PG
FX2N-10PG
MR-J2S-10A
HC-KFS13
MR-J2S-60A
HC-SFS52
Function
PLC
Pulse train output module
Pulse train output module
Servo Amplifier
Motor
Servo Amplifier
Motor
The FX2N-10PG is a single axis position
control module, therefore two modules
are used to control the X and Y axes. The
FX2N-10PG uses a differential pulse train
output to control the position of the
Servo Motors. As a differential pulse train
output is given, then the MR-J2S-A Series
of Servo amplifiers must be used (these
allow control from either a pulse train or
analogue source).
One of the disadvantages of using the
FX2N-10PG system is that interpolation
between the two axes is not possible.
This is due to the fact that as the position
modules are independent of each other
they cannot make combined moves.
Another disadvantage is that the controller (FX PLC) does not know the true position of each of the Servo motors. This
may cause problems if a power-down situation occurs or an axis is physically
moved.
One major advantage that the
FX2N-10PG systems have is that they can
be easily integrated into existing FX PLC
systems.
앬
앬
앬
앬
Simple to use
Widely used
Cost effective
Simple functionality
System 2: QD75M based system
Function
Q PLC
Positioning Controller
Servo Amplifier
Motor
Servo Amplifier
Motor
Servo Amplifier Battery
Servo Amplifier Battery
The QD75M based system uses the powerful modular Qn PLC Series, providing
greater functionality and expandability
options. The QD75M system is connected
using SSCNET (Servo System Controller
Network), which is Mitsubishi’s dedicated
motion control network. SSCNET simplifies the set-up of the system and reduces
the wiring required. SSCNET systems are
created by simply plugging an amplifier
into the main controller (QD75M) and
then "daisy-chaining" each additional
axis that is added. SSCNET connectivity
requires MR-J2S-B type amplifiers to be
used.
Furthermore, as the Servo amplifiers are
connected by a bus system, all Servo
data, such as current position, torque etc.
can all be monitored back at the main
controller (Q00J PLC) as the data is
automatically updated on the QD75M
module.
Also, all of the internal Servo parameters
can be set from the PLC, again due to the
bus system used.
The bus system also means that position
data is sent serially, therefore reducing
any possible interference due to noise.
Finally, as both axes are controlled from
one high function module (QD75M2),
interpolation between the two axes is
possible.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
SSCNET capability
Easy of set-up
High functionality
Expandability
Module Options
Reduced Wiring
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Products
Q00J
QD75-M2
MR-J2S-10B
HC-KFS13
MR-J2S-40B
HC-SFS52
MR-BAT
MR-BAT
X-Y table control
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:26:33
93
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Servo Motor Features and Typical Applications
The recommended combinations of servo amplifiers and
servo motors are listed in the tables below.
All servo motors are fitted with an absolute encoder and
optionally avalable with an electromagnetic brake.
Model designation
K
Features
Application example
Low inertia
앬
Larger motor inertia moment makes
this unit well suited for machines
with fluctuating load inertia
moment or machines with low
rigidity such as conveyors.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Conveyors
Food preparation machinery
Printers
Small loaders and unloaders
Small robots and component
assembly devices
Small X-Y tables
Small press feeders
Small robots
M
Ultra low inertia
앬
Small motor inertia moment makes
this unit well suited for
high-dynamic positioning
operations with extra small
cycle times.
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Inserters, mounters, bonders
Printed board hole openers
In-circuit testers
Label printers
Knitting and embroidery
machinery
Ultra-small robots and robot tips
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Inserters, mounters, bonders
S
Medium inertia
앬
Stable control is performed from
low to high speeds, enabling this
unit to handle a wide range of applications (e.g. direct connection to
ball screw components).
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Conveyor machinery
Specialised machinery
Robots
Loaders and unloaders
Winders and tension devices
Turrets
X-Y tables
Test devices
Winders and tension devices
R
Low inertia
앬
A compact sized low-inertia
moment model with medium
capacity. Well suited for highfrequency operation.
앬
앬
Roll feeders
Loaders and unloaders
High-frequency conveyor
machinery
Wrapping machinery
Note: Other types of motors are available on request.
94
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:26:53
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
Servo Motors Overview
Motors for MR-J2S series servo amplifiers
Motor series
Rated
speed
[r/min]
HC-KFS
K
M
3000
HC-MFS
3000
2000
HC-SFS
S
2000
HC-RFS
R
3000
Rated
output
capacity
[kW]
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.5
5.0
7.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.5
5.0
7.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.5
5.0
Servo
motor
model
Servo motor type
Protective
Voltage structure
Amplifier pairing MR-J2S
10A
10B
20A
20B
40A
40B
60A
60B
70A
70B
100A
100B
200A
200B
350A
350B
500A
500B
700A
700B
쏹
쏹
HC-KFS053
HC-KFS13
HC-KFS23
HC-KFS43
HC-KFS73
HC-MFS053
HC-MFS13
HC-MFS23
HC-MFS43
HC-MFS73
HC-SFS52
HC-SFS102
HC-SFS152
HC-SFS202
HC-SFS352
HC-SFS502
HC-SFS702
HC-SFS524
HC-SFS1024
HC-SFS1524
HC-SFS2024
HC-SFS3524
HC-SFS5024
HC-SFS7024
HC-RFS103
HC-RFS153
HC-RFS203
HC-RFS353
HC-RFS503
200 V AC
쏹
IP55
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
200 V AC
쏹
IP55
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
200 V AC
쏹
쏹
IP65
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
400 V AC
쏹
쏹
IP65
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
200 V AC
쏹
IP65
쏹
쏹
Art. no.
134872
134845
126013
134873
135968
134809
134852
134883
134810
134877
134811
134864
134865
134866
134867
134868
134869
151551
151554
151555
151556
150873
150875
151557
134853
134854
134855
134856
134857
Motors for MR-J3 series servo amplifiers
Rated
speed
[r/min]
HF-KP
K
M
3000
HF-MP
3000
HF-SP
S
2000
HC-RP
R
3000
Rated
output
capacity
[kW]
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,75
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,75
0,5
1,0
1,5
2,0
3,5
5,0
7,0
2,0
2,0
3,5
5,0
5,0
Servo
motor
model
Servo motor type
Voltage
HF-KP053
HF-KP13
HF-KP23
HF-KP43
HF-KP73
HF-MP053
HF-MP13
HF-MP23
HF-MP43
HF-MP73
HF-SP52
HF-SP102
HF-SP152
HF-SP202
HF-SP352
HF-SP502
HF-SP702
HC-RP103
HC-RP153
HC-RP203
HC-RP353
HC-RP503
Protective
structure
10A
10B
200 V AC
HF-SP
2000
HF-SP524
HF-SP1024
HF-SP1524
HF-SP2024
HF-SP3524
HF-SP5024
HF-SP7024
40A
40B
60A
60B
70A
70B
100A
100B
200A
200B
350A
350B
500A
500B
700A
700B
쏹
IP65
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
200 V AC
쏹
IP65
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
200 V AC
쏹
쏹
IP67
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
200 V AC
쏹
IP65
쏹
쏹
—
0,5
1,0
1,5
2,0
3,5
5,0
7,0
20A
20B
쏹
쏹
Motor series
400 V
S
Amplifier pairing MR-J3
—
—
60A4
60B4
쏹
—
100A4
100B4
200A4
200B4
350A4
350B4
500A4
500B4
700A4
700B4
쏹
400 V AC
IP67
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
쏹
Art. no.
161507
160211
161508
161509
161510
161515
161516
161517
161518
161519
161525
161526
161527
161528
161529
161530
161531
168667
168668
168669
168670
168671
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Motor series
200 V
Art. no.
192042
192043
192054
192055
192056
192057
192058
Note: Other types of motors are available on request.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:26:56
95
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Dimensions of motors for MR-J2S series servo amplifiers
HC-KFS053 (B), HC-KFS13 (B), HC-MFS053 (B), HC-MFS13 (B)
L
°
2 x ø4,5
45
Type
ø30h7
ø4
6
35,7
ø8h6
6,8
40
25
2,5
21,5
5
40,5
KL
9,9
65,5
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HC-KFS053 (B)
HC-MFS053 (B)
81.5 (109.5)
29.5
HC-KFS13 (B)
HC-MFS13 (B)
96.5 (124.5)
44.5
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
Unit: mm
20
HC-KFS23 (B), HC-KFS43 (B), HC-MFS23 (B), HC-MFS43 (B)
3
7
4 x ø5,8
45°
ø50h7
2,7
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HC-KFS23 (B)
HC-MFS23 (B)
99.5 (131.5)
49.1
HC-KFS43 (B)
HC-MFS43 (B)
124.5 (156.5)
72.1
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
ø7
0
42,8
ø14h6
10,6
Type
60
30
L
41
KL
68
9,9
Unit: mm
20
HC-KFS73 (B), HC-MFS73 (B)
40
3
80
4 x ø6,6
45°
ø70h7
8
ø9
0
11
58,1
ø19h6
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
142 (177,5)
39
2,7
86,7
72
9,9
20
19,5
96
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:26:59
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
HC-SFS52 (B), HC-SFS152 (B)
L
55
12
130
3
45°
ø24h6
50
45
ø110h7
ø1
Type
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HC-SFS52 (B)
120 (153)
51.5
HC-SFS102 (B)
145 (178)
76.5
HC-SFS152 (B)
170 (203)
101.5
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
ø1
111
65
4 x ø9
19,5
Unit: mm
KL
41
HC-SFS202 (B), HC-SFS702 (B)
79
L
18
39,5
176
45°
3
75
30
ø2
ø35
KL
69
KA
ø114,3
19.5
Type
L [mm]
HC-SFS202 (B)
HC-SFS352 (B)
KL [mm]
KA [mm]
KB [mm]
145 (193)
68.5
142
46
187 (235)
110.5
142
46
HC-SFS502(B)
208 (256)
131.5
142
46
HC-SFS702 (B)
292 (340)
210.5
150
58
00
ø2
4 x ø13,5
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
KB
Unit: mm
HC-RFS353 (B), HC-RFS503 (B)
100
45
10
3
45°
ø95h7
ø24h6
40
ø1
15
35
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HC-RFS103 (B)
147 (185)
71
HC-RFS153 (B)
172 (210)
96
HC-RFS203 (B)
197 (235)
121
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
96
81,5
ø1
Type
4 x ø9
19,5
KL
Unit: mm
41
HC-RFS103 (B), HC-RFS153 (B), HC-RFS203 (B)
L
63
12
39,5
130
3
45°
5
14
ø110h7
ø
Type
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HC-RFS353 (B)
217 (254)
148
HC-RFS503 (B)
274 (311)
205
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
ø1
65
120
81,5
ø28h6
58
KL
19,5
4 x ø9
Unit: mm
46
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:27:02
97
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
L
39,5
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Dimensions of motors for MR-J3 series servo amplifiers
HF-MP053 (B), HF-MP13 (B), HF-KP053 (B), HF-KP13 (B)
25
2.5
21.5
Type
Æ8h6
Æ30h7
L
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HF-MP053 (B)
66.4 (107.5)
24.5
HF-MP13 (B)
82.4 (123.5)
40.5
HF-KP053 (B)
66.4 (107.5)
24.5
HF-KP13 (B)
82.4 (123.5)
40.5
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
KL
Unit: mm
HF-MP23 (B), HF-MP43 (B), HF-KP23 (B), HF-KP43 (B)
L
30
Æ14h6
Æ50h7
Type
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HF-MP23 (B)
82.4 (116.1)
39.3
HF-MP43 (B)
98.5 (138.0)
61.2
HF-KP23 (B)
82.4 (116.1)
39.3
HF-KP43 (B)
98.5 (138.0)
61.2
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
KL
Unit: mm
HF-MP73 (B), HF-KP73 (B)
40
L
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HF-MP73 (B)
113.8 (157.0)
72.3
HF-KP73 (B)
113.8 (157.0)
72.3
Æ70h7
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
Unit: mm
Æ19h6
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Type
KL
HF-SP52 (B), HF-SP102 (B), HF-SP152 (B)
55
L
50
X
Type
3
Æ110h7
12
L [mm]
KL [mm]
X [mm]
HF-SP52 (B)
118.5 (153.0)
57.8
38.2 (43.5)
HF-SP102 (B)
140.5 (175.0)
79.8
38.2 (43.5)
HF-SP152 (B)
162.5 (197.0)
101.8
38.2 (43.5)
112.5
79.9
50.9
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
13
Unit: mm
59
29
13.5
KL
98
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:27:15
58
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
HF-SP202 (B), HF-SP352 (B), HF-SP502 (B), HF-SP702 (B)
L
Type
96.9
50.9
,
,
,
X
L [mm]
KL [mm]
X [mm]
HF-SP202 (B)
143.5 (193.0)
79.8
38.5 (45.5)
HF-SP352 (B)
183.5 (233.0)
119.8
38.5 (45.5)
HF-SP502 (B)
203.5 (253.0)
139.8
38.5 (45.5)
HF-SP702 (B)
263.5 (313.0)
191.8
38.5 (45.5)
140.9
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
Unit: mm
,
KL
HC-RP103 (B), HC-RP153 (B), HC-RP203 (B)
L
Æ95h7
50.9
Æ24h6
Type
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HC-RP103 (B)
145.5 (183.5)
69.5
HC-RP153 (B)
170.5 (208.5)
94.5
HC-RP203 (B)
195.5 (233.5)
119.5
96
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
Unit: mm
KL
HC-RP353 (B), HC-RP503 (B)
Æ28h6
Type
L [mm]
KL [mm]
HC-RP353 (B)
215.5 (252.5)
148
HC-RP503 (B)
272.5 (309.5)
205
Unit: mm
120
50.9
Æ110h7
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
KL
HA-LP11K2[4] (B), HA-LP15K2[4] (B), HA-LP22K2[4] (B)
L1
110
X
L2
,
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:27:30
,
L1 [mm]
L2 [mm]
X
HA-LP11K2[4] (B)
480 (550)
262 (334)
426 (498)
HA-LP15K2[4] (B)
495 (610)
289 (400)
454 (565)
HA-LP22K2[4] (B)
555 (670)
346 (457)
511 (622)
60
Æ23h7
Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
60
140
Æ55m6
,
Type
Unit: mm
99
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
L
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
MR-J2S Servo Amplifier Specifications (200 V Type)
The MR-J2S-A are general purpose servo
amplifiers with analog inputs and pulse
train interface as a standard. The range
covers 100 W units (MR-J2S-10A) through
to 7 kW (MR-J2S-700A).
MITSUBISHI MELSERVO
The MR-J2S-B (SSCNET bus type) servo
amplifiers are designed for use with
the Mitsubishi motion controllers of the
MELSEC System Q and MELSEC A series.
The motion controllers and servo
amplifiers can be linked via the high
speed SSCNET network.
10A
10B
Common specifications MR-J2S-A/B
Power supply
40A
40B
60A
60B
70A
70B
100A
100B
200A
200B
350A
350B
voltage / frequency �
3-phase 200 – 230 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz; 1-phase 230 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
3-phase 200 – 230 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
permissible voltage fluctuation
3-phase 200 – 230 V AC: 170 – 253 V AC, 1-phase 230 V AC: 207 – 253 V AC
3-phase 170 – 253 V AC
permissible frequency fluctuation
±5%
Control system
Sinusoidal PWM control / current control system
Dynamic brake
Built-in
500A
500B
Speed frequency response
550 Hz
Protective functions
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection,
encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage / sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection.
Structure
Environment
Self-cooling, open (IP00)
Operation: 0 – 55 °C (no freezing), storage: -20 – 65 °C (no freezing)
ambient humidity
Operation: 90 % RH max. (no condensation), storage: 90 % RH max. (no condensation)
atmosphere
Inside control panel; no corrossive gas, no flammable gas, no oil mist, no dust
elevation
1000 m or less above sea level
oscillation
5.9 m/s2 (0.6 G) max.
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
A type
B type
햲
700A
700B
Fan-cooling, open (IP00)
ambient temperature
Weight [kg]
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
20A
20B
Connecting the amplifiers to SSCNET
guarantees reliable operation and
eliminates the need for complex wiring.
The range also covers 100 W units
(MR-J2S-10B) through to 7 kW
(MR-J2S-700B).
0.7
0.7
1.1
1.1
1.7
1.7
2.0
2.0
4.9
7.2
50x168x135
50x168x135
70x168x135
70x168x135
70x168x190
70x168x190
90x168x195
90x168x195
130x250x200
180x350x200
Art. no.
134807
134808
134806
134828
134829
134831
134827
134832
135969
135854
Art. no.
134833
134834
134835
134836
134837
134838
134839
134840
135971
135970
200A
350A
500A
700A
200B
350B
500B
700B
mm
Rated output capacity and rated rotation speed of the servo motor used in combination with the servo amplifier are as indicated when using the power voltage and
frequency listed. Output and speed cannot be guaranteed when the power supply voltage is less than specified.
Control specifications MR-J2S-A
maximum input pulse frequency
Position control
mode
Speed control
mode
Torque control
specifications
10A
20A
40A
60A
70A
100A
500 kpps (when using differential receiver), 200 kpps (when using open collector)
positioning feedback pulse
Resolution per encoder / servo motor rotation (131072 pulses/revolution)
command pulse multiple
Electronic gear A/B multiple; A: 1 – 65535 or 131072, B: 1 – 65535, 1/50 < A/B < 500
Ppositioning complete width setting
0 to ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
excess error
±2,5 rotations
torque limit input
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – + 10 V DC / maximum torque)
speed control range
Analog speed command 1:2000, internal speed command 1:5000
analog speed command input
0 – ± 10 V DC / rated speed
speed fluctuation rate
±0.01 % max. (load fluctuation 0 – 100 %); 0 % (power fluctuation ±10 %)
±0.2 % max. (ambient temperature 25 °C ±10 °C ), when using external analog speed command
torque limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – + 10 V DC / maximum torque)
torque command input
0 – ±8 V DC / maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12 kW)
speed limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – ± 10 V DC, rated speed)
Control specifications MR-J2S-B (SSCNET)
10B
Position and speed control
Possible using SSCNET control
Communication speed
Approximately 5,6 Mbps
100
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:27:36
20B
40B
60B
70B
100B
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
MR-J3 Servo Amplifier Specifications (200 V Type)
The MR-J3-A are general purpose servo
amplifiers with analog inputs and pulse
train interface as a standard. The range
covers 100 W units (MR-J3-10A) through
to 7 kW (MR-J3-700A).
The MR-J3-B (SSCNET III bus type) servo
amplifiers are designed for use with the
Mitsubishi motion controllers of the
MELSEC System Q series. The motion
controllers and servo amplifiers can be
linked via the high speed SSCNET III network.
CN5
CN6
L2
L3
CN3
N
P1
P2
CN1
P
C
D
L11
L21
Connecting the amplifiers to SSCNET
guarantees reliable operation and
eliminates the need for complex
wiring. The range also covers 100 W
units (MR-J3-10B) through to 7 kW
(MR-J3-700B).
U
V
E
CN4 CN2
CHARG
LCN2
W
10A
10B
10T
Common specifications MR-J3-A/B/T
Power supply
Positioning via position tables (target
position, motor speed, acceleration/deceleration ramp). The MR-J3-T
can store 256 position tables, accessed
via external inputs or CC-Link.
20A
20B
20T
40A
40B
40T
60A
60B
60T
70A
70B
70T
100A
100B
100T
200A
200B
200T
350A
350B
350T
voltage / frequency �
3-phase 200 – 230 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz; 1-phase 230 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
3-phase 200 – 230 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
permissible voltage fluctuation
3-phase 200 – 230 V AC: 170 – 253 V AC, 1-phase 230 V AC: 207 – 253 V AC
3-phase 170 – 253 V AC
permissible frequency fluctuation
±5%
Control system
Sinusoidal PWM control / current control system
Dynamic brake
Built-in
500A
500B
500T
Speed frequency response
900Hz
Protective functions
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection,
encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage / sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection.
Structure
Environment
Self-cooling, open (IP00)
Fan-cooling, open (IP00)
ambient temperature
Operation: 0 – 55 °C (no freezing), storage: -20 – 65 °C (no freezing)
ambient humidity
Operation: 90 % RH max. (no condensation), storage: 90 % RH max. (no condensation)
atmosphere
Inside control panel; no corrossive gas, no flammable gas, no oil mist, no dust
elevation
1000 m or less above sea level
oscillation
5.9 m/s2 (0.6 G) max.
Weight [kg]
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
2.3
2.3
4.6
6.2
40x168x135
40x168x135
40x168x170
40x168x170
60x168x185
60x168x185
90x168x195
90x168x195
130x250x200
172x300x200
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
A type
Art. no.
16020
161485
161486
161487
161488
161489
161490
161491
161492
161493
B type
Art. no.
161497
161498
161499
161500
161501
161502
161503
161504
161505
161506
T type
Art. no.
190647
190648
190649
190650
190651
190652
190653
190654
190655
190656
200A
350A
500A
700A
200B
350B
500B
700B
햲
mm
700A
700B
700T
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
L1
A servo amplifier with built-in positioning (MR-J3-T) is available soon.
Rated output capacity and rated rotation speed of the servo motor used in combination with the servo amplifier are as indicated when using the power voltage and
frequency listed. Output and speed cannot be guaranteed when the power supply voltage is less than specified.
Control specifications MR-J3-A
maximum input pulse frequency
Position control
mode
Speed control
mode
Torque control
specifications
10A
20A
40A
60A
70A
100A
1000 kpps (when using differential receiver), 200 kpps (when using open collector)
positioning feedback pulse
Resolution per encoder / servo motor rotation (262144 pulses/revolution)
command pulse multiple
Electronic gear A/B multiple; A: 1 – 1048576, B: 1 – 1048576, 1/10 < A/B < 2000
Ppositioning complete width setting
0 – ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
excess error
±3 rotations
torque limit input
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – + 10 V DC / maximum torque)
speed control range
Analog speed command 1:2000, internal speed command 1:5000
analog speed command input
0 – ± 10 V DC / rated speed
speed fluctuation rate
±0.01 % max. (load fluctuation 0 – 100 %); 0 % (power fluctuation ±10 %)
±0.2 % max. (ambient temperature 25 °C ±10 °C ), when using external analog speed command
torque limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – +10 V DC / maximum torque)
torque command input
0 – ±8 V DC / maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12 kW)
speed limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – ± 10 V DC, rated speed)
Control specifications MR-J3-B (SSCNET III)
10B
Position and speed control
Possible using SSCNET III control
20B
Comunication speed
50 Mbps
40B
60B
70B
100B
Control specifications MR-J3-T
Command interface
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:27:42
CC-Link communication (Ver. 1.10), DIO command (extension IO unit MR-J3-D01 is required), or RS-422 communication
101
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
MR-J2S Servo Amplifier Specifications (400 V Type)
Mitsubishi's 400 V range of servo amplifiers provides the same industry leading
functionality as the 200 V range.
The 400 V servo amplifiers are available
over a wide range from 600 W rating to
the very powerful 22 kW rating. Suitable
for all types of automation solutions,
MITSUBISHI MELSERVO
400V class
the 400 V servo amplifiers also provide
sink/source logic selectability.
For amplifiers larger than 22 kW please
contact your nearest Mitsubishi office.
L1
L2
L3
P
C
D
N
24V
L11
U
V
W
0V
L21
60A4
60B4
Common specifications MR-J2S-A4/B4
Power
supply
3-phase 380 – 480 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
permissible voltage fluctuation
3-phase 323 – 528 V AC, 50/60 Hz
permissible frequency fluctuation
± 5 % max.
200A4
200B4
350A4
350B4
500A4
500B4
700A4
700B4
11KA4
11KB4
15KA4
15KB4
22KA4
22KB4
Control system
Sinusoidal PWM control / current control system
Dynamic brake
Built-in
Speed frequency response
550 Hz
Protective functions
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection, encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage / sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection.
Structure
Environment
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
A type
B type
햲
External option
Self-cooling, open (IP00)
ambient temperature
Operation: 0 – 55 °C (no freezing), storage: -20 – 65 °C (no freezing)
ambient humidity
Operation: 90 % RH max. (no condensation), storage: 90 % RH max. (no condensation)
atmosphere
Inside control panel; no corrossive gas, no flammable gas, no oil mist, no dust
elevation
1000 m or less above sea level
oscillation
5.9 m/s2 (0.6 G) max.
Weight [kg]
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
100A4
100B4
voltage /frequency �
2.1
2.2
2.2
5.0
5.0
7.2
15.0
16.0
20.0
90x168x195
90x168x195
90x168x195
130x250x200
130x250x200
180x350x200
260x400x260
260x400x260
350x400x260
Art. no.
151546
151547
151548
150830
150832
151550
150854
150855
150856
Art. no.
154329
154328
154327
154326
154325
154324
150862
150863
150865
11KA4
15KA4
22KA4
11KB4
15KB4
22KB4
mm
Rated output capacity and rated rotation speed of the servo motor used in combination with the servo amplifier are as indicated when using the power voltage and frequency listed.
Output and speed cannot be guaranteed when the power supply voltage is less than specified.
Control specifications MR-J2S-A4
maximum input pulse frequency
Position
control
mode
Speed
control
mode
Torque control
specifications
60A4
100A4
200A4
350A4
500A4
700A4
500 kpps (when using differential receiver), 200 kpps (when using open collector)
positioning feedback pulse
Resolution per encoder / servo motor rotation (131072 pulses/revolution)
command pulse multiple
Electronic gear A/B multiple; A: 1 – 65535 or 131072, B: 1 – 65535, 1/50 < A/B < 500
Ppositioning complete width setting
0 – ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
excess error
±2,5 rotations
torque limit input
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – + 10 V DC / maximum torque)
speed control range
Analog speed command 1:2000, internal speed command 1:5000
analog speed command input
0 – ± 10 V DC / rated speed
speed fluctuation rate
±0.01 % max. (load fluctuation 0 – 100 %); 0 % (power fluctuation ±10 %)
±0.2 % max. (ambient temperature 25 °C ±10 °C ), when using external analog speed command
torque limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – + 10 V DC / maximum torque)
torque command input
0 – ±8 V DC / maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12 kW)
speed limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – ± 10 V DC, rated speed)
Control specifications MR-J2S-B4 (SSCNET)
60B4
Position and speed control
Possible using SSCNET control
Comunication speed
5,6 Mbps
102
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:27:49
100B4
200B4
350B4
500B4
700B4
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
MR-J3S Servo Amplifier Specifications (400 V Type)
Mitsubishi's 400 V range of servo amplifiers provides the same industry leading
functionality as the 200 V range.
The 400 V servo amplifiers are available
over a wide range from 600 W rating to
the very powerful 22 kW rating. Suitable
for all types of automation solutions,
For amplifiers larger than 22 kW please
contact your nearest Mitsubishi office.
CN4
CN2L
CN2
CN1
CN3
CN6
CN5
OPEN
the 400 V servo amplifiers also provide
sink/source logic selectability.
MR-J3-500A
CHARGE
60A4
60B4
60T4
Common specifications MR-J3S-A4/B4/T4
Power
supply
100A4
100B4
100T4
voltage /frequency �
3-phase 380 – 480 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
permissible voltage fluctuation
3-phase 323 – 528 V AC, 50/60 Hz
permissible frequency fluctuation
± 5 % max.
200A4
200B4
200T4
350A4
350B4
350T4
500A4
500B4
500T4
700A4
700B4
700T4
11KA4
11KB4
11KT4
15KA4
15KB4
15KT4
22KA4
22KB4
22KT4
Control system
Sinusoidal PWM control / current control system
Dynamic brake
Built-in
Speed frequency response
900 Hz
Protective functions
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection, encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage / sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection.
Structure
Self-cooling, open (IP00)
Operation: 0 – 55 °C (no freezing), storage: -20 – 65 °C (no freezing)
ambient humidity
Operation: 90 % RH max. (no condensation), storage: 90 % RH max. (no condensation)
atmosphere
Inside control panel; no corrossive gas, no flammable gas, no oil mist, no dust
elevation
1000 m or less above sea level
oscillation
5.9 m/s2 (0.6 G) max.
Weight [kg]
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
A type
B type
T type
햲
Fan cooling
ambient temperature
1.7
1.7
2.1
4.6
4.6
6.2
18
18
19
90x168x195
90x168x195
90x168x195
130x250x200
130x250x200
180x350x200
260x400x260
260x400x260
260x400x260
Art. no.
205081
205082
205083
205084
205085
205086
on request
on request
on request
Art. no.
192036
192037
192038
192039
192040
192041
on request
on request
on request
Art. no.
212524
212525
212526
212527
212528
212529
on request
on request
on request
11KA4
15KA4
22KA4
11KB4
15KB4
22KB4
mm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Environment
External option
Rated output capacity and rated rotation speed of the servo motor used in combination with the servo amplifier are as indicated when using the power voltage and frequency listed.
Output and speed cannot be guaranteed when the power supply voltage is less than specified.
Control specifications MR-J3S-A4
maximum input pulse frequency
Position
control
mode
Speed
control
mode
Torque control
specifications
60A4
100A4
200A4
350A4
500A4
700A4
1 Mpps (when using differential receiver), 200 kpps (when using open collector)
positioning feedback pulse
Resolution per encoder / servo motor rotation (262144 pulses/revolution)
command pulse multiple
Electronic gear A/B multiple; A: 1 – 1048576 or 131072, B: 1 – 1048576, 1/10 < A/B < 2000
Ppositioning complete width setting
0 – ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
excess error
±3 rotations
torque limit input
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – ± 10 V DC / maximum torque)
speed control range
Analog speed command 1:2000, internal speed command 1:5000
analog speed command input
0 – ± 10 V DC / rated speed
speed fluctuation rate
±0.01 % max. (load fluctuation 0 – 100 %); 0 % (power fluctuation ±10 %)
±0.2 % max. (ambient temperature 25 °C ±10 °C ), when using external analog speed command
torque limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – ± 10 V DC / maximum torque)
torque command input
0 – ±8 V DC / maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12 kW)
speed limit
Set by parameters or external analog input (0 – ± 10 V DC, rated speed)
Control specifications MR-J2S-B4 (SSCNET)
60B4
Position and speed control
Possible using SSCNET III control
100B4
Comunication speed
50 Mbps
200B4
350B4
500B4
700B4
Control specifications MR-J3-T
Command interface
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:27:55
CC-Link communication (Ver. 1.10), DIO command (extension IO unit MR-J3-D01 is required), or RS-422 communication
103
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Positioning Modules
QD75P2
RUN
AX1
AX2
ERR.
AX1
AX2
The MELSEC System Q offers three different positioning module series for control
of up to four axes
앬 Open-collector output type (QD75P
series)
앬 Differential output type (QD75D
series)
앬 SSCNET bus type (QD75M series)
The open-collector and differential output controllers can be used with standard type servo amplifiers
(MR-J2S-A/MR-J3-A), whilst the QD75M
series controllers should be used with
the MR-J2S-B/MR-J3-B (SSCNET bus type)
Servo amplifiers. Using the SSCNET system can provide much improved, easier
to use positioning system, with reduced
wiring and better noise immunity.
All QD75 series positioning modules can
provide functionality such as interpolation and speed-position operation etc.
The open-collector output type modules
provide positioning with open loop control. The modules generate the travel
command via the pulse chain. The speed
is proportional to the pulse frequency
and the distance travelled is proportional
to the pulse length.
The differential output type modules are
suitable for bridging long distances
between the module and the drive
system due to the fact that the output
allows large motor cable lengths.
QD75D1
QD75P1
QD75D2
QD75P2
QD75D4
QD75P4
1
1
2
2
4
4
—
—
2 axis linear and circular interpolation
2, 3, or 4 axis linear and 2 axis circular interpolation
600 per axis
Differential driver
Open collector
Differential driver
Open collector
Differential driver
Open collector
Pulse chain
Pulse chain
Pulse chain
Pulse chain
Pulse chain
Pulse chain
PTP control: absolute data and/or incremental; speed/position swiching control: incremental; locus/speed control: incremental; path control: absolute data and/or incremental
Speed/position 0 – 2 147 483 647 pulse
Incremental -2 147 483 648 – 2 147 483 647 pulse
Absolute data: -2 147 483 648 – 2 147 483 647 pulse
switching control : 0 – 21 4748 364.7 µm
method:
-214 748 364.8 – 214 748 364,7 µm
-21 4748 364.8 – 214 748 364.7 µm
units
0 – 21 474.83647 inch
-21 474.83648 – 21 474.83647 inch
-21 474.83648 – 21 474.83647 inch
0 – 21 474.83647 degree
-21 474.83648 – 21 474.83647 degree
0 – 359.99999 degree
1
– 1 000 000
pulse/s
Positioning
0.01 – 20 000 000.00 mm/min
speed
0.001 – 200 000.000
degree/min
0.001 – 200 000.000
inch/min
acceleration/deceleration processing Automatic trapezoidal or S-pattern acceleration and deceleration or automatic S-pattern acceleration and deceleration
acceleration and deceleration time
1 – 8388608 ms (4 patterns, each can be set)
rapid stop decceleration time
1 – 8388608 ms
I/O points
32
32
32
32
32
32
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm 27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Specifications
Number of control axes
Interpolation
Positioning data itmes
Output type
Output signal
method
Order information
Accessories
Art.no. 129675
132581
129676
132582
129677
40-pin connector and ready to use connection cables and system terminals; Programming software: GX Configurator QP, art. no.: 132219
132583
Specifications
Number of control axes
Interpolation
Positioning data itmes
Output type
Output signal
method
QD75M1
QD75MH1
QD75M2
QD75MH2
QD75M4
QD75MH4
1
1
2
2
4
4
—
—
2 axis linear and circular interpolation
2, 3, or 4 axis linear and 2 axis circular interpolation
600 per axis
SSCNET
SSCNET III
SSCNET
SSCNET III
SSCNET
SSCNET III
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
PTP control: absolute data and/or incremental; speed/position swiching control: incremental; locus/speed control: incremental; path control: absolute data and/or incremental
Speed/position
0 – 2 147 483 647 pulse
Incremental -2 147 483 648 – 2 147 483 647 pulse
Absolute data: -2 147 483 648 – 2 147 483 647 pulse
switching control : 0 – 21 4748 364.7 µm
method: -214 748 364.8 – 214 748 364,7 µm
-21 4748 364.8 – 214 748 364.7 µm
units
0 – 21 474.83647 inch
-21 474.83648 – 21 474.83647 inch
-21 474.83648 – 21 474.83647 inch
0 – 21 474.83647 degree
-21 474.83648 – 21 474.83647 degree
0 – 359.99999 degree
1
– 1 000 000
pulse/s
Positioning
0.01 – 20 000 000.00 mm/min
speed
0.001 – 200 000.000
degree/min
0.001 – 200 000.000
inch/min
acceleration/deceleration processing Automatic trapezoidal or S-pattern acceleration and deceleration or automatic S-pattern acceleration and deceleration
acceleration and deceleration time
1 – 8388608 ms (4 patterns, each can be set)
rapid stop decceleration time
1 – 8388608 ms
I/O points
32
32
32
32
32
32
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm 27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
27.4 x 98 x 90
Order information
Accessories
104
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:28:00
Art.no. 142153
165761
142154
165762
142155
40-pin connector and ready to use connection cables and system terminals; Programming software: GX Configurator QP, art. no.: 132219
165763
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS ///
Q-Motion CPU
The Q-Motion controller CPU controls
and synchronises the connected servo
amplifiers and servo motors. A motion
system besides the controller CPU, also
includes a PLC CPU. Only after combining
a highly dynamic positioning control
CPU and a PLC, an innovative motion
control system is created.
Q173CPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
M.RUN
BAT.
BOOT
While the Motion CPU controls
large-scale servo movements the PLC
CPU is responsible for the machine control and the communication.
FRONT
SSCNET
CN2
CN1
PULL
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
USB
Using multiple CPUs to distribute the
load improves the overall performance of the whole system
Use of up to 3 motion CPUs within
one system
Large scale control system for up to
96 axes per system
Interpolation of 4 axes simultaneously
Software cam control
Virtual and real master axes
Integration in the high-speed SSCNET
network for communication with
high-performanceservo amplifiers at
up to 50 Mbps
RS-232
Specifications
Q172CPUN
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Type
Motion CPU
Motion CPU
Motion CPU
Motion CPU
I/O points
8192
8192
8192
8192
No. of control axes
8
32
8
32
Interpolation functions
Linear interpolation for up to 4 axes, circular interpolation for 2 axes, helical interpolation for 3 axes
PTP (point to point), speed control/speed-position control, fixed pitch feed, constant speed control, position follow-up control,
speed switching control, high-speed oscillation control, synchronous control (SV22)
acceleration/
deceleration control
Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-curve acceleration/deceleration
compensation
Backlash compensation, electronic gear
Programming language
Motion SFC, dedicated instructions, software for conveyor assembly (SV13), virtual mechanical support language (SV22)
Program capacity
14 k steps
No. of positioning points
3200
Interfaces
USB, RS232C, SSCNET2
Real I/O points (PX/PY)
256 (these I/Os can be allocated directly to the motion CPU)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
mm
Art. no.
USB, RS232C, SSCNET3
27.4 x 98 x 114.3
27.4 x 98 x 114.3
27.4 x 98 x 114.3
27.4 x 98 x 114.3
142695
142696
162417
162416
Q-Motion System Modules
Servo external signals interface module
Q172LX
Serial absolute synchronous encoder
interface module Q172EX and Q172EX-S2
Manual pulse generator interface module
Q173PX
The Q172LX input module is used inconjunction
with a Q Motion CPU to capture external servo
signals.
The serial absolute synchronous encoder interface module Q172EX is a Motion systemmodule
for receiving and evaluating up to two serial
absolute-value encoders. (Incremental encoders
cannot be connected.) Via an external encoder
(MR-HENC / Q170ENC) it is possible to feed a
setpoint source to the Motion system, which
inturn is programmed as a guide axis.
The Manual pulse generator interface module
Q173PX is used in a Motion system to receive
the signals of up to 3 external incremental
encoders or manual impulse generators (hand
wheels).
Up to 8 axes can be evaluated per module. In
this way, cam-switching values, limit switching
positions, stop positions and operating modes
can be easily incorporated into the system.
앬 32 address points for 8 axes for each 4 inputs
앬 Bipolar inputs for positive and negative logic
앬 Galvanic isolation of the inputs by means of
photocoupler
앬 Shortest response time of < 0.4 ms
앬 Modular extension possible
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:28:06
In addition to the interfaces for the signals of
two absolute value encoders, the Q172EX has
two digital inputs with ultra-rapid
responsetimes.
앬 Transfer rate of 2.5 Mbit per second
앬 Resolution of 14 bit MR-HENC /
18Bit Q170ENC
앬 Voltage-failure security of the absolute values
by means of built-in buffer battery
앬 Shortest response times of < 0.4 ms
앬 Modular extension possible
In addition to the inputs for the encoders, the
Q173PX has three digital inputs with which the
encoder signal counting procedure can
bestarted (Encoder start signal).
앬 Bipolar inputs for positive and negative logic
앬 Galvanic isolation of the inputs by means of
photo coupler
앬 Shortest response times of < 0.4 ms
앬 Modular extension possible
105
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS
Positioning
method
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
Example of a Robot system configuration
PC
PLC
Robot controller
RS-232C or
Ethernet
SSC-NET
CC-Link
EMG.STOP
CHANG DISP
STATUS NUMBER
8.8.8.8.8.
MODE
UP
DOWN
SVO.ON
START
RESET
SVO.OFF
STOP
END
REMOVE T/B
CR1
MITSUBISHI
CNC
Tracking
RS232 or
Ethernet
Vision sensor
MITSUBISHI MELSERVO
MITSUBISHI
Remote
I/Os
RV-6S
Servo amplifier
Additional axis (linear)
Practical Functions for all Applications
Optimum acceleration/
deceleration control/
optimum override control
Linear path B
Constant
path regardless
of override
Speed
Normal control
Slack
compensation
Linear path A
Time
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
Automatic acceleration and braking
ramp optimisation for faster cycle
times
Lathe chuck etc.
Continuous Path function for faster
cycle times
Error
Robot
controller
Vision sensor
Robot
Conveyor
Absorption of error using
orthogonal compliance function
Encoder
Workpiece such as foodstuff, cosmetic or medicine
Orthogonal "compliance control"
function for interactive response to
opposing forces
Object tracking function for faster
cycle times
Robot
Robot
movement program
Conveyor, Jig
Program 3
Vision sensor
Paralelní zpracování
Max. 32 Programs
Program 2
Additional
axes
Max. 2 axes
Additional
axes
Max. 3 axes
Additional
axes
Max. 3 axes
Mechanism. 1
Mechanism. 2
Mechanism. 3
Control functions for up to
8 additional axes
I/O
process program
Base program
Communication
process program
Costant execution program (Starts at power ON)
Program 4
Maximum 8 sdditional axes
Multitasking function for parallel
execution of multiple tasks
Parallel execution
Program 1
Gravity compensation for greater
positioning and palletising precision
(common
variables)
Personal computer
106
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:28:15
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS ///
RV-2AJ/RV-1A Articulated-arm Robots – The Powerful Compact Class
The combination of small dimensions and a
reach of around 400 mm make these two 5 and
6 DOF robots very popular in applications
calling for compact robots that can be installed
right next to or even in the system they are
serving. They are predestined for handling
tasks involving the removal and/or placement
of small components. Other applications
include quality control and sample handling in
laboratories and medical facilities.
Component handling can be performed with a
single electric gripper or up to two pneumatic
grippers. Pre-installed pneumatic hoses in the
robot arm make connection of the compressed
air for the grippers quick and easy.
Model
RV-2AJ
RV-1A
Degrees of freedom
5
6
Maximum payload
2 kg
1,5 kg
Gripper flange reach
410 mm
418 mm
Repeatability
±0.02 mm
±0.02 mm
Max. speed
2,100 mm/s
2,200 mm/s
Controller type
CR1
CR1
J1
300 (-150 to +150)
300 (-150 to +150)
J2
180 (-60 to +120)
180 (-60 to +120)
J3
230 (-110 to +120)
95 (+60 to +155)
J4
—
320 (-160 to +160)
J5
180 (-90 to +90)
180 (-90 to +90)
J6
400 (-200 to +200)
400 (-200 to +200)
Robot weight
17 kg
19 kg
Protection
IP 30
Order information Art. no.
129861
Operating range
Need a larger work space combined with compact dimensions? Just like all other Mitsubishi
robots this model can be installed on carriage
for traversing along a linear axis.
J4
J5
J3
J5
J6
J2
J3
J1
J6
RV-2AJ
J2
RV-2AJ
J1
RV-1A
134211
RV-1A
RV-3SJB/RV-3SB Articulated-arm Robots – The Reliable Mid-range Solution
Communicating with other automation plant
is an important area of any automation cell.
The RV-3S series has been optimised with a
choice of three major networking technologies:
Ethernet, Profibus/DP and CC-Link.
For complex automation cells where movement
is restricted, or there is a large distance between
working points, the RV-3S robots can control up
to eight additional axes to its standard robot
arm configuration. Two of these axis can be
Model
RV-3SJB
RV-3SB
Degrees of freedom
5
6
Maximum payload
3.5 kg
3.5 kg
Gripper flange reach
641 mm
642 mm
Repeatability
±0.02 mm
±0.02 mm
Max. speed
5,300 mm/s
5,500 mm/s
Controller type
Operating range
CR2B
CR2B
J1
340 (-170 to +170)
340 (-170 to +170)
J2
225 (-90 to +135)
225 (-90 to +135)
J3
237 (-100 to +137)
191 (-20 to +171)
J4
—
320 (-160 to +160)
J5
240 (-120 to +120)
240 (-120 to +120)
J6
J3
720 (-360 to +360)
720 (-360 to +360)
33 kg
37 kg
Protection
IP65 rating for full arm
J4
J5
J5
J6
J3
J2
J6
MITSUB ISHI
RV-3SJB
Robot weight
interpolated allowing easy and efficient movement around obstructions. The other six axes
can be used to control elements such as linear
slides to move the robot between work stations.
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
The RV-3S series of robots have been designed
to be very simple to integrate into an existing
automation cell. Features such as the direct control over 32 local I/Os allows the robot to interact
directly with sensors and actuators, speeding up
and simplifying system building.
J1
J2
RV-3SJB
MITSUBISHI
J1
RV -3SB
Order information Art. no.
163527
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:28:24
163526
RV-3SB
107
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
RV-6S/RV-6SL/RV-12SL/RV-12S Articulated-arm Robots – Exceptional Power and Reach
With handling payloads of up to 12 kg, a truly
impressive maximum workspace radius of
1,385 mm and exceptional precision (repeatability:
±0.05 mm) the new RV-S series is predestined for
handling parts in industrial production and for
chaining plant stations. An IP65 protection rating provides the capabilities needed for
heavy-duty applications, like those in the motor
industry suppliers sector. The state-of-the-art
technology used in this series drastically
reduces work cycle times. All the new robots
complete the 12-inch test in less than a second!
Multifunctional robot controllers
The robots are controlled by the multitasking
controllers CR2B or CR3. Connection of any image
processing system, control of up to 8 additional
axes and high-speed communication via an
Ethernet link are just a few of the impressive
highlights of these high-performance robot
controllers. Other features include automatic
conveyor belt tracking, crash detection without
sensors and a wide range of powerful functions
for work cycle optimisation.
J4
Model
RV-6S
RV-6SL
RV-12S
RV-12SL
Degrees of freedom
6
6
6
6
Maximum payload
6 kg
6 kg
12 kg
12 kg
Gripper flange reach
696 mm
902 mm
1086
1385 mm
Repeatability
±0.02 mm
±0.02 mm
±0.05 mm
±0.05 mm
Max. speed
9,300 mm/s
8,500 mm/s
9,600 mm/s 9,500 mm/s
CR2B
CR2B
CR3B
Controller type
Operating range
J4
J5
J3
J6
J5
J3
CR3B
J1
340 (-170 to +170)
J2
227 (-92 to +135)
J3
285
295
290
(-107 to +166) (-129to+166) (-130 to +160)
J4
320 (-160 to +160)
J5
240 (-120 to +120)
J6
720 (-360 to +360) (expandable)
J6
J2
J1
MITSUBISHI
J2
RV-6S
Robot weight
58 kg
60 kg
Protection
IP 54 (J1 to J3), IP 65 (J4 to J6)
Order information Art. no.
152466
152465
MITSUB ISHI
J1
RV-6S
93 kg
98 kg
RV-6SL
156734
RV-6SL
152467
RP-AH SCARA Robots – Outstanding Speed Plus High Precision
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
The RP-1AH is in its element in all applications
where parts have to be processed quickly and
precisely in cramped quarters. It has an installation footprint of just 200 x 160 mm and a reach
of 236 mm, and it can place components with a
precision of ±0.005 mm. This combination of
compact dimensions and great precision predestine the RP robots for micro-handling tasks
like micro-assembly and the population and soldering of SMD circuit boards for mobile phones.
The robots of this series are incomparably more
flexible than traditional automated machines,
Model
RP-1AH
RP-3AH
RP-5AH
Degrees of freedom
4
4
4
Maximum payload
1 kg
3 kg
5 kg
Controller type
CR1
CR1
CR1
150 x 105 (A6 size)
210 x 148 (A5 size)
297 x 210
(A4 size)
30
50
50
±200
±200
±200
X-Y surface
(mm)
±0.005
±0.008
±0.01
J3 vertical
motion
(mm)
±0.01
±0.01
±0.01
J4 (deg.)
±0.02
±0.03
±0.03
J3-axes travel (in mm)
30
50
50
Robot weight
12 kg
24 kg
25 kg
Order information Art. no.
134183
131626
131628
W x D (mm)
Operating limits
J3 vertical
motion
(mm)
J4 (deg.)
Repet position
accuracy
and this pays off in greatly enhanced efficiency
and higher productivity.
J1
J2
MITSUBISHI
RP-1AH
J4
J3
108
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:28:39
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS ///
RH-SH SCARA Robots – Specialists for Palletising www.aspect-online.de
No reference point travel
Optimum gripper connections
Travel and position are measured with absolute
encoders, so that the robot can start work as soon
as it is powered up without wasting time with reference point traverses. In fact, the robot can even
resume at the point where it left off after power
failures and emergency shutdowns in the middle
of a movement sequence. In most cases, this
eliminates the need to reset the entire system.
Pneumatic hoses and signal connection lines
are routed inside the robot, making it easy to
connect grippers and sensors.
Model
Degrees of freedom
Maximum payload
Controller type
Gripper flange reach
RH-6SH
4
6 kg
CR2B
550 mm
254 (±127)
290 (±145)
200 (97–297)
Order information Art. no.
Unpack, calibrate, start work
You can start work almost as soon as you have
unpacked the robot and installed the arm
assembly. You only have to enter the reference
point data recorded at the factory, then the
robot is ready to execute the first movements.
RH-12SH
4
12 kg
CR2B
850 mm
280 (±140)
306 (±153)
350 (-10–340)
J1 (deg.)
J2 (deg.)
Operating range J3 (Z) (mm)
J4 (0 Axes)
720 (±360)
(deg.)
Repeatability X-Y direction
±0.02 mm
Z-axes travel in mm
200
7782 (J1, J2, J4)
Max. speed (mm/s)
6003 (J1, J2)
Robot weight
21 kg
Protection
IP 20
SCARA robots are ideal for sorting, palletising
and component installation. They have a short
cycle period of less than 0.5 seconds for a movement sequence of 25 mm vertical lift, 300 mm
horizontal traverse and 25 mm vertical lower
and return (the 12” test).
J1
720 (±360)
J3
±0.025 mm
350
11221 (J1, J2, J4)
6612 (J1, J2)
45 kg
166053
RH-6SH
J2
J4
166054
Powerful Controllers CR1, CR2B and CR3
EMG.STOP
CHANG DISP
STATUS NUMBER
UP
8.8.8.8.8.
MODE
DOWN
SVO.ON
START
RESET
SVO.OFF
STOP
END
REMOVE T/B
CR1
MITSUBISHI
EMG.STOP
MITSUBISHI
CR2B
CHANG DISP
STATUS NUMBER
8.8.8.8.8.
MODE
UP
DOWN
SVO.ON
START
RESET
SVO.OFF
STOP
END
REMOVE T/B
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:29:01
A teaching box for defining the robots’ working
positions can be connected to the controller’s
RS-422 port. The teaching box can also be used
for testing the entire program sequence.
There is also an RS-232C port for connecting a
personal computer. This makes it possible to
develop programs with a powerful PC software
package with a user-friendly interface, and to
perform 3D simulations of complete work cells.
Characteristics/Functions
CR3-535M
Shipped with robot
CR1-571
CR2B-574
RV-1A, RV-2AJ,
RV-3SB/SJB, RV-6S/6SL,
RP-1AH/3AH/5AH
RH-6SH/12SH
Number of controllable axes
6 robot axes + 2 interpolation axes + 6 independent axes
Processor type (CPU)
Main CPU: 64 Bit RISC; servo CPU: DSP
no. of teaching points
Max. 2500 position teaching points
Memory
no. program steps
max. 5000 steps
capacity
no. of programs
88
general purpose I/Os
16 inputs and 16 outputs
32 inputs and 32 outputs
dedicated I/Os
User assigned
User assigned
External
hand open/close
8 inputs and 0 outputs
8 inputs und 0 outputs
inputs/outputs
emergency stop I/Os
1
2 terminal blocks
door switch input
1
1
1~ 90–132 V AC; 50/60 Hz
Power supply
1~ 90–132 V AC; 50/60 Hz
1~ 180–253 V AC; 50/60 Hz
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm 212 x 166 x 290
460 x 200 x 400
RV-12S/12SL
32 inputs and 32 outputs
User assigned
8 inputs und 0 outputs
2 terminal blocks
1
3~ 400 V AC; 50/60 Hz
450 x 975 x 380
109
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
Which controller is used depends on the specific robot model. But the CR1, CR2B and CR3
are all programmed with exactly the same language, no matter which robot is connected to
them. You can add special application functions by inserting expansion option cards in the
slots in the controllers. For example, there are
option cards for connecting the controllers to
different networks and for controlling
additional robot axes.
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
P
E-S
TO P
TEACH
E
-S
TO
Robots Teach Panel
E-STOP
POWER
TB ENABLE
HAND
STOP
SERVO
RESET
CAUTION
JOG
The R46TB teach panel is a multifunctional control and programming terminal for all Mitsubishi
A and S series robots. Its intuitive user interface
makes it easy to control robot movements and
perform extensive diagnostics and monitoring
functions functions for users of all levels. All
safety-critical functions such as robot movements
are assigned to keys. Programming and monitoring functions are accessed and adjusted quickly
and easily via the bright 6.5” touchscreen display.
HOME
EXE
OVRD
OK
MENU
MITSUBISHI
CANCEL
In addition to controlling robot movements the
terminal has many other functions: For example,
you can write programs with a virtual on-screen
keyboard and monitor all system status parameters, inputs and outputs, including those
accessed via the network.
Teach Panel
Compatibility
Functions
Programming and Monitoring
Software
Display
type/Dimensions
technology
Interfaces
Connection
Protection Rating
Weight [kg]
Order information
Art. no.
The R46TB’s flexible monitoring function
enables the display of all important system
parameters. Access to production data like the
number of work cycles, the average cycle time
and many other parameters make it easy to get a
quick overview of the production situation.
Extensive analysis functions for checking robot
workload also make it easy to optimise your
robot applications and minimise cycle times.
Screen input templates make it easy to enter the
parameters for grippers and workpieces for quick
system optimisation. Entering the reference
points data when you install the system just takes
a few minutes, then the robot is ready for programming.
R46TB
All Mitsubishi A and S series robots
Operation, programming and monitoring of all robot functions
Read out information, also during operation; program editing with virtual keyboard; display up to 14 lines of
program code; I/O monitoring for up to 256 inputs and 256 outputs; service display with information on
maintenance intervals; error display with details of the last 128 alarms
Integrated operating system software with menu-based user interface
6.5" TFT display (640 x 480 pixels)
Touchscreen with backlight
USB, RS-422 for connection to the robot controller
Direct connection to the robot controller, cable length 7m
IP54
1.25
193409
Simulation and Programming Software
COSIROP
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
COSIROP is the programming, configuration,
online and diagnostics software package for all
Mitsubishi robots. You can use it to develop
programs in the MOVEMASTER COMMAND and
MELFA BASIC languages and transfer them
between the PC and the robot controller.
The programming software package is
distributed on a CD containing versions in both
German and English.
The update license can only be used if you
already have a license for 1, 5 or 10 users.
COSIMIR
COSIMIR is the 3D robot simulation package for
all Mitsubishi robots. It can be used for planning
your work cell, checking the accessibility of all
positions and optimising your layout. You can
simulate all movement sequences and handling
operations to identify and prevent potential collisions and optimise your cycle times.
Software Licences
COSIROP
Licenze
1 user
110
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:29:11
COSIMIR
5 users
Language
English / German (on one 1 CD)
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 98/XP/2000
Order information
Art. no.
170050
After simulating and testing your programs you
can then transfer them directly to the robot controller, either via the standard RS-232C port or
via the optional Ethernet interface (TCP/IP). If
you use the Ethernet interface you can also easily connect to the controller via the Internet and
perform program changes and servicing across
very large distances.
170051
10 users
Update license
1 user
170052
170053
51681
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS ///
Option
Robot model name in catalogue
Teaching Box
Teaching Box
Electrical hand set
Pneumatic hand set
Single valve set
Double valve set
Triple valve set
Quadruple valve set
Single valve set
Double valve set
Single valve set
Double valve set
Triple valve set
Quadruple valve set
Single valve set
Double valve set
Triple valve set
Quadruple valve set
Single valve set
Double valve set
Triple valve set
Quadruple valve set
Single valve set
Double valve set
Triple valve set
Quadruple valve set
Ethernet interface
CC-Link interface
PROFIBUS interface
Serial expansion
I/O interface
Additional axis interface
Pneumatic hand interface
Electric hand interface
Curled connection cable
Hand signal output cable
Hand signal input cable
Gripper output connector
Gripper input connector
Valve input connect
Hand signal output connector
Hand signal input connector
Valve connection cable
Hand curl tube
Flexible drag chain cable
Extension cable for fixed installation
Extension cable for flexible installation
in a drag chain
PC connection cable
Connection cable for I/O interface
Extension box
Calibration device
Calibration pin
Marking
—
R28TB
R46TB
4A-HM01
4A-HP01E
1A-VD01E-RP
1A-VD02E-RP
1A-VD03E-RP
1A-VD04E-RP
RV-E-1E-VD01E
RV-E-1E-VD02E
1S-VD01E-01
1S-VD02E-01
1S-VD03E-01
1S-VD04E-01
1S-VD01E-02
1S-VD02E-02
1S-VD03E-02
1S-VD04E-02
1S-VD01ME-03
1S-VD02ME-03
1S-VD03ME-03
1S-VD04ME-03
1S-VD01ME-04
1S-VD02ME-04
1S-VD03ME-04
1S-VD04ME-04
2A-HR533E
2A-HR575E
2A-RZ577A
2A-RZ581E
2A-RZ371
2A-RZ541E
2A-RZ375
2A-RZ364
1A-GHCD
1A-GR200-RP
1S-GR35S-01
1S-GR35S-02
1A-HC20
1A-HC200-RP
1S-HC35C-02
1S-HC25C-01
R-SMR-09V-B
R-SMR-10V-N
R-SMR-02V-B
S-series Hand OUTPUT
S-series Hand INPUT
RV-E-1E-GR35S
RV-E-1E-ST0402C
RV-E-1E-ST0404C
Cable Flex 5 m
Cable Flex 7 m
Cable Flex 9 m
Cable Flex 11 m
Cable Flex 15 m
1S-05CBL-01
1S-10CBL-01
1S-15CBL-01
1S-05CBL-03
1S-10CBL-03
1S-15CBL-03
1S-05LCBL-01
1S-10LCBL-01
1S-15LCBL-01
1S-05LCBL-03
1S-10LCBL-03
1S-15LCBL-03
RV-CAB4
RV-E-E/A-Kabel 5
RV-E-E/A-Kabel 15
CR1-EB3
RV-E-1E-INST
RH-CAL
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:29:14
RV-2AJ/1A
A
RV-3SJB/3SB
S
RV-6S/6SL
S
RV-12S/12SL
S
RH-6SH
SH
RH-12SH
SH
RP-1/3/5AH
AH
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
앬
Art. no.
—
124656
193409
129874
129873
129780
129781
129792
129793
47397
47398
153057
153058
153059
153062
153074
153075
153076
153077
166278
166279
166280
166281
166274
166275
166276
166277
129809
129808
155317
129807
124658
129801
124657
129875
132101
129778
153078
166272
129877
129779
166273
153079
132112
132113
143798
164814
164815
47391
47390
47389
149006
149007
149008
149009
149010
155827
155830
155665
165967
165968
165969
157582
157583
157594
165970
165971
165972
55653
47387
59947
129878
47388
145715
111
MELFA ROBOT SYSTEMS
Options Overview for All Robots
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS
The Complete Solution for Line and Load Side
WSS series moulded case circuit breakers
Mitsubishi offers the whole line from Air Circuit
Breakers over Low Voltage Switchgear to
Magnetic Contactors and Thermal Overload
Relays.
A complete breaker program for complete,
all-round protection.
SUPER AE series air circuit breakers
The SUPER AE air circuit breaker family consists
of models from 1000 to 6300 A with a broad range
of adjustable breaking capacities.
At the lower end of the scale the smallest current setting Ir is 125 A, with the AE1000 model.
With the AE6300, the maximum possible setting
is a full 6300 A.
앬
Frame size from 1000 A to 6300 A
앬
앬
앬
Compact, modular extensions and an
energy-saving design – these are the main
requirements set by users of contactors and
auxiliary contactors.
MS-N meets these requirement plus:
Easy mounting and wiring
앬 Easy inspection
앬 Built-in surge absorber (from S-N50)
앬 Safety terminal functions
앬 Improvement of electromagnet
앬 International standard models
앬
The highlights are
앬 16 to 1600 A breaking capacity
(3- and 4-pole)
앬 Interchangeable relay unit
(thermal type or electronic type)
앬 available in fixed and slot-in versions
앬 Breaking capacity up to 200 kA
앬 Additional disconnectors available
Features include:
앬
MS-N series magnetic contactors and
thermal overload relays
The MCCBs of the Mitsubishi breaker series are
amongst the smallest compact circuit breakers
in the world with electronic overload indication.
The system is based, among other things, on the
well-known and proven microprocessor technology. The WSS breaker series meets national
and international protection ratings according
to VDE, EN, and IEC standards for industrial
applications as well as for extended shipping
demands. The innovative tripping technology
guarantees a high reliability and highest protection.
Breaking capacity up to 130 kA
Growing power demands
앬
DP1
MITSUBISHI
TYPE WM1
100
RUN
INST 4 2 2
6
8
10
12
16
Ir(A)=
80
Ii(xIr)16
60
ERR.
1.15 1.2
1.1
1.05
1.5
40
%IL
L
PAL
IL
S
I
TALTsd Ii
.84
.76
LVS
In
IL
0.5 I t
OFF
2
TEST
Ue
690VAC
525VAC
500VAC
440VAC
380/415VAC
230VAC
100A
EN60947-2
40°C
Icu/Ics
8/8kA
22/22kA
30/30kA
36/36kA
36/36kA
85/85kA
MITSUBISHI
MODEL
In
Ue
690VAC
525VAC
500VAC
440VAC
380/415VAC
230VAC
NF125-SGW
100A
EN60947-2
40°C
Icu/Ics
8/8kA
22/22kA
30/30kA
36/36kA
36/36kA
85/85kA
MITSUBISHI
MODEL
In
80
60
100 12
50/60Hz
80
100
3.5
3
2.5
2
4 5 6
TL
TS(S)
.1
7
8
10 .06
Ii
70%
.2
.3
PAL
MODEL
OVER
RE100
12
4
14 .07
80
60
80
.10
63
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:30:18
IEC
60947-4-1
VDE
DIN
BS EN AC-3
V~ kW
240 45
440 75
500 90
690 90
BH782Y900H03
0.3
0.5 I t
OFF
2
Tsd(s)
RESET
1.0
ST
(TE
L/S LOCK)
EN60947-2
40°C
Icu/Ics
8/8kA
22/22kA
30/30kA
36/36kA
36/36kA
85/85kA
MITSUBISHI
MODEL
In
100 12
100
3.5
3
2.5
2
4 5 6
.1
7
8
10 .06
70%
.2
.3
PAL
RE100
12
14 .07
80
60
80
.10
63
JEM 1038
NK 98T408
AC3 1 1-0
V~ kW
220 37
440 75
550 90
100 12
S-N150
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Uimp 8kV
100
3.5
3
2.5
2
4 5 6
TL
TS(S)
.1
7
8
10 .06
.2
.3
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
PUSH TO TRIP
T
Is
Ii
70%
Ts
PAL
MODEL
OVER
RE100
6
12
4
14 .07
80
50/60Hz
60
80
.10
100 12
100
3.5
3
2.5
2
4 5 6
.1
7
8
10 .06
Ir
TL
TS(S)
IS(xIr)
TL(S)
Ir(A)
Ip
In 100A
Ip(xIr)
Ii(X100A)
8
10
63
Is
Ii
70%
Ts
.3
PAL
OVER
Ip(xIr)
Ii(X100A)
8
10
.2
6
12
4
14 .07
.10
21NC
21NC
22NC
22NC
AC-1Ith
32A
ON
Cat.A
50/60Hz
22NC
AC-1Ith
32A
EN60947-2
40°C
Icu/Ics
8/8kA
22/22kA
30/30kA
36/36kA
36/36kA
85/85kA
3P
Ir
Ip
In 100A
IS(xIr)
TL(S)
Ir(A)
4
100A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MODEL
OVER
Ip(xIr)
6
Ue
690VAC
525VAC
500VAC
440VAC
380/415VAC
230VAC
NF125-SGW
Ui690V
ON
PUSH TO TRIP
T
Ii
IEC60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
OFF
NO-FUSE BREAKER
POLE
Uimp 8kV
Cat.A
Is
Ts
Ii(X100A)
8
10
21NC
112
.92
Ir 63-100A
Ir
TL
TS(S)
JEM 1038
NK 98T408
AC3 1 1-0
V~ kW
220 37
440 75
550 90
S-N150
0.1
0.3
0.5
2
It
ON
3P
Ui690V
50/60Hz
IS(xIr)
TL(S)
Ir(A)
Ip
In 100A
Ip(xIr)
6
100A
POLE
T
Is
Ts
Ii(X100A)
8
10
Ue
690VAC
525VAC
500VAC
440VAC
380/415VAC
230VAC
NF125-SGW
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
PUSH TO TRIP
Ir
Ip
In 100A
IS(xIr)
ON
Cat.A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
T
RE100
.84
MRC
6
8
10
12
IL x1.2
0.1 .06 .06
5
Isd(xIr)
.76
4
30 40 60
TL (s)
3 3.5 4 4.5
Ir 63-100A
Uimp 8kV
Ui690V
ON
MODEL
TL(S)
Ir(A)
IEC60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
OFF
NO-FUSE BREAKER
3P
POLE
Uimp 8kV
PUSH TO TRIP
63
IEC60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
OFF
NO-FUSE BREAKER
Ir 63-100A
Cat.A
2.5
2
1.5
OVER
3P
Ui690V
25
20
15
IL(xIr)
I
Ip
Ir 63-100A
POLE
6
8
10
12
16
1.15 1.2
1.1
1.05
1.5
S
.68
ST
(TE
L/S LOCK)
IEC60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
OFF
NF125-SGW
INST 4 2 2
Ir(A)=
Ii(xIr)16
60
40
%IL
L
TL
TALTsd Ii
RESET
1.0
OVER
MODEL
100
80
PAL
Ip Isd
(xIL) I2t
Tsd(s)
.92
Ip
MITSUBISHI
TYPE WM1
RUN
ERR.
0.1
0.3
0.5
2
It
ON
.68
NO-FUSE BREAKER
MRC
6
8
10
12
IL x1.2
0.1 .06 .06
0.3
5
Isd(xIr)
TEST
4
TL (s)
3 3.5 4 4.5
2.5
2
1.5
30 40 60
25
20
15
IL(xIr)
TL
Ip Isd
(xIL) I2t
DP1
MITSUBISHI
AC-1Ith
32A
IEC
60947-4-1
VDE
DIN
BS EN AC-3
V~ kW
240 45
440 75
500 90
690 90
BH782Y900H03
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS ///
SUPER AE Series Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW series)
Built for the global demands of the
21st century
Mitsubishi Electric offers a really
complete range of circuit breakers.
The World Super AE-SW air circuit family
consist of models from 1000 to 4000 A
and are available in both 3 and 4 pole
versions with fixed or drawout configurations to suit your individual requirements. There are only 3 standard
sizes, making planning much easier.
Type
The developement target was based on
the features:
앬 Simple operation for maximum
user-friendliness
앬 Flexible installation and customised
protection for your systems
앬 Class leading performance range and
extended service life
앬 Enhanced network support for comprehensive monitoring and control
AE1000-SW AE1250-SW AE1600-SW AE2000-SWA AE2000-SW AE2500-SW AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA AE4000-SW AE5000-SW AE6300-SW
Frame type
1
Rated current Iu (A) 40 °C
1000
2
Max. rated operational voltage Ue (V)
690
690
690
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
1000
1000
1000
Rated impulsewithstand voltageUimp (kV)
12
12
12
Suitable for isolation
쏹
쏹
쏹
1250
1600
2000
3
2000
2500
3200
4000
4000
Category
B
B
B
Pollution degree
3
3
3
3
Rated current Ir (A) adjustment range at 40 °C
500 – 1000
625 – 1250
4
800 – 1600
3
4
3
1000 – 2000
4
625 – 2000
3
4
1250 – 2500
3
4
1600 – 3200
3
4
2000 – 4000
3
4
2000 – 4000
3
4
2500–5000
3
3150-6300
Rated current of neutral pole (A)
1000
1250
1600
2000
2000
2500
3200
4000
2000
2500
3150
690 V AC
65
75
85
400 V AC
65
85
130
Ratedshort-timewithstandcurrent
(kA rms) Icw
1s
65
75
100
Operating cycles 햳
(ON/OFF)
without rated
current
25000
20000
10000 (3P) / 5000 (4P)
horizontal
쏹
—
쏹
—
—
vertical
쏹햴
쏹
쏹햴
쏹
쏹
frontal
쏹햴
—
쏹햴
—
fixed type
3-pole: 410 x 340 x 290
4-pole: 410 x 425 x 290
3-pole: 410 x 475 x 290
4-pole: 410 x 605 x 290
3 pole: 414 x 873 x 290
4 pole: 414 x 1003 x 290
draw-out type
3-pole: 430 x 300 x 368
4-pole: 430 x 385 x 368
3-pole: 430 x 435 x 368
4-pole: 430 x 565 x 368
3-pole: 430 x
3 pole: 480 x 875 x 368
439 x 368
4-pole: 430 x 4 pole: 480 x 1005 x 368
569 x 368
Connecting
terminal
H
Outline dimensions (mm)
HxWxD
W
D
Weight (kg)
4
3
4
—
LVS
3
6000
Number of poles
Rated service
short-circuit
breaking capacity 햲
Icu (kA, rms)
Ics = Icu = 100 %
4
5000
fixed type
41
51
41
51
42
52
47
57
60
72
61
73
63
75
81
99
160
180
160
180
160
180
draw-out type
64
78
64
78
65
79
70
84
92
113
93
114
95
116
108
136
233
256
233
256
240
263
cradle only
26
30
26
30
26
30
31
35
35
43
35
43
36
44
49
61
118
133
118
133
125
140
햲 Conforms to IEC60947-2, EN60947-2
햳 Number of mechanical operating cycles (on/off).
햴 Optional
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:30:28
113
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS
Product Skeleton of Accessories for SUPER AE Series Air Circuit Breakers
LVS
Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of accessories for the Air Circuit Breakers to serve almost all
variations of applications.
Position
Name
Position
Name
Position
Name
1
Air circuit breaker
12
Dust cover (DUC)
23
Counter (CNT)
2
Cradle
13
Push button cover (BC-L)
24
Cylinder lock (CYL)
3
CC-Link® Interface unit
14
Auxiliary switch standard (AX)
25
Door interlock (DI)
4
PROFIBUS-DP Interface unit
15
Auxiliary switch high capacity type (HAX)
26
Mechanical interlock (MI)
5
MODBUS® Interface unit
16
Shunt trip device (SHT)
27
Safety shutters (SST)
6
I/O unit
17
Closing coil (CC)
28
Safety shutter lock ( SST-LOCK)
7
Extension module
18
Under voltage trip device (UVT)
29
Cell switch (CL)
8
ETR unit
19
Trip coil
30
Interphase Barrier (BA)
9
Main setting module
20
UVT-controller (U-CON)
31
Horizontal terminal
10
Optional setting module
21
Condenser trip device (COT)
32
Vertical terminal
11
Door frame (DF)
22
Motor charging device (MD)
For details on our full range including accessories contact your local distributor
114
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:30:34
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS ///
WS Series Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers
The moulded-case circuit breakers of the Mitsubishi breaker series are amongst the
smallest compact circuit breakers in the world with electronic overload indication of
this kind. The system is based, among other things, on the well-known and proven
microprocessor technology.
MITSUBISHI
MODEL
In
IEC60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
OFF
NO-FUSE BREAKER
Ue
690VAC
525VAC
500VAC
440VAC
380/415VAC
230VAC
300VAC
NF125-SGW
100A
Ir 63-100A
EN60947-2
40°C
Icu/Ics
8/8kA
22/22kA
30/30kA
36/36kA
36/36kA
85/85kA
20/20kA
WSS – World Super Series
3P
POLE
Uimp 8kV
Ui690V
ON
Cat.A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
PUSH TO TRIP
T
MODEL
RE100
60
100 12
80
100
50/60Hz
4 5 6
3.5
3
2.5
2
TL
TS(S)
Is
Ii
.3
PAL
70%
Ts
OVER
Ip(xIr)
Ii(X100A)
8
10
.2
.1
7
8
10 .06
The new WSS breaker series meets national and international protection ratings
according to VDE, EN, and IEC standards for industrial applications as well as for
extended shipping demands.
Ir
Ip
In 100A
IS(xIr)
TL(S)
Ir(A)
80
63
6
12
4
14 .07
.10
The new tripping technology guarantees a high reliability and highest protection.
IEC60947-2
EN60947-2
Ue
690VAC
500VAC
440VAC
400VAC
230VAC
Cat. B
MITSUBISHI
NO-FUSE BREAKER
MODEL
In
NF1000-SS
1000A
Icu/Ics
25/13kA
65/33kA
85/43kA
85/43kA
Highlights are:
앬 30 to 250 A in one model size (3- and 4-pole)
앬 overcurrent tripping relay unit (thermal type or electronic type)
앬 available in fixed and plug-in versions
앬 breaking capacity up to 200 kA
125/63kA
Icw 20kA 0.1s
Ir 500-1000A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
PUSH TO TRIP
OVER
PAL
70%
250
T
TL
.7
300
Is
Ii
200
Ts
2
100
.2
.1
10
12
14
16
II(×400A)
IS (×In, Ir )
Ir(×400A)
60
7 6
8
10 4
3
1
.5
In(A)
8
4 5 6
.8
350
225
Ir
Ip
.8
.9
150
TEST
12
.3
.06
T L (s)
T S (s)
1.0
.7
MITSUBISHI
IP (×In, Ir)
NO-FUSE BREAKER
MODEL
NF400-SEP
JIS
Ue
550VAC
460VAC
220VAC
OFF
Icn
35kA
50kA
85kA
IEC 60947-2
EN 60947-2
Icu/Ics
10/10kA
30/30kA
42/42kA
45/45kA
85/85kA
40°C
400A
3P
POLE
400
690VAC
Ui
50 - 60Hz
8kV
Uimp
50kA
85kA
500VAC
250VAC
ON
PUSH TO TRIP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
300
250
350 3.5
3
2.5
400 2
220
200
TEST
T
TL
80
.1
100 .06
12
Is
Ii
4 5 6
8
TL(sec)
10
7 6
8
10 4
12
14
16
Ii(X400A)
IS(xIr)
Ir(A)
60
Ir
Ip
.2
.3
TS(sec)
.10
.07
Ip(xIr)
Ts
Specifications
Specifications
NF125-SGW RT
NF125-SGW RE
NF125-HGW RT
NF125-HGW RE
NF125-RGW RT
NF160-SGW RT
NF160-SGW RE
Rated current In max. [A]
125
125
125
125
100
160
160
AC 690
690
690
690
690
690
690
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3
3/4
3/4
690 V 8 / 8
8/8
20 / 20
20 / 20
25 / 25
8/8
8/8
440 V 36 / 36
36 / 36
65 / 65
65 / 65
125 / 125
36 / 36
36 / 36
400 V 36 / 36
36 / 36
75 / 75
75 / 75
125 / 125
36 / 36
36 / 36
[mm] 105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105x240x86
105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V]
Number of poles
Rated
breaking
capacity [kA]
(Icu / Ics)
IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-2
VDE 0660
AC
(50/60 Hz)
Dimensions WxHxD
Specifications
NF160-HGW RT
NF160-HGW RE
NF250-SGW RT
NF250-SGW RE
NF250-HGW RT
NF250-HGW RE
NF250-RGW RT
Rated current In max. [A]
160
160
250
250
250
250
225
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V]
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
Number of poles
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3
690 V 20 / 20
20 / 20
8/8
8/8
20 / 20
20 / 20
25 / 25
440 V 65 / 65
65 / 65
36 / 36
36 / 36
65 / 65
65 / 65
125 / 125
400 V 75 / 75
75 / 75
36 / 36
36 / 36
75 / 75
75 / 75
125 / 125
[mm] 105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105/140x165x86
105x240x86
Rated
breaking
capacity [kA]
(Icu / Ics)
IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-2
VDE 0660
AC
(50/60 Hz)
Dimensions WxHxD
NF400-SEW
NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
NF630-SEW
NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
Rated current In max. [A]
400
400
400
630
630
630
800
800
800
AC 690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
3/4
3/4
3
3/4
3/4
3
3/4
3/4
3
690 V 10 / 10
35 / 18
—
10 / 10
15 / 15
—
10 / 10
15 / 15
—
440 V 42 / 42
65 / 65
125 / 63
42 / 42
65 / 65
125 / 63
42 / 42
65 / 65
125 / 63
400 V 50 / 50
70 / 70
125 / 63
50 / 50
70 / 70
125 / 63
50 / 50
70 / 70
125 / 63
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V]
Number of poles
Rated
breaking
capacity [kA]
(Icu / Ics)
IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-2
VDE 0660
AC
(50/60 Hz)
Dimensions WxHxD
[mm] 140/185x257x103 140/185x257x103 140x257x103
140/185x257x103 140/185x257x103 140x257x103
210/280x275x103 210/280x275x103 210x275x103
Specifications
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
Rated current In max. [A]
1000*
1250*
1600*
AC 690
690
690
3/4
3/4
3/4
690 V 25 / 13
25 / 13
25 / 13
440 V 85 / 43
85 / 43
85 / 43
400 V 85 / 43
85 / 43
85 / 43
[mm] 210/280x406x140
210/280x406x140
210/280x406x140
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V]
Number of poles
Rated
breaking
capacity [kA]
(Icu / Ics)
IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-2
VDE 0660
Dimensions WxHxD
AC
(50/60 Hz)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:30:53
LVS
Specifications
115
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS
Product Skeleton of Accessories for Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of accessories for the Moulded Case Circuit Breakers and disconnectors to serve almost all variations of applications.
10
4
5
7
6
3
2
11
16
96
98
ALa ALb
95
c
5A
125V
AC
3A
250V
AC
0.4A
125V
DC
0.2A
250V
DC
96
b
98
a
14
a
12
b
11
c
14
12
11
AXc AXb AXa
AUXILIARY SWITCH
5A
125V
AC
3A
250V
AC
0.4A
125V
DC
0.2A
250V
DC
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
ALAX-2GSWLS
AX AL
ALARM SWITCH
98
ALc
12
13
MITSUBISHI
NO-FUSE BREAKER
MODEL
In
OFF
NF125-SGW
125A
Ir 75-125A
POLE
Ui690V
ON
ED
IEC60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
Ue
690VAC
525VAC
500VAC
440VAC
380/415VAC
230VAC
300VAC
EN60947-2
40°C
Icu/Ics
8/8kA
22/22kA
30/30kA
36/36kA
36/36kA
85/85kA
20/20kA
9
3P
Uimp 8kV
Cat.A
PUSH TO TRIP
8
ON
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
T
SE
OFF
TR
IP
P
9
1
1
T
RE
MODEL
60
100 12
50/60Hz
80
100
3.5
3
2.5
2
4 5 6
Ii
70%
Ts
.3
PAL
OVER
Ip(xIr)
Ii(X100A)
8
10
.2
.1
7
8
10 .06
Is
TL
TS(S)
IS(xIr)
TL(S)
Ir(A)
80
63
Ir
Ip
In 100A
RE100
PUSH
TO
TRIP
6
12
4
14 .07
14
.10
17
ON
TR
IP
P
OFF
D1
P1
D3 D2
P3 P2
SOURCE
Hi Lo
ED
T
SE
Install and uninstall the
accessory in tripped position,
not in ON or OFF position
RE
UVTSA250-2GSWRS
PUSH
TO
TRIP
15
2
18
3
Power
P1
Supply
P2
S1
S2
S4
OFF
ON
Uc
Operating
S4
C1
S1
K1
K1
K1
K2
K2
SW1
K2
K3
Uc
K3
Circuit
S2
S1
P2
K3
P1
50/60Hz
SHT
AC100-240V
C2
S2
Control circuit
voltage should be
supplied to P1
and P2 terminals.
Install and uninstall the
accessory in tripped position,
not in ON or OFF position
SHTA240-2GSWRS
P1
S1
P2
MODEL
MITSUBISHI
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
MODEL
SERIAL:
S2
S4
MSDBA-NF25GSW
A0106
햳
Pull
MDSPSA240-SW
CONTROLL CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE
V
AC100-240V/DC100-250
NO-FUSE BREAKER
NF250-SGW
4
ON
MODEL
Push to
ON
AUTO
Push to
OPEN
(TRIP)
MANU
LVS
Position
Ui 690V
Cat.A
IEC60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
Ue
690VAC
525VAC
500VAC
440VAC
380/415VAC
230VAC
50/60Hz
Uimp 8kV
EN60947-2
40°C
Icu/Ics
8/8kA
22/22kA
30/30kA
36/36kA
36/36kA
85/85kA
5
7
6
(MANU)
Discharge
햲
Push
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
RATED CURRENT
250 A
Name
Description
1
Circuit Breaker
Main breaker unit.
2
Solderless (box) terminals
Connection accessories, only available for frame sizes 125/160/250 A.
3
Rear connection studs
Used for rear connection
4
Insulating barriers (BA-F)
Used to avoid short-circuits between the terminals, every breaker is equipped with insulating barriers as standard.
5
Small terminal covers (TC-S)
Used to avoid exposure of charged parts, small type.
6
Large terminal covers (TC-L)
Used to avoid exposure of charged parts, large type.
7
Rear teminal covers (BTC)
Used to avoid exposure of charged parts, for rear connection.
8
Plug-in base (PM)
Used for easy connection and exchange.
9
Connections for Plug-in
Special connection accessories for Plug-in base.
10
Mechanical interlock (MI)
With two breakers, use a panel-mounted mechanical interlock for one-way only input. It is usable for front, rear, and plug-in types.
11
OFF Lock with 3 padlocks (HL)
Can be used to lock the handle of the breaker against switching OFF by not-allowed persons. Up to three padlock can be used.
12
Handle lock device (LC, HLF, HLN, HLS)
Can be used to lock the handle of the breaker against switching by not-allowed persons. Up to three padlock can be used.
13
Variable-depth operating handle, V type
The V-type operating handle is used to operate the breaker which is installed in a cabinet.
14
Rotary operating handle, R type
The R-type operating handle is to be mounted directly on the breaker.
15
Electrical operating device (MDS)
Used to switch the breaker ON and OFF electrically by remote.
16
Alarm and Auxilliary switches (AL, AX)
Indicators for status signals (ON, OFF, Tripped).
17
Under voltage trip device (UVT)
Trips the breaker when voltage drops.
18
Shunt trip device (SHT)
Trips the breaker by remote.
For details on our full range including accessories contact your local distributor
116
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:31:29
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS ///
General Purpose Contactors
Compact, modular extensions and an
energy-saving design – these are the
main requirements set by users of
contactors and auxiliary contactors.
Requirements that the MS-N series from
Mitsubishi Electric fulfill.
앬
앬
SN-20
앬
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
앬
앬
앬
앬
The main benefits:
앬
앬
Easy mounting and wiring
Easy inspection
Built-in surge absorber (from S-N50)
Safety and speedy terminal functions
앬
Thermo plastic improves the barrier
strength
Coil boasts lower coil consumption
Improvement of Electromagnet
(DC electromagnet with AC operation)
Less noise nor surge from coil
Conform to IEC947-4-1, EN-Standards
Wide range for rated continuous current I from 20 A to 1000 A
th
SN-400
Handling of the contactors
S-N10CX to S-N65CX units can all be mounted
on DIN rail (35 mm wide).
A variety of auxiliary blocks and optional features are available including:
앬 Standard front clip-on auxiliary contact blocks
(4-pole-type and 2-pole-type)
앬 Low-level signal front-clip-on auxiliary contact blocks
앬
Side clip-on auxiliary contact blocks
Surge absorbers (varistor and CR models)
앬 Surge absorbers with LED operating indicators
앬 Mechanical interlocks
Compact arc quenching and magnet layout
greatly reduces installation space.
앬
The coil rating is displayed in a location readily
visible even after the unit is installed onto the
panel.
Contacts are visible when the cover is removed,
allowing them to be checked easily.
Three-phase motor ratings IEC category AC3 for Contactors
Contactor
AC-operated
S-N10CX
S-N11CX
S-N12CX
S-N18CX
S-N20CX
S-N21CX
S-N25CX
S-N35CX
S-N50CX
DC-operated
—
SD-N11CX
SD-N12CX
—
—
SD-N21CX
—
SD-N35CX
SD-N50
SD-N65
kW
4
5.5
5.5
7.5
11
11
15
18.5
22
30
A
20
20
20
25
32
32
50
60
80
100
1 NO or 1 NC
1 NO or 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
—
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
AC 380–440 V
Rated continuous current Ith
Auxiliary contacts (standard)
S-N65CX
Thermal Overload Relays
Type
TH-N12KPCX
TH-N18KPCX
TH-N20KPCX
TH-N20TAKPCX
TH-N60KPCX
Setting range
0.1 – 13 A
1 – 18 A
0.2 – 22 A
18 – 40 A
12 – 65 A
Three-phase motor ratings IEC category AC3 for Contactors
Contactor
AC-operated
S-N80
S-N95
S-N125
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220
S-N300
S-N400
S-N600
S-N800
DC-operated
SD-N80
SD-N95
SD-N125
SD-N150
—
SD-N220
SD-N300
SD-N400
SD-N600
SD-N800
AC 380–440 V
Rated continuous current Ith
kW 45
A 135
2 NO + 2 NC
60
75
90
132
160
220
330
440
150
200
260
260
350
450
800
1000
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
LVS
Auxiliary contacts (standard)
55
150
Thermal Overload Relays
Type
TH-N60TAKP
TH-N120KP
TH-N120TAKP
TH-N220RHKP
TH-N400RHKP
TH-N600KP
Setting range
54 – 105 A
34 – 100 A
85 – 150 A
65 – 250 A
85 – 400 A
200 – 800 A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:31:58
117
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS
Thermal Overload Relays
A selection of relays for optimum motor protection characteristics
The thermal relay line-up includes the phase failure protection type models
(three-element relays).
This array of protection characteristics allows you to choose the units suited to
your motor protection needs.
Benefits:
앬
앬
앬
앬
TH-N18KPCX
앬
앬
An operation indicator makes maintenance and inspection easy.
1 NO and 1 NC contact
Rated current can be set easily
Finger protection up to TH-N60KPCX
Trip-free reset bar
Convenient reset release (optional)
Contactor Relays
Contactor relays are designed for use in
low voltage control circuit applications.
앬
Our standard contactor relay version is
with auxiliary contacts.
앬
With side clip-on and front clip-on
configurations available, a maximum of
8 auxiliary contacts are possible.
앬
The main benefits:
앬
앬
SR-N4
앬
High reliability: By adopting bifurcated
moving contacts and by improving
the shape of the contacts, contact
performance has been made more
reliable than ever.
Different types: Standard, large
capacity, overlap contact
앬
앬
앬
Various contact arrangement and
long life
Mountable on 35 mm DIN rails
Dust-proof construction
Easily visible coil ratings
Easy wiring (self-rising terminal
screws)
Various accessories common with the
series S-N contactors (front and side
clip-on type additional auxiliary contact blocks, surge absorbers)
Finger protected types are available
(DIN 57106/VDE 0106 Part 100)
(Suffix "CX")
Contactor Relays
SR-N4CX 4A
SR-N4CX 3A1B
SR-N4CX 2A2B
DC-operated type
SRD-N4CX 4A
SRD-N4CX 3A1B
SRD-N4CX 2A2B
Auxiliary contacts
4 NO
3 NO, 1 NC
2 NO, 2 NC
LVS
AC-operated type
118
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:32:07
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH GEARS ///
Product Skeleton of Accessories for Magnetic Contactors, Thermal Overload Relays & Contactor Relays
Surge absorber
DC interface unit
Mounting on top
Mechanical interlocks
Side clip-on
auxiliary contact
Side clip-on
54
Side clip-on
auxiliary contact
54
Front clip-on
Auxiliary contact for
low level signal
Auxiliary contact
(4 pole)
Auxiliary contact
(2 pole)
Terminal cover
LVS
Mounting adapter
for OLR
Trip indicator
Terminal cover
Reset release
for OLR
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:32:17
119
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// POWER SUPPLIES
Power Supply Modules
The ALPHA POWERs are convenient power
supplies for the 24 V units and other external
devices. They are applicable for wall or DIN rail
mounting and their dimensions are matched to
those of the Alpha family.
Output DC
24V 1.75 A
ALPHA POWER
Input AC
24V 1.75 A
Up to 5 Alpha Power units can be installed
together for redundant mode operation or
connected in parallel for more power.
The units have an integrated thermal overload
protection circuit and a POWER LED. The output voltage is adjustable.
Specifications
ALPHA POWER 24-0.75
Application
Power supply for the 24 V ALPHA base units and external devices
Nominal input voltage
100–240 V AC (45 – 65 Hz)
Output voltage
24 V DC (+/-1 %)
Max. output current
0.75 A
Protection
IP20
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
ALPHA POWER 24-1.75
mm 36 x 90 x 61
Art. no.
209029
The power supply modules FX3U-1PSU-5V
and FX3UC-1PS-5V are used to reinforce the
build-in 5 V DC and 24 V DC power supply of a
FX3U/FX3UC main unit. They do not occupy
any I/O points and deliver up to 1 A more current for the 5 V system bus (for special function
modules).
ALPHA POWER 24-2.5
1.75 A
2.5 A
54 x 90 x 61
72 x 90 x 61
209030
209031
Note: The FX3U-1PSU-5V can't be used with a 24 V
base unit!
When connecting an input extension module (e.g.
FX2N-8ER-ES/UL, FX2N-8ER) to the FX3U-1PSU-5V,
supply the power for it from the 24 V DC service
power supply of the connected main unit or powered extension unit on the upstream side.
Two FX3U-1PSU-5V units can be installed in
parallel for more power.
FX3U -1PSU-5V
Specifications
FX3U-1PSU-5V
FX3UC-1PS-5V
Application
Power supply for the FX3U system bus
Power supply for the FX3UC system bus
Nominal input voltage
100–240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
24 V DC (+20 %/-15 %)
Output voltage
5 V DC / 24 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
1 A at 40 °C; 0.8 A at 55 °C
1A
24 V DC
0.3 A at 40 °C; 0.2 A at 55 °C
—
55 x 90 x 87
24 x 90 x 74
169507
210086
Max. output current
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Order information
Out
24 put
V DC
2.5
A
DC
OK
A
22 djust
.5-2
9.5V
L
Inp
10 ut A
0-24C
0V
N
PSU
PE
/V
RO
EU
2,5%
IC
V~
TR
90
EC
z <
EL
0 H g:
CT
HI
-6 atin
50 er
NTA
B IS
A/ ~ / D
CO
SU
0.5 V
NIX
MITU 25
2- 64
OE
1.
S
-2
H
/
P
P
~ : 85
e by
0 V ge
24 ta A
Mad
0- Vol 2.5
l
/
t: 10naV
Inpuratio24
/K
Opeput:
2,5%
Out
g:
atin
Der
°C
55 F
>+131°
2
>+
6°C
0- 3
00 6+708°F
61000... 15
EN 61
5 ... +
-2
EN
3
-1
L
PR
AP
IA
ALS
TRL
OV
US O T
ns
ctio s
strumain
n in to
tio g
allaectin
inst nn
ad co
Re fore
be
N
D
IN NTRME
COUIP
EQKA
43
25
The primary switched-mode power supply
units PSU are especially applicable for universal
usage in batch mechanical engineering. The
wide range input and the UL, cUL certifications
allow a worldwide application. The 3-phase
units supply the full permanent output power
at breakdown of one phase
The units dispose of an adjustable output voltage, a thermal overload protection circuit and a
POWER LED.
PSU 25
Application
Power supply for all peripheral devices
Nominal input voltage
100–240 V AC (45 – 65 Hz)
Output voltage
24 V DC
Max. output current
2.5 A
Protection
IP20
Order information
Accessories (PSU 100 or larger)
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:32:34
The power supply units can be installed in parallel for more power or for redundant mode
operation.
Specifications
Dimensions (W x H x D)
120
Art. no.
2868839
POWER SUPPLIES
+
+
…
…
…
mm
mm
Art. no.
PSU 50
PSU 100
PSU 200
PSU 200-3
PSU 400-3
380 – 400 V AC
5A
10 A
20 A
20 A
32x130x115
40x130x115
60x130x152.5
115x130x152.5 115x130x152.5 139x130x190
206147
206148
206149
208850
208851
40 A
208852
Wall mounting apter PSU-UWA, art. no.: 208853
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INDEX ///
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACES 63
DT1151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
E100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
E1012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1043 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1061 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E1070 / E1070 Pro+ . . . . . . . . 71
E1071 / E1071 Pro+ . . . . . . . . 71
E1100 / E1100 Pro+ . . . . . . . . 71
E1101 / E1101 Pro+ . . . . . . . . 71
E1151 / E1151 Pro+ . . . . . . . . 71
E150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
E200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
E300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
E410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
E610 / E615 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
F920GOT-BBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
F930GOT-BBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
F930GOT-BWD-E . . . . . . . . . . 65
F940GOT-LWD-E . . . . . . . . . . 65
F940GOT-SWD-E . . . . . . . . . . 65
F940WGOT-TWD-E . . . . . . . . . 65
GT1020-LBL/-LBD/-LBD2/
LBLW/-LBDW/-LBDW2 . . . . . . 66
GT1030-LBD/-LBD2/-LBDW/
-LBDW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1150HS-QLBD . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1150-QLBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1155HS-QSBD . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1155-QSBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1550-QLBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1555-QSBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1555-QTBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1555-VTBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GT1562-VNBA . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1562-VNBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1565-VTBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1565-VTBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1572-VNBA . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1572-VNBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1575-STBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1575-STBD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1575-VNBA . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1575-VNBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1575V-STBD. . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1575-VTBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1575-VTBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1585-STBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1585-STBD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1585V-STBD. . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1595-XTBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GT1595-XTBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
HMI Control Units . . . . . . . . . 64
IPC-MC1121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IPC-MC1151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IPC-VP1151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IPC-VP1171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
INVERTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Filters and Conditioners . . . . . 90
FR-A500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Common Specifications . . . 84
FR-D700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
FR-D720S EC . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
FR-D740 EC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
FR-E500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FR-E 520S EC . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FR-E 540 EC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FR-E700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
FR-E740 EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
FR-F700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
FR-S500E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
FR-S520SE EC . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:32:37
FR-S540E EC . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Intelligent Motor Control
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Internal and External Options. 86
Overview Noise Filters . . . . . . 88
LOW VOLTAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Product Skeleton . . . . . . . 119
TH-N120KP . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N120TAKP . . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N12KPCX. . . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N18KPCX. . . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N20KPCX. . . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N20TAKPCX . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N220RHKP. . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N400RHKP. . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N600KP . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N60KPCX. . . . . . . . . . . 117
TH-N60TAKP . . . . . . . . . . . 117
SUPER AE Series . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE1000-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE1250-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE1600-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE2000-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE2000-SWA. . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE2500-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE3200-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE4000-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE4000-SWA. . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE5000-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AE6300-SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Product Skeleton . . . . . . . 114
WS Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF1000-SEW . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF1250-SEW . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF125-HGW RE . . . . . . . . . 115
NF125-HGW RT . . . . . . . . . 115
NF125-SGW RE . . . . . . . . . 115
NF125-SGW RT . . . . . . . . . 115
NF1600-SEW . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF160-HGW RE . . . . . . . . . 115
NF160-HGW RT . . . . . . . . . 115
NF160-SGW RE . . . . . . . . . 115
NF160-SGW RT . . . . . . . . . 115
NF250-HGW RE . . . . . . . . . 115
NF250-HGW RT . . . . . . . . . 115
NF250-RGW RT . . . . . . . . . 115
NF250-SGW RE . . . . . . . . . 115
NF250-SGW RT . . . . . . . . . 115
NF400-HEW . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF400-REW. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF400-SEW. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF630-HEW . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF630-REW. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF630-SEW. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF800-HEW . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF800-REW. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF800-SEW. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Product Skeleton . . . . . . . 116
MELFA ROBOTS SYSTEMS . . . 106
Example of a Robot system. . 106
Options Overview for
All Robots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Powerful Controllers . . . . . . 109
CR1-571 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CR2B-574 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CR3-535M. . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Practical Functions. . . . . . . . 106
Programming Software . . . . 110
COSIMIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
COSIROP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
RH-SH SCARA. . . . . . . . . . . . 109
RH-12SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
RH-6SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Robots Teach Panel . . . . . . . 110
RP-AH SCARA Robots . . . . . . 108
RP-1AH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
RP-3AH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
RP-5AH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
RV-2AJ/RV-1A . . . . . . . . . . . 107
RV-3SJB/RV-3SB . . . . . . . . . . 107
RV-6S/RV-6SL/RV-12SL/
RV-12S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
MICRO CONTROLLERS
Active data modules . . . . . . . 58
FX2NC-232ADP. . . . . . . . . . 58
FX2NC-485ADP. . . . . . . . . . 58
FX3U-232ADP-MB. . . . . . . . 58
FX3U-485ADP-MB. . . . . . . . 58
ALPHA 2 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Analog Extension Modules . 62
AS Interface Module . . . . . . 61
Base Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Digital Extension Modules . 62
Analog I/O Adapters. . . . . . . . 53
FX3U-4AD-ADP. . . . . . . . . . 53
FX3U-4DA-ADP. . . . . . . . . . 53
Analog Input Modules . . . . . . 52
FX2N-2AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
FX2N-4AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
FX2N-8AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
FX3U-4AD / FX3UC-4AD . . . 52
Analog Output Modules. . . . . 52
FX2N-2DA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
FX2N-4DA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
FX3U-4DA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Analog Temperature Input
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP . . . . . . 53
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP . . . . . . . 53
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP . . . . . 53
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP . . . . . . . 53
Analog Temperature Input
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
FX2N-2LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
FX2N-4AD-PT . . . . . . . . . . . 53
FX2N-4AD-TC . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Base Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1N-14MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-14MR-ES/UL . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-14MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-24MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-24MR-ES/UL . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-24MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-40MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-40MR-ES/UL . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-40MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-60MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-60MR-ES/UL . . . . . . . 47
FX1N-60MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 47
FX1S-10MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-10MR-ES/UL. . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-10MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-14MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-14MR-ES/UL. . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-14MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-20MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-20MR-ES/UL. . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-20MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-30MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-30MR-ES/UL. . . . . . . . 46
FX1S-30MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 46
FX2N-128MR-ES/UL . . . . . . 48
FX2N-128MT-ESS/UL. . . . . . 48
FX2N-16MR-DS . . . . . . . . . . 48
FX2N-16MR-ES/UL . . . . . . . 48
FX2N-16MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 48
FX2N-16MT-ESS/UL. . . . . . . 48
FX2N-32MR-DS . . . . . . . . . 48
FX2N-32MR-ES/UL . . . . . . . 48
FX2N-32MT-DSS . . . . . . . . . 48
FX2N-32MT-ESS/UL. . . . . . . 48
FX2N-48MR-DS . . . . . . . .
FX2N-48MR-ES/UL . . . . .
FX2N-48MT-DSS . . . . . . .
FX2N-48MT-ESS/UL. . . . .
FX2N-64MR-DS . . . . . . . .
FX2N-64MR-ES/UL . . . . .
FX2N-64MT-DSS . . . . . . .
FX2N-64MT-ESS/UL. . . . .
FX2N-80MR-DS . . . . . . . .
FX2N-80MR-ES/UL . . . . .
FX2N-80MT-DSS . . . . . . .
FX2N-80MT-ESS/UL. . . . .
FX3U-128MR/ES . . . . . . .
FX3U-128MT/ESS . . . . . .
FX3U-16MR/DS. . . . . . . .
FX3U-16MR/ES . . . . . . . .
FX3U-16MT/DSS . . . . . . .
FX3U-16MT/ESS . . . . . . .
FX3U-32MR/DS. . . . . . . .
FX3U-32MR/ES . . . . . . . .
FX3U-32MT/DSS . . . . . . .
FX3U-32MT/ESS . . . . . . .
FX3U-48MR/DS. . . . . . . .
FX3U-48MR/ES . . . . . . . .
FX3U-48MT/DSS . . . . . . .
FX3U-48MT/ESS . . . . . . .
FX3U-64MR/DS. . . . . . . .
FX3U-64MR/ES . . . . . . . .
FX3U-64MT/DSS . . . . . . .
FX3U-64MT/ESS . . . . . . .
FX3U-80MR/DS. . . . . . . .
FX3U-80MR/ES . . . . . . . .
FX3U-80MT/DSS . . . . . . .
FX3U-80MT/ESS . . . . . . .
FX3UC-16MT/DSS . . . . . .
FX3UC-32MT/DSS . . . . . .
FX3UC-64MT/DSS . . . . . .
FX3UC-96MT/DSS . . . . . .
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC-Link Master and
Slave Modules . . . . . . . . . .
FX2N-16CCL-M . . . . . . . .
FX2N-32CCL . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Analog
I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . .
FX0N-3A . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FX2N-5A . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Adapter .
FX1N-CNV-BD. . . . . . . . .
FX2NC-CNV-IF . . . . . . . .
FX2N-CNV-BD. . . . . . . . .
FX2N-CNV-IF. . . . . . . . . .
FX3U-CNV-BD . . . . . . . . .
FX3U-USB-BD . . . . . . . . .
Control and Display Pane. .
FX3U-7DM . . . . . . . . . . .
FX3U-7DM-HLD . . . . . . .
Digital and analog
extension adapter . . . . . . .
FX1N-1DA-BD . . . . . . . . .
FX1N-2AD-BD. . . . . . . . .
FX1N-2EYT-BD . . . . . . . .
FX1N-4EX-BD . . . . . . . . .
Display Module . . . . . . . . .
FX1N-5DM . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Features. . . . . .
Ethernet Communications
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FX2NC-ENET-ADP . . . . . .
Extension units and
special function modules . .
FX2NC-16EX-DS . . . . . . .
FX2NC-16EX-T-DS . . . . . .
FX2NC-16EYR-T-DS . . . . .
FX2NC-16EYT-DSS . . . . .
FX2NC-32EX-DS . . . . . . .
FX2NC-32EYT-DSS . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
50
45
. . 57
. . 57
. . 57
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
52
52
52
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
58
58
58
58
58
60
60
43
. . 56
. . 56
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
121
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// INDEX
High-Speed Counter Modules
FX2N-1HC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
FX3U-2HSY-ADP . . . . . . . . . 54
FX3U-4HSX-ADP . . . . . . . . . 54
Interface Adapters . . . . . . . . . 58
FX1N-232-BD . . . . . . . . . . . 58
FX1N-485-BD . . . . . . . . . . . 58
FX2N-232-BD . . . . . . . . . . . 58
FX2N-485-BD . . . . . . . . . . . 58
FX3U-232-BD . . . . . . . . . . . 58
FX3U-485-BD . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Master module. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
FX0N-32NT-DP . . . . . . . . . . 55
FX3U-32DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
FX3U-64DP-M. . . . . . . . . . . 55
Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . 60
FX1N-EEPROM-8L . . . . . . . . 60
FX2N-ROM-E1. . . . . . . . . . . 60
FX3U-FLROM-16 . . . . . . . . . 60
FX3U-FLROM-64 . . . . . . . . . 60
FX3U-FLROM-64L . . . . . . . . 60
FX-EEPROM-16 . . . . . . . . . . 60
FX-EEPROM-8 . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Network Module for
CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
FX2N-32CAN . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Network Module for Ethernet . 56
FX3U-ENET . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Positioning Modules . . . . . . . 54
FX2N-10PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
FX2N-1PG-E . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power supply modules. . . . . . 59
Powered Expansion I/O . . . . . 51
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL . . . . . . . . 51
FX2N-48ER-ES/UL . . . . . . . . 51
Remote I/O Station . . . . . . . . 55
FX2N-32DP-IF . . . . . . . . . . . 55
FX2N-32DP-IF-D . . . . . . . . . 55
SSCNET III Module . . . . . . . . . 54
FX3U-20SSC-H . . . . . . . . . . 54
Unpowered Expansion I/O . . . 51
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL . . . . . . . . 51
FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL . . . . . . . 51
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL . . . . . . 51
FX2N-8ER-ES/UL . . . . . . . . . 51
FX2N-8EX-ES/UL . . . . . . . . . 51
FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL . . . . . . . . 51
FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL . . . . . . . 51
What Components. . . . . . . . . 44
MITSUBISHI ON THE WEB . . . . 124
MODULAR PLCs
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Battery Q6BAT . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connection Cables . . . . . . . 42
Programming Cable . . . . . . 42
Tracking Cable . . . . . . . . . . 42
Analog Input Modules . . . . . . 36
Q62AD-DGH . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Q64AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Q64AD-GH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Q66AD-DG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Q68AD-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Q68ADI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Q68ADV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Analog Output Modules. . . . . 37
Q62DA-FG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Q62DAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Q64DAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Q66DA-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Q68DAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Q68DAVN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Base Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Q312B-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Q33B-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Q35B-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Q38B-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Q38RB-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
122
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:32:40
Q52B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q55B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q612B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q63B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q65B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q68B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q68RB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Input/Output Modules
QX10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QX82-S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY18A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY40P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY41P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY42P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY68A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QY81P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equepment Features . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter Modules
QD60P8-G . . . . . . . . . . . .
QD62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QD62D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QD62E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Module . . . . . . . . .
QJ71C24N . . . . . . . . . . . .
QJ71C24N-R2 . . . . . . . . . .
QJ71C24N-R4 . . . . . . . . . .
QJ71MB91 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Module . . . . . . . . .
QI60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Control Module . . . . . .
Q62HLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MES Interface Module . . . . .
QJ71MES96 . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion CPU Modules . . . . . .
Q172CPUN . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q172HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q172HCPU-T. . . . . . . . . . .
Q173CPUN . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q173HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q173HCPU-T. . . . . . . . . . .
PLC CPU Modules. . . . . . . . .
Q00CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q00JCPU-E . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q02CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q02HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q06HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q12HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q25HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Modules . . . .
Q61P-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q61P-A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q62P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q63P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q63RP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q64P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q64RP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process CPU Modules. . . . . .
Q12PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q-C Controller CPU . . . . . . .
Q06CCPU-V-H01 . . . . . . . .
Q-PC Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Drives for Q-PC . . . . .
PPC-CF-1GB-R. . . . . . . . . .
PPC-CPU 686(MS)-128 . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
28
39
39
39
39
39
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
39
39
40
40
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
32
32
32
34
34
33
34
34
33
PPC-HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Redundant PLC CPU Modules . 32
Q12PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Temperature Modules . . . . . . 38
Q64RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Q64RD-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Q64TCRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Q64TCRTBW . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Q64TCTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Q64TCTTBW . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Q64TD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Q64TDV-GH . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Web Server Module . . . . . . . . 40
QJ71WS96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
What a system looks like. . . . . 29
What you need. . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NETWORKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
AS-Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
A1SJ71AS92 . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
AL2-ASI-BD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
FX2N-32ASI-M . . . . . . . . . . 23
QJ71AS92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FR-A7NCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FX2N-32CAN . . . . . . . . . . . 25
OI-FR-A5NCO . . . . . . . . . . . 25
OI-FR-E5NCO . . . . . . . . . . . 25
CC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2A-HR 575H E . . . . . . . . . . . 15
AJ65BT-64AD . . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BT-64DAI . . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BT-64DAV . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BT-64RD3 . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BT-64RD4 . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BT-68TD . . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTB1-16D . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTB1-16T . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTB2-16D . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTB2-16DR . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTB2-16DT . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTB2-16R . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTC1-32D . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BTC1-32T . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65BT-D62 . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AJ65BT-D62D . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AJ65BT-D62D-S1. . . . . . . . . 17
AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 . . . . . . . . 17
AJ65BT-G4-S3 . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AJ65BT-R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AJ65FBTA2-16T. . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65FBTA2-16TE . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65FBTA4-16DE . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65FBTA42-16DT . . . . . . . 16
AJ65FBTA42-16DTE. . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBT-62DA . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBT-64AD . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-16D . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-16D1 . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-16TE. . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-32D . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-32D1 . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-32T. . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-8D . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB1-8TE. . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB2-8T1. . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB2N-16R . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTB2N-8R . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBT-RPT. . . . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTW4-16D . . . . . . . . . 16
AJ65SBTW4-16DT . . . . . . . . 16
BIF-CC-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CC-Link Cable . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FR-A5NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FR-A7NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FR-E5NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FX2N-16CCL-M . . . . . . . . . . 15
FX2N-32CCL . . . . . . .
GT15-75J61BT13-Z . .
Q80BD-J61BT11N . . .
Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX
Q80BD-J71GP21-SX .
QJ61BT11N. . . . . . . .
QJ71GP21S-SX . . . . .
QJ71GP21-SX . . . . . .
DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . .
A1SJ71DN91. . . . . . .
FR-A5ND. . . . . . . . . .
FR-A7ND. . . . . . . . . .
FR-E5ND . . . . . . . . . .
FX2N-64DNET. . . . . .
QJ71DN91 . . . . . . . .
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . .
A1SJ71E71N3-T. . . . .
A9GT-J71E71-T . . . . .
FX2NC-ENET-ADP . . .
FX3U-ENET . . . . . . . .
IFC-ETCX. . . . . . . . . .
IFC-ETTP . . . . . . . . . .
QJ71E71-100 . . . . . .
QJ71E71-B2 . . . . . . .
QJ71E71-B5 . . . . . . .
QJ71MT91 . . . . . . . .
MELSECNET/H . . . . . . .
A1SJ71BR11 . . . . . . .
A1SJ71LP21 . . . . . . .
A1SJ71LP21GE . . . . .
A1SJ71QBR11 . . . . . .
A1SJ71QLP21GE . . . .
A1SJ72QBR15 . . . . . .
A1SJ72QLP25 . . . . . .
QJ71BR11 . . . . . . . . .
QJ71LP21-25 . . . . . .
QJ71LP21GE . . . . . . .
QJ72BR15 . . . . . . . . .
QJ72LP25-25 . . . . . .
MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . .
A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2 . .
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2 . .
BIF-MD-W . . . . . . . . .
FX3U-232ADP-MB. . .
FX3U-485ADP-MB. . .
QJ71MB91 . . . . . . . .
QJ71MT91 . . . . . . . .
MODEMS . . . . . . . . . . .
MAM-AM20 . . . . . . .
MAM-AM24 . . . . . . .
MAM-AM6 . . . . . . . .
MAM-GM20 . . . . . . .
MAM-GM24 . . . . . . .
MAM-GM6 . . . . . . . .
MIM-A01 . . . . . . . . .
MIM-G01 . . . . . . . . .
Profibus . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1SJ71PB92D . . . . . .
A1SJ71PB93D . . . . . .
BIF-PR-W . . . . . . . . .
FR-A5NP . . . . . . . . . .
FR-A7NP . . . . . . . . . .
FR-E5NP . . . . . . . . . .
FX0N-32NT-DP . . . . .
FX2N-32DP-IF . . . . . .
FX2N-32DP-IF-D . . . .
FX3U-32DP . . . . . . . .
FX3U-64DP-M. . . . . .
IFC-PBDP . . . . . . . . .
MR-MG30 . . . . . . . . .
QJ71PB92V . . . . . . . .
QJ71PB93D. . . . . . . .
ST series . . . . . . . . . .
ST Series . . . . . . . . . .
TYPICAL DISTRIBUTED .
Web Server . . . . . . . . .
QJ71WS96 . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
13
14
14
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
INDEX ///
POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . 120
ALPHA POWER 24-0.75 . . . . . 120
ALPHA POWER 24-1.75 . . . . . 120
ALPHA POWER 24-2.5. . . . . . 120
FX3U-1PSU-5V . . . . . . . . . . . 120
FX3UC-1PS-5V . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PSU 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PSU 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PSU 200-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PSU 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PSU 400-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PSU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
SERVO AND MOTION SYSTEMS 91
Dimensions of motors . . . . . . 96
MR-J2S series . . . . . . . . . . . 96
MR-J3 series . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
MR-J2S Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
200 V Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
400 V Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
MR-J3 Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
200 V Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
400 V Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation Book_UK_2008.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008
Dienstag, 8. April 2008 18:32:42
Positioning Modules . .
QD75D1 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75D2 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75D4 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75M1 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75M2 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75M4 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75MH1. . . . . . . . .
QD75MH2. . . . . . . . .
QD75MH4. . . . . . . . .
QD75P1 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75P2 . . . . . . . . . .
QD75P4 . . . . . . . . . .
Q-Motion CPU . . . . . . .
Q172CPUN . . . . . . . .
Q172HCPU . . . . . . . .
Q173CPUN . . . . . . . .
Q173HCPU . . . . . . . .
Servo Motor Features. .
Servo Motors Overview
System Configuration .
X-Y Table System . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
105
105
105
105
105
. 94
. 95
. 92
. 93
SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HMI Programming . . . . . . . . . .
E Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GTWorks2 (GT Designer2) . .
MX4 Software Integration . . . .
PC Data Management . . . . . . .
MX Component . . . . . . . . . .
MX OPC Server . . . . . . . . . . .
MX Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Programming . . . . . . . . . .
GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . .
GX Developer FX. . . . . . . . . .
GX IEC Developer . . . . . . . . .
GX IEC Developer FX . . . . . . .
SCADA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MX4 SCADA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GT Simulator. . . . . . . . . . . . .
GX Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GTWorks2 (SoftGOT). . . . . . .
MX4 HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
6
6
6
4
7
7
7
7
8
9
9
8
8
5
5
9
9
9
5
5
5
Specials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alpha - ALVLS (AL-PCS/WIN)
Compatibility Table. . . . . . .
FR Configurator (MX 500) . .
FX Configurator FP . . . . . . .
GX Configurator DP . . . . . .
MR Configurator . . . . . . . . .
MT Developer . . . . . . . . . . .
Visualisation Software . . . . . .
10
10
12
11
11
11
10
10
.4
123
Farbprofil: Deaktiviert
Komposit Standardbildschirm
/// MITSUBISHI ON THE WEB
The Mitsubishi Industrial Automation Internet Portal
The Mitsubishi Automation website
MyMitsubishi benefits at a glance
Our website provides a simple and fast way of
accessing further technical data and up to the
minute details on our products and services.
Manuals and catalogues are available in several
different languages and can be downloaded
for free. The main page is availbalbe under
www.mitsubishi-automation.com. The web site
is available in more than 10 different languages
and the number of languages is still growing.
Follow the drop down menu in the upper right
corner of the web site to see if your language is
already available.
As a registered user you have free access to
many useful additional services that are not
available to the general public.
앬 Additional downloads
In addition to brochures, technical catalogues
and manuals, MyMitsubishi members can also
download the latest software updates and drivers, CAD, GSD and EDS files and copies of product certifications.
앬 Newsletter
Stay up to date: Subscribers to our email newsletter don’t miss any events or special promotions. Once a month you will receive the latest
news from the world of Mitsubishi automation
technology. Topics include product news, case
studies on applications realised with Mitsubishi
products in all fields of automation, trade show
dates, events for customers and special offers.
Always up to date with the Mitsubishi Newsletter.
MyMitsubishi offers numerous free downloads.
The European Automation portal
MyMitsubishi gives you more
Are you interested in news about products and
technologies from Mitsubishi Electric for factory
and process automation applications? Do you
need an address in your area for a local
Mitsubishi distributor? Or are you already a customer and need quick access to the latest technical information? You can already find all this
and more on our website, but with MyMitsubishi
you can find the information you need even
faster and more easily and you also get some
valuable additional services. Take advantage of
MyMitsubishi – it’s your direct channel to
Mitsubishi automation technology.
앬
Graphics database
MyMitsubishi members also have access to our
graphics database with product photos,
graphics and illustrations from our brochures
and catalogues. If you like, you can also download and use a selection of our wallpaper images
to use as your desktop background.
앬 Personal favorites
As soon as you log in, the latest news will be displayed on the MyMitsubishi start page. If you
want, you can also define your own personal
favourites list for even faster access to pages
that you view frequently. Once you have
entered them the links in your favourites list will
also be displayed automatically as soon as you
log on.
How to register
Click on the
link on the
MyMitsubishi page to display the registration
form. Enter a user name and password of your
choice and your contact details, then click on
the Register button. Shortly after doing this you
will receive an email asking you to confirm and
complete the registration process. If you ever
forget your password just click on the
link to have it sent to your registered
email address. You are in complete control of
how we work with you. You can edit, modify or
even delete your registration at any time from
within your personal profile.
124
Automation Book_UK_2008_s124.prn
Automation Book_UK_2008_druck
Mittwoch, 9. April 2008 08:56:00
Free access to the comprehensive graphics database.
Manage your own favorites list.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Automation solutions /// Automation solutions /// Automation solutions ///
A world of
automation solutions
Robots
Motion control and servos
LV circuit protection
Inverters
Laser machines
CNC
controllers
HMI and GOTs
Micro PLCs
EDM machines
Modular PLCs
Mitsubishi offer a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to CNC and EDM machines.
A name to trust
Since its beginnings in 1870, some 45
companies use the Mitsubishi name,
covering a spectrum of finance, commerce and industry.
The Mitsubishi brand name is recognized around the world as a symbol of
premium quality.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation represents space development, transportation, semiconductors, energy systems,
communications and information processing, audio visual equipment, home
electronics, building and energy management and automation systems, and
has 237 factories and laboratories worldwide in over 121 countries.
This is why you can rely on a Mitsubishi
automation solution – because we know
first hand about the need for reliable,
efficient, easy-to-use automation and
control.
As one of the world’s leading companies
with a global turnover of 3.4 trillion Yen
(approximately $30.8 billion), employing
over 100,000 people, Mitsubishi Electric
has the resource and the commitment to
deliver the ultimate in service and support as well as the best products.
Global Partner. Local Friend.
EUROPEAN SERVICE GROUP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Gothaer Str. 8
D-40880 RATINGEN
Free European Hotline:
+49 (0) 1805 000 765
Training Hotline:
+49 (0) 2102 486 1880
EUROPEAN
DEVELOPMENT CENTER
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Gothaer Str. 8
D-40880 RATINGEN
FRANCE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
25, Boulevard des Bouvets
F-92741 NANTERRE CEDEX
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68
GERMANY
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Gothaer Str. 8
D-40880 RATINGEN
Phone: +49 (0) 1805 000 765
Training: +49 (0) 2102 486 1880
UNITED KINGDOM
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Travellers Lane
UK-HATFIELD HERTS. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0) 17 07 / 27 61 00
Training:
+44 (0) 17 07 / 27 89 16
Customer Technology Centre,
Hatfield
Phone: +44 (0) 17 07 / 27 89 90
Regional Automation Center,
Wakefield
Phone: +44 (0) 1924 255 628
IRELAND
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Irish branch, Westgate Business
Park, Ballymount
IRL-DUBLIN 24
Phone: +353 (0)1 41 98 80 0
SPAIN
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Carretera de Rubí 76-80
E-08190 SANT CUGAT DEL
VALLÉS
Phone:+34 93 / 56 5 3131
ITALY
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Viale Colleoni 7
I-20041 AGRATE BRIANZA (MI)
Phone: +39 (0)39 / 60 53 1
For more information about our partners across Europe, please visit the contacts page of our internet site at www.mitsubishi-automation.com
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Strasse 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 2102 4860 /// Fax: +49 (0) 2102 486112 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.com /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com
© Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// Specifications subject to change without notice /// Art.-no. 170021-D /// 04.2008
All trademarks and copyrights acknowledged